JP6669112B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine.

  Generally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, a music piece selected by a player from a plurality of music pieces may be output as an effect during a jackpot game (for example, see Patent Literature 1).

JP 2016-49375 A

  By the way, as a gaming machine, it is important to increase the level of interest in the game and the interest in the game to improve the player's willingness to play the game.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the degree of interest in a game and the interest in the game to improve the player's willingness to play the game.

The gaming machine according to the present invention,
Main control means (41) for determining whether or not to shift the game state to a special game state advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition;
Effecting means (26, 341 etc.) including image display means (341) for effecting an image, and sound output means (26) for effecting the output of music;
A music selection image (83) for allowing a player to select a music to be output by the audio output means (26) from a plurality of music is displayed on the image display means (341), and based on the music selection image (83). Effect execution means (51) for outputting the music selected by the player to the sound output means (26);
Operating means (21) operated by a player when selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26) based on the music selection image (83) displayed by the image display means (341);
With
The effect executing means (51) includes:
The tune selection image (83) indicates that the tune is a tentatively selected tune that can be selected by at least a determination operation on the operation means (21) by a player for selecting a tune to be output by the audio output means (26). Displaying the temporarily selected music image (832) on the image display means (341);
Changing the tentatively selected music image (832) in the music selection image (83) in response to an operation on the operation means (21) by the player;
When the provisionally selected music image (832) is displayed on the image display means (341), the audio output means (26) outputs the provisionally selected music piece. Output the selected music as the selected music from the audio output means (26);
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the tentatively selected tune output from the audio output means (26) is continuously output at the timing when the determination operation is performed.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the degree of interest in a game and the interest in the game and improving the player's willingness to play the game.

FIG. 2 is a perspective view illustrating an example of a configuration of a gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a development view illustrating an example of a configuration of a gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a development view illustrating an example of a configuration of a gaming machine. The front view which shows an example of the game board of a gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a system configuration of a gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a storage area of a gaming machine. FIG. 3 is a view showing an example of various tables used in a gaming machine. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a main timer interrupt process executed by the gaming machine. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a start winning process executed by the gaming machine. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a first hold command setting process executed by the gaming machine. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a main process executed by the gaming machine. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a game turn control process executed by the gaming machine. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a data setting process performed by the gaming machine. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a change start process executed by the gaming machine. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a sub timer interrupt process executed by the gaming machine. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of an operation button operation detection process executed by the gaming machine. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of an operation detection pattern determination process performed by the gaming machine. 9 is a table showing a relationship between a detection pattern and an operation status. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a command determination process executed by the gaming machine. FIG. 3 is a view showing an example of various tables used in a gaming machine. FIG. 3 is a view showing an example of various tables used in a gaming machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect determination process performed by a gaming machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the big hit game production process performed by a gaming machine. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a music selection image display process executed by the gaming machine. The figure which shows an example of the music selection image display screen in the symbol display part of a gaming machine. The figure which shows the example of a change of the temporary selection image in a music selection image. The figure which shows the example of a change of the temporary selection image in a music selection image. The figure which shows the other example of the temporary music selection image in a music selection image. The figure which shows an example of the music selection counter data table used by a gaming machine. The figure which shows an example of the selected music list table and the non-selected music list table used in the gaming machine. The figure which shows an example of the initial arrangement | positioning order data table with respect to the some music used by a gaming machine. The figure which shows an example of the initial arrangement | sequence of a music selection image. The figure which shows an example of the initial music selection image display screen in the symbol display part of a gaming machine. The figure which shows the other example of the initial arrangement | sequence of a music selection image. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of an initial provisionally selected music piece determination process performed by a gaming machine. The figure which shows an example of the temporary selection music lottery table used by a gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of an initial provisionally selected music piece output process executed by the gaming machine. The figure which shows an example of the melody pattern table used by a gaming machine. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a music selection process performed by the gaming machine. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a temporarily selected music piece output process executed by the gaming machine. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a selected music piece output process executed by the gaming machine. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a music selection button effect process executed by the gaming machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the 5R certain variable music selection button effect determination processing performed by a gaming machine. The figure which shows an example of the music selection button production table used by a gaming machine. The figure which shows an example of the 5R certain variable music selection button effect lottery table used by a gaming machine. The figure which shows an example of the 5R certain variable music selection button production lottery table determination table used by a gaming machine. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of 16R certain variable selection button effect determination processing performed by a gaming machine. The figure which shows an example of the 16R certain variable music selection button production lottery table used by a gaming machine. The figure which shows an example of the 5R certain variable music selection button production lottery table determination table used by a gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a music selection counter data update process executed by the gaming machine. FIG. 3 is a view showing an example of various tables used in a gaming machine. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a game setting process executed by the gaming machine. The figure which shows an example of the display screen in the symbol display part of a gaming machine. The figure which shows an example of the display screen in the symbol display part of a gaming machine. The figure which shows the example of a transition of the display screen in the symbol display part of a gaming machine. The figure which shows the example of a transition of the display screen in the symbol display part of a gaming machine. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a game start standby process executed by the gaming machine. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a top menu screen process executed by the gaming machine. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a game setting screen process executed by the gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a setting item selection process performed by the gaming machine. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a melody pattern setting screen process executed by the gaming machine. The figure which shows an example of the display screen in the symbol display part of a gaming machine. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a music list display setting screen process executed by the gaming machine. The figure which shows an example of the display screen in the symbol display part of a gaming machine. The figure which shows an example of the display screen in the symbol display part of a gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a music selection button effect setting screen process executed by the gaming machine. The figure which shows an example of the display screen in the symbol display part of a gaming machine. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a setting history selection process performed by a gaming machine. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a melody pattern setting history screen process executed by the gaming machine. The figure which shows an example of the display screen in the symbol display part of a gaming machine. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a music list display setting history screen process executed by the gaming machine. The figure which shows an example of the display screen in the symbol display part of a gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a music selection button effect history screen process executed by the gaming machine. The figure which shows an example of the display screen in the symbol display part of a gaming machine. The figure which shows an example of the melody pattern table used by a gaming machine. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a temporarily selected music piece output process executed by the gaming machine. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a selected music piece output process executed by the gaming machine. The figure which shows an example of the melody pattern table used by a gaming machine. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a temporarily selected music piece output process executed by the gaming machine. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a selected music piece output process executed by the gaming machine. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a music selection button effect process executed by the gaming machine. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a music selection button effect process executed by the gaming machine.

  Hereinafter, a first embodiment to a sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings to provide an understanding of the present invention. Further, the following embodiments are merely examples embodying the present invention and do not limit the technical scope of the present invention.

[First Embodiment]
First, a gaming machine 10 according to a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Schematic configuration of gaming machine 10]
Here, FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the gaming machine 10, FIGS. 2 and 3 are development views of the gaming machine 10, and FIG. 4 is a front view of the gaming board 31 of the gaming machine 10. Hereinafter, the expressions of front, rear, left and right and up and down used in the present embodiment are defined by the front and rear direction D1, the vertical direction D2, and the left and right direction D3 shown in FIGS.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the gaming machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine including a front frame 11, an inner frame 12, a back pack unit 13, and an outer frame 14, and is provided in an island facility (not shown) of a gaming hall. When the outer frame 14 is fixed, it is installed in a game hall. In the present embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example of a gaming machine. However, for example, other machines such as a spinning-type gaming machine (slot machine), an arrangement ball gaming machine, and a jiya ball gaming machine are described. The present invention can also be applied to the above-mentioned gaming machines.

  The front frame 11 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 14 by a rotatably supported left end portion of the outer frame 14. Further, the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11 by a rotatably supported left end portion of the inner frame 12. Further, the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 12 by a rotatably supported left end portion of the inner frame 12.

[Configuration of Front Frame 11]
1 and 2, the front frame 11 includes an operation button 20, a selection determining unit 21, a firing handle 22, an upper plate 23, a lower plate 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, an illumination unit 27, and the like. .

  The operation button 20 is provided in front of the upper plate 23. The operation button 20 includes an operation switch 20a (see FIG. 5) for switching an input signal to the audio lamp control device 5, which will be described later, according to the presence or absence of a pressing operation. Thus, the sound lamp control device 5 can determine the operation state (with or without operation) of the operation button 20. The operation button 20 is used to reflect the player's intention in the big hit game effect in the game turn effect process (step S1709 in FIG. 15) described later.

  The installation position of the operation button 20 is not limited to the position in front of the upper plate 23, and may be any position on the front frame 11 as long as the position can be operated by the player. The number of operation buttons 20 is not limited to one, and may be two or more. Furthermore, the operation switch 20a is not limited to a contact switch, and may be, for example, a piezoelectric element as long as it can be used to detect the presence or absence of an operation by a player.

  It is also conceivable that a touch panel that displays a touch key instead of the operation button 20 and receives an operation of the touch key by a player is provided as an operation unit. Further, instead of the operation button 20, a panel 25 and a touch sensor for detecting a touch operation of the player on the panel 25 may be provided as operation means. The operation button 20 may be provided with a jog dial. In these cases, the operation of the player on the touch panel or the panel 25 is reflected in the effect in the later-described game effect effect processing (step S1709 in FIG. 15).

  The selection determining unit 21 is operated by the player, and performs a pressing operation of the player in a music selection process (step S2220 in FIG. 23) described later and a game setting process (step S1711 in FIG. 15) described later. Push button to accept. The selection determination unit 21 includes a plurality of selection buttons 21A and a determination button 21B.

  The plurality of selection buttons 21A are operated by a player to temporarily select a desired item from options (items) displayed on the symbol display unit 341 described later in the music selection process and the game setting process. An upper selection button 211, a lower selection button 212, a left selection button 213, and a right selection button 214 are included. These selection buttons 211 to 214 include operation switches 211a to 211d (see FIG. 5) for switching input signals to the audio lamp control device 5 described later. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 can determine the operation state (with or without operation) of the selection buttons 211 to 214.

  On the other hand, the decision button 21B is operated by the player to decide the provisionally selected item. The enter button 21B includes an operation switch 21Ba for switching an input signal to the audio lamp control device 5 described later. Thus, the sound lamp control device 5 can determine the operation state (with or without operation) of the determination button 21B.

  Further, instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211 to 214) and the determination button 21B, a touch panel that displays a touch key and receives an operation by the player of the touch key may be provided as an operation unit. Further, instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211 to 214) and the determination button 21B, a panel 25 and a touch sensor for detecting a player's touch operation on the panel 25 may be provided as operation means. It is also conceivable to provide a jog dial in place of the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211 to 214).

  The firing handle 22 is a rotary handle operated by a player to fire a game ball. In the gaming machine 10, a basic game is performed by firing a game ball from a game ball firing mechanism 32 described later with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the firing handle 22 by the player. In the gaming machine 10, when the shooting handle 22 is operated by the player, the driving of the game ball firing mechanism 32 is controlled such that one game ball is fired toward the game area in 0.6 seconds.

  The upper plate 23 is disposed below the panel 25, stores game balls paid out from a payout device 132 (see FIG. 3) of a payout mechanism 130 described later, and arranges the stored game balls in one row. It is used to guide the game ball firing mechanism 32 in an aligned state. The lower plate 24 is provided further below the upper plate 23, and is used to store excess game balls in the upper plate 23.

  The panel 25 is a colorless or colored transparent glass or synthetic resin that allows a player to visually recognize the gaming board 31 (see FIG. 2) of the inner frame 12 from the front of the gaming machine 10. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the speakers 26 are a pair of speakers provided on the left and right sides of the upper end of the front frame 11, and play the game (step S 1709 in FIG. 15), the big hit game ( 23) is performed. The installation position of the speaker 26 is not limited to the upper end of the front frame 11. The illumination unit 27 has a built-in light source such as a display lamp and an LED, and performs a lamp effect in a lighting mode such as lighting or blinking. Note that the speaker 26 is an example of the audio output means of the present invention, and constitutes the directing means of the present invention.

[Configuration of Inner Frame 12]
The inner frame 12 includes a game board 31, a game ball firing mechanism 32, and a control unit 33, as shown in FIGS. In FIG. 2, the illustration on the game board 31 is omitted for simplicity of illustration.

  The control unit 33 has a main control unit 331 and a sub control unit 332. In the gaming machine 10, various commands (control signals) for instructing control contents are transmitted from the main control unit 331 to the sub control unit 332 in one direction. Details of the main control unit 331 and the sub control unit 332 will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the game board 31 has an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general winning opening 313, a first operating opening 314, a second operating opening 315, a variable winning opening 316, a through gate 317, and an out opening 318. , A variable display unit 34, a magnet sensor 35, a radio wave sensor 36, and a main display unit 37.

  The inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 are conveyance paths for sending out the game balls fired from the game ball firing mechanism 32 toward a game area on the board of the game board 31. Then, after being fired from the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312, game balls that have not entered the general winning opening 313, the first operating opening 314, the second operating opening 315, or the variable winning opening 316 are discharged from the out opening 318. Is done.

  Here, the game ball firing mechanism 32 includes a firing rail 321, a ball feeder 322, and a solenoid 323, as shown in FIG. The shooting rail 321 is formed from the game ball firing mechanism 32 to the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 of the game board 31, and the game ball fired from the game ball firing mechanism 32 is sent to the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. To guide. The ball feeder 322 has driving means such as a solenoid, and supplies the game balls stored in the upper plate 23 to the firing rail 321 one by one. The solenoid 323 is a driving unit that fires the game ball supplied on the firing rail 321 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. In the gaming machine 10, the solenoid 323 is driven and controlled in accordance with the operation of the firing handle 22 by the player, and the game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism 32 to the game board 31. In addition, the game ball launching mechanism 32 may be a mechanism that launches the game ball using another driving unit such as a motor instead of the solenoid 323.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 4, the general winning opening 313, the first operating opening 314, the second operating opening 315, the variable winning opening 316, and the out opening 318 are formed with openings that penetrate the gaming board 31 in the front-rear direction. ing. And, on the back side of the game board 31, it is possible to individually detect the entrance of a game ball corresponding to each of the general winning opening 313, the first operating opening 314, the second operating opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316. Ball entry sensors 313a, 314a, 315a, 316a (see FIG. 5) are provided. The through gate 317 is a gate through which a game ball can pass, and has a ball entry sensor 317a (see FIG. 5) capable of individually detecting a game ball passing through the through gate 317. In the game board 31, when the game ball sent to the game board 31 passes on the right side of the game board 31, that is, when the player hits right, the game ball may pass through the through gate 317.

  The ball entry sensors 313a to 317a are electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection results of the ball entry sensors 313a to 317a are input to the main control unit 331. Hereinafter, detection of the entry of a game ball by the entry sensors 313a to 317a may be referred to as winning. Note that the ball sensors 313a to 317a are, for example, proximity sensors of an electromagnetic induction type, but may be any sensors capable of individually detecting the ball entry of a game ball by another detection method.

  In addition, the second operating port 315 is provided with an electric accessory 315b for switching whether or not there is a restriction on entering a game ball into the second operating port 315. The electric accessory 315b is opened and closed by driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. Then, in the game board 31, the opening of the electric accessory 315b allows the game ball to enter the second operating port 315, and the closing of the electric accessory 315b allows the entering of the game ball to the second operating port 315. The sphere is restricted.

  Further, the variable winning opening 316 is provided with an opening / closing door 316b for switching whether or not there is a restriction on a game ball entering the variable winning opening 316. The door 316b is opened and closed by driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. In the gaming board 31, the opening of the opening / closing door 316b enables the entry of gaming balls into the variable winning opening 316, and the closing of the opening / closing door 316b limits the entering of gaming balls into the variable winning opening 316. You.

  In the gaming machine 10, when the entering ball of the game ball into the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315 is detected by the incoming ball sensor 314a or the incoming ball sensor 315a, the main control unit 331 determines whether or not a jackpot is determined. (Hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “big hit lottery”). Then, the main control unit 331 controls the display on the main display unit 37 according to the lottery result. The jackpot lottery result by the main control unit 331 is transmitted to the sub control unit 332, and the sub control unit 332 controls the display of the variable display unit 34 according to the lottery result.

  Further, in the gaming machine 10, when the entry of a game ball to the general winning opening 313, the first operating opening 314, the second operating opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316 is detected by the entrance sensors 313a to 316a, A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. For example, the number of prize balls when entering the general winning opening 313 is 10, the number of prize balls when entering the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315, and the variable winning opening 316 is entered. In this case, the number of prize balls is 15. In particular, in the gaming machine 10, when the result of the lottery performed by the main control unit 331 is a big hit, the game machine shifts to the special game state, and the variable winning opening 316 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) a predetermined number of times ( By repeating this (for example, 5 times or 16 times), a large amount of prize balls are paid out, and the player is given a gaming value.

  When a game ball wins in the first operation port 314 or the second operation port 315, a jackpot lottery is executed. Then, if the result of the win / fail determination is a win, the game shifts to a predetermined jackpot gaming state (special gaming state) which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. In the present embodiment, the jackpot gaming state includes a 5R jackpot gaming state (5R normal jackpot gaming state and a 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state) and a 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state. The 5R jackpot gaming state includes an open / close execution mode in which a round winning game 316 is opened five times until a predetermined time elapses or a predetermined number of game balls or more enter the variable winning game port 316. State. The 16R probability change jackpot game state is a game state including an open / close execution mode in which a round game is performed 16 times, and a larger amount of prize balls can be paid out than the 5R jackpot game state, and is more advantageous to the player than the 5R jackpot game state. Game state.

  The variable display unit 34 has a symbol display section 341 such as a liquid crystal display which is arranged so as to be visible through an opening 31A formed substantially in the center of the game board 31. The symbol display unit 341 displays a still image or a moving image, and the display content of the symbol display unit 341 is controlled by the sub control unit 332. Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, a symbol variation display and a game effect display according to the result of the jackpot lottery performed by the main control unit 331 in response to a ball entering the upper operating port 314 or the lower operating port 315. Various displays are performed. The symbol display unit 341 is an example of the image display unit of the present invention, and constitutes the rendering unit of the present invention. Further, the symbol display section 341 may be a dot matrix, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like, or may be a combination of a liquid crystal display or a plasma display and an organic EL display. Further, it is conceivable to provide one or a plurality of sub-display units separately from the symbol display unit 341. The sub display unit is arranged, for example, at the upper or lower part of the symbol display unit 341 or at the left or right part. The sub display unit may be movable between a position where the symbol display unit 341 is covered and a position where the symbol display unit 341 is not covered. Further, the sub display unit may be arranged on the upper plate 23. The sub display unit may constitute the image display unit of the present invention alone or together with the symbol display unit 341.

  For example, the symbol variation display on the symbol display unit 341 is performed by sequentially scrolling a plurality of types of main symbols numbered “1” to “9” vertically or horizontally. In addition, a sub-design such as another character or a design may be displayed between the main designs. Further, in the present embodiment, it is assumed that there are no sub-designs and the main design types are "1" to "9".

  In the gaming machine 10, in each of the game times, the symbol variation display is executed so that the variation of all the main symbols stops after a preset variation display time has elapsed from the start of the symbol variation display on the symbol display unit 341. You. More specifically, in the symbol variation display, first, all main symbols fluctuate along a preset variation direction (horizontal or vertical), and the variation of a plurality of main symbols stops in order. Then, when the fluctuation of the main symbol in all the lines is stopped and a predetermined time has elapsed, the symbol fluctuation display ends.

  When the symbol variation display on the symbol display unit 341 ends, the symbol display unit 341 displays a state in which main symbols are arranged on one or more effective lines. At this time, the stop state of the main symbol clearly or suggests the result of the jackpot lottery by the main control unit 331. For example, when the result of the jackpot lottery is “5R probability variable jackpot”, “16R probability variable jackpot” or “5R regular jackpot”, a state where the main symbols of the same symbol are arranged in an activated line is displayed, and the jackpot is determined. Is specified. In addition, the jackpot type may be specified by a combination of main symbols in the activated line, but is not necessarily specified. Specifically, for example, when the result of the jackpot lottery is “16R probability changing jackpot”, a symbol combination of, for example, “777” set as a symbol combination indicating the 16R probability changing jackpot among the main symbols is arranged in an active line. Or a state in which the same symbol combinations other than "777" are arranged in an effective line. When the result of the jackpot lottery is “5R probable jackpot”, a state in which symbol combinations such as “333” set in advance as a symbol combination indicating the 5R probable jackpot in the main symbols are arranged in an active line. A state is displayed in which the same symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations indicating the 16R probability change jackpot or the 5R probability change jackpot such as “777” or “333” are arranged in the active line. When the result of the jackpot lottery is “5R normal jackpot”, a combination of symbols indicating a probable variable jackpot such as “222” or “444” set in advance as a symbol combination indicating a normal jackpot among the main symbols, for example. A state is displayed in which combinations of the same symbols other than are arranged in an activated line. When the jackpot lottery result is “out”, a state in which combinations of different main symbols are arranged in an active line (for example, “323” or “723”) is displayed.

  In addition, the symbol display unit 341 displays a game cycle effect indicating the degree of expectation that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, along with a symbol variation display in each game cycle. When the result of the jackpot lottery is “16R probability changing jackpot”, when a state in which the jackpot symbol combinations other than the combination of the main symbols indicating the 16R probability changing jackpot are arranged on the activated line is displayed, the game rendition is performed as 5R. A suggestion effect indicating that it is a probability variable jackpot or a 5R regular jackpot is executed. In this case, in the game turn effect or the jackpot game effect, a promotion effect or the like that clearly indicates that the result of the jackpot lottery of the game time is a 16R variable jackpot is executed. Similarly, when the result of the jackpot lottery is “5R probable jackpot”, when a state in which the jackpot symbol combinations other than the main symbol combination indicating the probable jackpot are arranged on the activated line is displayed, the game rendition is performed as 5R. A suggestion effect that usually indicates a jackpot is executed. In this case, in the game turn effect or the jackpot game effect, a promotion effect or the like that clearly indicates that the result of the jackpot lottery of the game time is a 5R sure-change jackpot is executed.

  Further, when the gaming state shifts to the jackpot gaming state, the symbol display section 341 displays a jackpot gaming effect including an opening effect, an opening / closing execution mode effect, and an ending effect. In the present embodiment, a predetermined period (for example, from the start of the first round game to the end of the first round game in the open / close execution mode) elapses in the symbol display unit 341 from the start of execution of the opening / closing execution mode effect. Up to this point, a music selection image 83 (see FIG. 25) that allows selection of music output from the speaker 26 as a jackpot game effect is displayed. Hereinafter, a period during which the music selection image 83 is displayed may be referred to as a music selection validity period. On the other hand, when the game round effect or the jackpot game effect is not displayed (in the case of the non-game state), the game setting image can be displayed by the operation of the operation button 20 by the player, and the game setting image can be selected based on the game setting image. By operating the determination unit 21 (the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211 to 214) and the determination button 21B), it is possible to perform game settings. The details of the song selection process in the big hit game effect (big hit game state) (step S2220 in FIG. 23) and the game setting process in the non-game state (step S1711 in FIG. 15) will be described later.

  The magnet sensor 35 is provided around the operation unit 310 and on the back side of the game board 31. The magnet sensor 35 is electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection result of the magnet sensor 35 is input to the main control unit 331. This makes it possible to detect the improper act when the act of trying to guide the game ball to the operation section 310 using the magnet is performed improperly.

  The radio wave sensor 36 is provided around the first operating port 314 and the second operating port 315 and on the back side of the game board 31. The radio wave sensor 36 is electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection result of the radio wave sensor 36 is input to the main control unit 331. Thereby, when an act of illegally inputting a radio wave to the detection sensor 314a or the detection sensor 315a to erroneously detect the entry of a game ball is performed, it is possible to detect the illegal act. The radio wave sensor 36 can detect radio waves of, for example, 50 MHz to 3 GHz. In addition, a radio wave sensor 36 may be similarly provided around the special winning opening 319b.

  The main display section 37 includes an LED pair 371, two 7-segment displays 372 and 373, and an LED group 374 arranged on the upper right portion of the game board 31. The LED pair 371 displays a result of a lottery in the main control unit 331 as to whether or not to open the electric accessory 315b in a lighting pattern, triggered by winning in the through gate 317. On the 7-segment display 372, the symbol change display is performed with the winning of the first operating port 314 as a trigger, and the symbol according to the jackpot lottery result in the main control unit 331 is stopped and displayed. On the 7-segment display 373, the symbol change display is performed with the winning of the second operating port 315 as a trigger, and the symbol according to the result of the jackpot lottery in the main control unit 331 is stopped and displayed. In the LED group 374, the number N of holdings and the number M of holdings of the variable display generated by winning the first operating port 314 and the second operating port 315 are displayed by a plurality of LED lighting patterns.

[Back pack unit 13]
The back pack unit 13 includes a payout mechanism 130 and a peripheral control unit 140, as shown in FIG.

  The payout mechanism 130 includes a tank 131 that stores ball games supplied from an island facility (not shown) in the game hall, and a payout device 132 that pays out game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper plate 23. When the game balls on the upper plate 23 are saturated, the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 are paid out to the lower plate 24.

  The peripheral control unit 140 includes a payout control device 7, a firing control device 8, and a power supply control device 9 (see FIG. 5). The payout control device 7 controls the number of game balls paid out by the payout device 132 and the like. The launch control device 8 controls the game ball launch mechanism 32 according to the operation of the launch handle 22. The power supply control device 9 converts power supplied from an island facility (not shown) to which the gaming machine 10 is connected to a predetermined voltage level, and supplies the power to various control devices and various driving units provided in the gaming machine 10. I do.

[System Configuration of Gaming Machine 10]
Next, a system configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG.

[Main control unit 331]
The main control unit 331 is an example of a main control unit including the main control device 4 that executes main control of a game in the gaming machine 10. The main control device 4 executes a jackpot lottery as a lottery for shifting to a predetermined jackpot gaming state. The main control device 4 includes an MPU 41, an input / output I / F 42, and the like. The MPU 41 is an arithmetic device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Further, the MPU 41 includes a ROM 411 and a RAM 412. The MPU 41 executes various processes according to a control program stored in the ROM 411 or the like. Further, part or all of the processing executed by main controller 4 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

  The input / output I / F 42 is an input / output interface that inputs various signals to the main controller 4 and outputs control signals from the main controller 4. In addition, the input / output I / F 42 is connected with ball entry sensors 313a to 317a, a magnet sensor 35, a radio wave sensor 36, a main display unit 37, and the like. Then, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the general winning port 313, the first operating port 314, the second operating port 315, the variable winning port 316, and the through gate 317 have a ball based on the detection signals from the ball input sensors 313a to 317a. Judge. Further, the MPU 41 determines the presence or absence of a fraudulent act using a magnet or a radio wave based on detection signals from the magnet sensor 35 and the radio wave sensor 36. Further, the input / output I / F 42 is connected to a sound lamp control device 5, a payout control device 7, a firing control device 8, a power control device 9, and the like.

  Then, the MPU 41 outputs various commands to the audio ramp control device 5, such as a variation pattern command, a hold number command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot start command, and a jackpot end command. For example, the variation pattern command is a command indicating the result of the jackpot lottery and the variation display time, and is stored in a later-described holding storage area 412b when the symbol variation display is started by the symbol display unit 341 and the main display unit 37. It is determined on the basis of the information which is output to the audio lamp control device 5. When the number of holds N or the number of holds M stored in the hold storage area 412b described later increases, the hold number command is used to notify the number of holds N or M after the increase. Is output to The first hold command and the second hold command are output to the voice lamp control device 5 when the number of hold N or the number of hold M currently stored in the hold storage area 412b described later increases, and the shift command is When the number N or the number of holdings M decreases, the number is output to the audio lamp control device 5 to notify the number of holdings N or the number M of holdings after the decrease. The jackpot start command is output to the audio ramp control device 5 when shifting to the jackpot game state. The big hit end command is output to the sound lamp control device 5 when the big hit game state ends. In addition, other various commands may be output from the main control device 4 to the audio lamp control device 5, but the description thereof is omitted.

  The main controller 4 also includes an oscillation circuit and a frequency dividing circuit as means for supplying an operation clock to the MPU 41. The oscillating circuit outputs a clock signal of a predetermined frequency, and the frequency dividing circuit changes the frequency of the clock signal output from the oscillating circuit and inputs it to the MPU 41. Specifically, an execution cycle of a main timer interrupt process described below executed by the MPU 41 is determined by a clock signal output from the frequency divider.

  In the present embodiment, the clock signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the MPU 41 at a preset interval (for example, 4 msec). It is assumed that the loading process is started and executed. Note that the oscillation circuit and the frequency divider circuit are also mounted on the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 as necessary, and supply operation clocks of various control entities in the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140. Further, a clock signal may be supplied from the main control unit 331 to the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140.

  The ROM 411 is a nonvolatile storage unit in which various control programs and various parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 412 is a volatile storage unit in which various information can be read and written, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) of various processes executed by the MPU 41. For example, the RAM 412 is used for setting various commands transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 and the like. Note that the RAM 412 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

  Here, an electrical configuration for the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 to perform a jackpot lottery or the like will be described with reference to FIG. Specifically, the MPU 41 uses the various counter information stored in the lottery counter 412a, the hold storage area 412b, and the power saving area 412c of the RAM 412 to execute a jackpot lottery and a setting of a variable display time.

  The lottery counter includes a jackpot random number counter C1 used in a jackpot winning lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 used in determining a jackpot type, and a reach random number counter C3 used in determining a missed type. It is. Further, the lottery counter 412a includes a random number initial value counter CIN1 used for setting an initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a fluctuation type counter CS1 for determining a fluctuation display time in the main display unit 37 and the symbol display unit 341. It is. Further, in the lottery counter 412a, an ordinary random number counter C4 used for a lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 315b of the second operating port 315 is in the electrical open state and an initial value setting of the ordinary random number counter C4 are set. And a normal hit initial value counter CIN2 used for the above. Hereinafter, when these plural types of counters are collectively described, they are simply referred to as counters.

  The counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1 are used as loop counters in which the MPU 41 adds 1 to the previous value at short time intervals and returns to 0 after reaching the preset maximum value. The updated values are recorded in the counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1, and are referred to by the MPU 41 when setting a jackpot lottery and a variable display time.

  The suspension storage area 412b includes a first suspension storage area REA, a second suspension storage area REB, and an execution area AE. The first reserved storage area REA includes a first reserved area REA1, a second reserved area REA2, a third reserved area REA3, a fourth reserved area REA4, and a reserved number storage area NAA. Hereinafter, a jackpot lottery is performed based on each value stored in the first hold storage area REA, and the type of game times that the 7-segment display 372 displays and fluctuates is referred to as a first special figure game. is there. The second reserved storage area REB includes a first reserved area REB1, a second reserved area REB2, a third reserved area REB3, a fourth reserved area REB4, and a reserved number storage area NAB. Hereinafter, a jackpot lottery is performed based on each value stored in the second hold storage area REB, and the type of game times that the 7-segment display 373 displays and fluctuates is referred to as a second special figure game. is there.

  When a game ball enters the first operating port 314, information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is a big hit. The information is acquired as the success / failure information used in the lottery, and is stored in any one of the first reserved area REA1 to the fourth reserved area REA4 of the first reserved storage area REA. When a game ball enters the second operating port 315, information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is stored in the RAM 412. The information is acquired as the pass / fail information used in the pass / fail determination, and is stored in any of the first to fourth holding areas REB1 to REB4 of the second holding storage area REB. The acquisition processing of the success / failure information is executed by the MPU 41 functioning as a success / failure information acquisition processing unit by executing processing according to the control program. In addition, the lottery counter 412a (the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, etc.) is individually associated with each of the first hold storage area REA and the second hold storage area REB. May be provided.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 10, in addition to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, the change type counter CS1 includes the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA of the first holding storage area REA. It is stored in any one of the REA4 and the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 of the second reserved storage area REB.

  Therefore, the jackpot in the game time executed based on the hit / failure information stored in the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REB4 of the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 and the second holding storage area REB. In addition to the determination of success or failure, it is possible to determine in advance the variation pattern (variable display time) of the symbol variation display displayed on the symbol display unit 341.

  Specifically, when a game ball enters the first operating port 314, the hit / fail information is vacant in the priority order of the first holding area REA1, the second holding area REA2, the third holding area REA3, and the fourth holding area REA4. Is stored in the area where In the number-of-reservations storage area NAA, the number of pieces of the rejection information stored in the first to fourth reservation areas REA1 to REA4 is stored as the number of reservations N.

  Further, when a game ball enters the second operating port 315, the winning / failing information is vacant in the priority order of the first holding area REB1, the second holding area REB2, the third holding area REB3, and the fourth holding area REB4. Stored in the area. In the number-of-reservations storage area NAB, the number of the rejection information stored in the first to fourth reservation areas REB1 to REB4 is stored as the number of reservations M.

  That is, in the gaming machine 10, the first operating port 314 is provided by the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4, and the total of eight storage areas corresponding to the maximum holding number of the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4. In addition, it is possible to suspend up to four pieces of the hit / failure information as a winning history of the game ball to the second operating port 315, respectively.

  It is also conceivable as another embodiment that the first working port 314 and the second working port 315 are provided with a holding area having a maximum holding number of 8 in common, and even in this case, up to a maximum of 8 holding areas. It is possible to suspend the winning / failing information as a winning history. The process of storing the success / failure information is executed by the MPU 41 functioning as a suspension processing unit by executing a process according to the control program.

  When the symbol change display on the main display unit 37 and the symbol display unit 341 is started, the execution area AE is the first holding area REA1 of the first holding storage area REA or the first holding area REB1 of the second holding storage area REB. Is a storage area used for moving each value of the pass / fail information stored in the storage area. Specifically, each value of the first holding area REB1 of the second holding storage area REB is preferentially moved to the execution area AE, and each value does not exist in the first holding area REB1 of the second holding storage area REB. When the reserved number storage area NAB is 0, each value of the first reserved area REA1 of the first reserved storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE.

  The difference between the number of holds M stored in the number-of-holds storage area NAA of the first hold storage area REA and the number N of holds in the number-of-holds storage area NAB of the second hold storage area REB is 2 or more. In the case of, it is conceivable as another embodiment that the value of the holding area having the larger number is preferentially moved to the execution area AE. Another embodiment is also considered in which each value of the first reserved area REA1 of the first reserved storage area REA and the value of the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area RB are alternately moved to the execution area AE.

  Then, at the start of one game round, the MPU 41 performs a jackpot lottery or the like based on various types of numerical information stored in the execution area AE as win / fail information. At this time, when the first holding area REA1 of the first holding storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE, the success / failure information stored in the second holding area REA2 is shifted to the first holding area REA1, and the third holding area REA1 is shifted to the third holding area REA1. The rejection information stored in the reservation area REA3 shifts to the second reservation area REA2, and the rejection information stored in the fourth reservation area REA4 shifts to the third reservation area REA3.

  Similarly, when the first holding area REB1 of the second holding storage area REB is moved to the execution area AE, the success / failure information stored in the second holding area REB2 is shifted to the first holding area REB1, and the third holding area REB1 is shifted to the third holding area REB1. The rejection information stored in area REB3 is shifted to second reservation area REB2, and the rejection information stored in fourth reservation area REB4 is shifted to third reservation area REB3.

  The jackpot random number counter C1 is incremented by one, for example, in the range of 0 to 738, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CIN1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CIN1 is a loop counter that is updated within the same range (0 to 738) as the jackpot random number counter C1. The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically, and is stored in the hold storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315.

  The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is determined by a winning / rejecting table stored in a winning / rejecting table storage area of the ROM 411 based on a low probability mode (first gaming state) which is a normal gaming state and a high probability mode (second gaming state) which is a certain-variable gaming state. Two types are set in correspondence with (state). Here, FIG. 7A is a diagram showing an example of a low probability mode success / failure table corresponding to the low probability mode, and FIG. 7B is a diagram showing an example of a high probability mode success / failure table corresponding to the high probability mode. In the example shown in FIG. 7A and FIG. 7B, the number of random number values that win a jackpot in the low probability mode is two (373, 727), and the random number value that wins the jackpot in the high probability mode is The number is 13 (59, 109, 163, 211, 263, 317, 373, 421, 479, 523, 631, 683, 727). Here, in the low-probability mode success / failure table and the high-probability mode success / failure table, two random numbers (373, 727) which are a big hit are common, but they may not be common. When the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is other than these random numbers for winning a jackpot, the result of the jackpot lottery will be out of order.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by one in the range of 0 to 19, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically, and is stored in the hold storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315. In the gaming machine 10, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to each of the two types of jackpot types, the probability jackpot and the normal jackpot, is set by the assignment table stored in the assignment table storage area of the ROM 411. Here, FIG. 7C is a diagram illustrating an example of the distribution table. In the example shown in FIG. 7 (C), when the type of the game time is the first special figure game, the number of random numbers with a 5R probability of change is 0 to 10 and the number of random numbers with a 16R probability of change is 10 Is 5 to 10 to 14, and the number of random numbers that are usually 5R jackpots is 5 to 15 to 19. On the other hand, when the type of the game times is the second special map game, the number of random numbers with a 5R probability of change is 5 from 0 to 4, and the number of random numbers with a 16R probability of change is 10 from 5 to 14. Yes, the number of random numbers that are usually 5R jackpots is 5 to 15 from 15 to 19. That is, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called loop probability changing machine in which the probability of the probability change jackpot in the first special figure game and the second special figure game is the same. Further, in the gaming machine 10, the probability of the 16R probability change big hit in the second special map game is set higher than that in the first special game. That is, in the probability-changing time-saving gaming state, the expected value of obtaining a game ball when the result of the success / failure determination in the jackpot lottery is higher than in the normal gaming state such as the normal time-saving gaming state or the normal non-time-saving gaming state is higher. Is set.

  In the present embodiment, each of the first operating port 314 that triggers the execution of the first special game by the winning of the game ball and the second operating port 315 that triggers the execution of the second special game by the winning of the game ball , An individual distribution table is set, and the distribution probability of the jackpot type is different depending on whether the game ball has won the first operation port 314 or the second operation port 315, but is different from the first special figure game. It is also conceivable that the distribution probability of the jackpot type is the same in the second special map game. In addition, the gaming machine 10 is not limited to a loop-type change machine, and may be configured as a so-called ST machine, a V-ST machine, a one-type two-type mixer, or the like.

  Then, based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery is “5R certain variable jackpot”, “16R certain variable jackpot”, “5R normal large jackpot”. , Or “disconnection” is determined.

  Here, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 5R regular jackpot, an open / close execution mode in which the round game in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened is repeated five times is executed. If the result of the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability change jackpot, an open / close execution mode in which the round game is repeated 16 times is executed.

  In the case of the 5R probability changing jackpot or the 16R probability changing jackpot, after the jackpot game is over, the mode is shifted to the high probability mode in which the jackpot winning probability is high and the high frequency support mode in which the opening probability of the electric accessory 315b is high in the probability changing time saving mode. The probability variation time saving mode is continued until the MPU 41 determines that the result of the jackpot lottery is “5R probability variation jackpot”, “16R probability variation jackpot”, or “5R regular jackpot”.

  On the other hand, in the case of the 5R normal jackpot, after the jackpot game is over, the normal jackpot game is executed in the low probability mode in which the jackpot winning probability is low and the high frequency support mode in which the opening probability of the electric accessory 315b is high. Then, the high frequency support mode in the normal time saving mode is continued until a predetermined number of times, for example, 50 times or 100 times of jackpot lottery ends.

  By the way, when the gaming machine 10 is configured as an ST machine or a V-ST machine instead of a loop probability changing machine, a predetermined number (for example, 50 times, 100 times) of big hits after the end of the big hit game at the time of the probability changing big hit. The lottery is executed in the probable time saving mode (high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode), and thereafter, the mode shifts to the low-probability mode, and the high-frequency support mode ends. Further, it is also conceivable as another embodiment to perform a drop lottery from the probable variation time saving mode to the normal time saving mode or the low probability mode in each game time. If the jackpot lottery result is out of order, the game is not shifted to the jackpot gaming state or the high frequency support mode. In the present embodiment, a case where the gaming machine 10 has three types of jackpot types, that is, a 5R jackpot, a 16R jackpot, and a 5R jackpot, will be described as an example. It is also conceivable to have other jackpot types such as round normal jackpot, 16R normal jackpot.

  The reach random number counter C3 is incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 238, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is updated periodically, and is stored in the hold storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315.

  In the gaming machine 10, the type of the stop result of the variable display displayed on the symbol display unit 341 when the result of the jackpot lottery is out of order is selected by the reach random number counter C3. Specifically, according to the deviation type table stored in the deviation type table storage area in the ROM 411, after the reach occurs, the last stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol and stops before and after the deviation. After that, the value of the reach random number counter C3 is set for each of the three types of reach, ie, reach other than before and after the stop where the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol, and complete miss where no reach occurs. Here, FIG. 7D is a diagram showing an example of the departure type table. In the example shown in FIG. 7 (D), the random number value to reach out of order is 0 to 8, the random number value to reach other than out of order is 9 to 38, and the random number value to completely out of reach is 39. 238. Note that the MPU 41 determines that a reach has occurred regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in a game time that wins a 5R probability change jackpot, a 16R probability change jackpot, or a 5R normal jackpot, that is, a game time that shifts to the open / close execution mode.

  Here, the reach is a fluctuating state in which a state in which a big hit is likely to be won is shown from the start of the fluctuating display of the symbol on the symbol display unit 341 until the symbol is stopped and displayed. In one example, the same symbol is stopped and displayed at two of the three stop positions on the activated line in the symbol display unit 341, and the display symbol corresponding to the remaining one of the stop positions fluctuates. In addition, during the reach change state in the symbol display unit 341, a moving image of a predetermined character or the like is displayed to suggest a degree of expectation. A user participation type operation effect process is executed. During the execution of the effect processing, the variable display on the symbol display unit 341 may be hidden or displayed in a reduced size.

  For example, the electric accessory opening counter C4 is incremented by one in the range of 0 to 250, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is updated periodically, and is stored in the electric utility holding area 412c in the RAM 412 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 317. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed based on the value of the electric auditors product opening counter C4 stored in the electric auditors holding area 412c to determine whether or not the electric auditors product 315b is to be opened for a predetermined time. For example, it is conceivable that the winning is performed when the electric accessory opening counter C4 is 0 to 199, and that when the electric accessory opening counter C4 is 200 to 250, it is out of order.

  The variation type counter CS1 is incremented by one, for example, in the range of 0 to 199, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is for determining a rough variation type such as a so-called normal reach, a super reach, a special reach, and the like. The fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main processing described later is executed once by the MPU 41, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main processing. Further, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the hold storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 314 or the second operation port 315.

  Then, the MPU 41 determines a variation pattern indicating the variation display time based on the variation type counter CS1 and a preset variation table. Specifically, the MPU 41 specifies the type of the variation pattern while referring to the normal jackpot variation table, the probability variation jackpot variation table, or the outlier variation table stored in advance in the variation table storage area of the ROM 411. Note that these change tables may be provided separately for each of the low probability mode and the high probability mode. In addition, the probability variation jackpot variation table may be provided separately for each of the 5R probability variation jackpot and the 16R probability variation jackpot.

  Here, FIGS. 7E, 7F, and 7G are diagrams showing examples of the normal jackpot variation table, the probability variation jackpot variation table, and the deviation variation table. As shown in FIG. 7 (E), FIG. 7 (F), and FIG. 7 (G), in the normal jackpot variation table, the probable variation jackpot variation table, and the outlier variation table, the variation pattern depends on the value of the variation type counter CS1. Are associated in advance. If the lottery result is “5R normal jackpot”, the MPU 41 determines whether the lottery result is “5R normal jackpot”, and if the lottery result is “5R certain jackpot” or “16R certain jackpot”, the variable jackpot change table and the lottery result are “out”. ", The type of the variation pattern is specified by referring to the deviation variation tables.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 7 (E) and FIG. 7 (F), in the normal jackpot variation table and the probability variation jackpot variation table, the variation patterns “01” to “03” according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. Is selected. Here, when the variation pattern “01” is selected, the symbol display unit 341 performs the variation display in the normal reach mode in which the variation display time is 30 s. When the variation pattern “02” is selected, the symbol display unit 341 performs the variation display in the super reach mode in which the variation display time is 60 s. Further, when the fluctuation pattern “03” is selected, the symbol display unit 341 performs the fluctuation display in the special reach mode in which the fluctuation display time is the longest 90 s. The types of the fluctuation patterns are not limited to these. In addition, the probability variation jackpot variation table may be provided separately for each of the 5R probability variation jackpot and the 16R probability variation jackpot.

  For example, in the gaming machine 10, as the normal reach corresponding to the fluctuation pattern "01", a plurality of types of normal reach having different characters or stories are prepared, and any one of the normal reach selected is executed.

  Similarly, in the gaming machine 10, as the super reach corresponding to the fluctuation pattern "02", a plurality of types of super reach having different characters and stories are prepared, and any one of the super reach selected is executed. You. Super Reach is a reach that has longer fluctuation time than Normal Reach and shorter fluctuation time than Special Reach. Performed when suggesting to the person.

  Further, in the gaming machine 10, as the special reach corresponding to the fluctuation pattern "03", a plurality of types of special reach with different characters and stories are prepared, and any one of the special reach selected from the special reach is executed. You. The special reach is a reach that has a longer fluctuation time than the normal reach and the super reach, and is, for example, a reach that includes an effect that evolves from the normal reach or the super reach.

  The reach corresponding to various fluctuation patterns includes a single operation effect in which a single operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect, and a continuous operation operation in which a continuous tapping operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect. , And a player participation type operation effect process such as a long press operation effect in which a long press operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 7 (G), in the departure variation table, each departure stop type (reach before and after departure, reach other than departure before and after departure, complete departure) determined by the value of the reach random number counter C3. The correspondence between the counter CS1 and the variation pattern is defined. More specifically, in the case where the stop type at the time of departure is the out-of-reach reach or the reach other than the out-of-reach reach, any of the fluctuation patterns “01” to “03” is selected according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. . On the other hand, if the stop type at the time of departure is completely departure, either the fluctuation pattern “04” or “05” is selected according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. When the fluctuation pattern “04” is selected, the fluctuation display time is 7 s and the fluctuation display without the reach is executed on the symbol display unit 341. When the fluctuation pattern “05” is selected, the symbol display unit 341 performs the fluctuation display with the fluctuation display time of 10 s and without the reach.

  For example, in the gaming machine 10, as the variation display at the time of deviation corresponding to the variation pattern “04”, the variation display is released without a notice effect such as displaying a character and a message, etc. Is executed. Further, in the gaming machine 10, as the variation display at the time of deviation corresponding to the variation pattern “05”, the variation display is released with a notice effect in which a character and a message are displayed, and the variation display of the deviation pattern in which the pattern is stopped at the symbol. Be executed. In addition, in the case of the variation display at the time of disconnection corresponding to the variation pattern “05”, a player-participation type advance display in which the operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected may be executed.

  When the MPU 41 specifies a fluctuation pattern indicating the fluctuation display time by the 7-segment displays 372 and 373 of the main display unit 37 and the symbol display unit 341, the MPU 41 transmits the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation pattern command indicating the lottery result to the audio lamp control device. Enter 5 Specifically, when the lottery result is “5R normal big hit”, the MPU 41 determines that the fluctuation pattern command “A” indicating that it is a 5R normal big hit is added before the fluctuation patterns “01” to “03”. A01 ”to“ A03 ”are output. Further, when the lottery result is “5R probable jackpot”, the MPU 41 sets the fluctuation pattern command “B01” with “B” indicating that it is a 5R probable change jackpot before the fluctuation patterns “01” to “03”. To “B03”. Further, when the lottery result is “16R probability change jackpot”, the MPU 41 sets the change pattern command “C01” with “C” indicating the 16R probability change hit before the change patterns “01” to “03”. To “C03”. In addition, when the lottery result is “out”, the MPU 41 sets the fluctuation pattern commands “D01” to “D05” to which “D” indicating that the lottery is out is added before the fluctuation patterns “01” to “05”. Is output. Thereby, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine the lottery result and the fluctuation pattern (variation display time) based on the fluctuation pattern command, and based on the lottery result and the fluctuation pattern, the symbol display unit 341. The details of the variation mode such as the variation type and the effect type displayed by are determined. Then, the sound lamp control device 5 causes the symbol display unit 341 to perform the fluctuation display based on the details of the determined fluctuation mode, reproduces the sound from the speaker 26 in accordance with the fluctuation display, and turns on and blinks the illumination unit 27. Let it.

  Therefore, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 performs a simple process of determining a variation pattern (variation display time) based on the variation type counter CS1 and various variation tables for the variation display on the symbol display unit 341. Will run. Therefore, even when the MPU 41 of the gaming machine 10 is configured by an 8-bit microcomputer, the MPU 41 can stably execute the jackpot. Further, since the details of the variation mode actually displayed on the symbol display unit 341 are determined by the sound lamp control device 5, it is possible to selectively execute various variation modes as the variation mode.

[Sub control unit 332]
As shown in FIG. 5, the sub control unit 332 includes an audio lamp control device 5 and a display control device 6, based on a control signal input from the main control unit 331, a symbol change display and a symbol change display on the symbol display unit 341. It is an example of the sub-control means for executing the effect display.

[Sound lamp control device 5]
The sound lamp control device 5 includes an MPU 51, an input / output I / F 52, and the like. The MPU 51 is an arithmetic device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Further, the MPU 51 includes a ROM 511 and a RAM 512.

  The ROM 511 is a nonvolatile storage unit in which various control programs and various parameter information are stored in advance. The ROM 511 also stores information such as sound or lamp lighting patterns used in various effects. The RAM 512 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) of various processes executed by the MPU 51. Note that the RAM 512 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

  The sound lamp control device 5 executes processing in accordance with the control program stored in the ROM 511 by the MPU 51, so that the display control device 6 is controlled based on various commands (control signals) input from the main control device 4. To input a command (control signal) to control the display of the symbol display unit 341. Further, the audio lamp control device 5 controls the reproduction audio output from the speaker 26 and the lighting mode of the illumination unit 27 in accordance with the display of the symbol display unit 341. For example, the MPU 51 performs the display of the symbol display unit 341, the output of the reproduced sound from the speaker 26, and the illumination unit when performing the game rendition effect (step S <b> 1709 in FIG. 15) and the jackpot game effect (step S <b> 1710 in FIG. 15). 27 is controlled. In one example, the MPU 51 executes the output of the music from the speaker 26 and the display of the music selection image 83 (see FIG. 25) on the symbol display unit 341 in the big hit game effect.

  The input / output I / F 52 is an input / output interface that inputs various signals to the audio lamp control device 5 and outputs control signals from the audio lamp control device 5. Specifically, the main controller 4 and the display controller 6 are connected to the input / output I / F 52. Then, various commands such as a fluctuation pattern command, a hold number command, a shift command, a big hit start command, and a big hit end command are input from the main control device 4 to the audio ramp control device 5. Further, the sound lamp control device 5 outputs a display variation pattern command or the like to the display control device 6. A configuration in which the display control device 6 receives various commands from the main control device 4 and inputs the various commands to the audio lamp control device 5 is also conceivable as another embodiment. A configuration in which the sub control unit 332 includes one control device having both functions of the audio lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6 is also considered as another embodiment.

  The speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27 are connected to the input / output I / F 52. In the sound lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 can control the sound output from the speaker 26 and the lighting mode of the illumination unit 27 based on various commands input from the main control device 4. It is. The input / output I / F 52 is connected to the operation switch 20, the upper selection operation switch 211a, the lower selection operation switch 211b, the left selection operation switch 211c, the right selection operation switch 211d, and the decision operation switch 21Ba. Thereby, the MPU 51 controls the sound output from the speaker 26 and the lighting mode of the illumination unit 27 based on the operation of the operation button 20, the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211 to 214), and the determination button 21B. It is also possible.

  The MPU 51 determines a predetermined pattern based on various commands such as a fluctuation pattern command, a hold number command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot start command, and a jackpot end command that are input from the main controller 4. Perform arithmetic processing.

  Specifically, when a fluctuation pattern command is input, the MPU 51, based on the fluctuation pattern command, changes the fluctuation pattern (stop symbol combination of the main symbol, the fluctuation display time, the fluctuation type (see FIG. 20 (B)), and the effect. The type (see FIGS. 21 (A) to (C)) is determined (see steps S2003 and S2004 in FIG. 19), and a display variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern is transmitted to the display control device 6, and the symbol display unit is displayed. At 341, the symbol variation display is started. At this time, if the variation pattern command indicates a deviation, the symbol display unit 341 displays a combination of main symbols corresponding to the deviation. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern command indicates the 5R normal jackpot, the combination of the main symbols corresponding to the 5R normal jackpot is displayed, and when the fluctuation pattern command indicates the 5R certain variable jackpot, the combination of the main symbols corresponding to the 5R normal jackpot or the 5R certain variable jackpot. Is displayed, and in the case of indicating the 16R probability change jackpot, a combination of the main symbols corresponding to the 5R normal change hit, the 5R probability change hit or the 16R probability change hit is displayed.

[Display control device 6]
The display control device 6 controls the display of the symbol display unit 341 based on various commands (control signals) input from the sound lamp control device 5. Specifically, the display control device 6 executes the symbol variation display and the effect display by controlling the display of the symbol display unit 341 based on the display variation pattern command or the like input from the audio lamp controller 5.

  The display control device 6 includes an MPU 61, an input / output I / F 62, and the like. The audio lamp control device 5 and the symbol display unit 341 are connected to the input / output I / F 62. Note that bidirectional communication may be possible between the audio lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6.

  The MPU 61 is an arithmetic device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 61 has a built-in ROM 611 and a RAM 612. The display control device 6 also includes various circuits such as a timer circuit for measuring time and an interrupt circuit for receiving an interrupt. The MPU 61 executes various processes according to a control program stored in the ROM 611 or the like. Further, part or all of the processing executed by the display control device 6 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

  The ROM 611 is used for various control programs as well as variable designs such as a main symbol used in the symbol variable display of the symbol display unit 341, a notice effect image, a reach effect image, a jackpot effect image, a miss effect image, and a jackpot game effect. A plurality of types of images such as an opening effect image, an opening / closing effect image, an ending effect image, a music selection image 83 (see FIG. 25), a top menu image used in game settings, and various setting images developed from the top menu image are stored. I have. Each image displayed on the symbol display unit 341 includes a still image or a moving image. The ROM 611 stores a display schedule corresponding to each variable display pattern command. Specifically, the display schedule includes a variable display time of a variable symbol, in addition to a type of an image to be used and a display timing of each image. In the display control device 6, the MPU 61 displays various images on the symbol display unit 341 according to the display schedule corresponding to the variable display pattern command, thereby realizing symbol variation display and effect display.

  The RAM 612 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) of various processes executed by the MPU 61. Note that the RAM 612 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

[Payout control device 7]
The payout control device 7 includes an MPU 71, an input / output I / F 72, and the like. The MPU 71 is an arithmetic device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Further, the MPU 71 includes a ROM 711 and a RAM 712.

  The ROM 711 is a nonvolatile storage unit in which various control programs and various parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 712 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) of various processes executed by the MPU 71. Note that the RAM 712 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

  The input / output I / F 72 is an input / output interface that inputs various signals to the payout control device 7 and outputs control signals from the payout control device 7. Specifically, the payout device 132 and the ball lending device 100 are connected to the input / output I / F 72.

  As described above, the payout device 132 pays out game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper plate 23, and includes a drive unit 132a such as a motor that drives a ball stopping member that switches whether or not to pay out game balls, A payout sensor 132b for individually detecting game balls to be paid out. The payout control device 7 pays out an arbitrary number of game balls by controlling the driving unit 132a based on the detection result of the payout sensor 132b. The payout control device 7 is provided with a state return switch 73. The state return switch 73 is operated, for example, to eliminate the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error such as a clogged ball of the payout device 132 occurs.

  The ball lending device 100 is installed in the island facility together with the gaming machine 10. The ball lending device 100 is stored in a recording medium such as a card inserted in the ball lending device 100 in response to an operation of a ball lending operation device (not shown) provided on the front frame 11 of the gaming machine 10. It is possible to pay out a number of game balls corresponding to the amount set in advance within the range of the amount of money to be lent to the player. Specifically, when a control signal for paying out a predetermined number of game balls is input from the ball rental device 100 to the payout control device 7, the payout device 132 is controlled by the MPU 71, and the predetermined number of game balls is Will be paid out. Note that the recording medium is not limited to a card, and may be, for example, a coin-type or stick-type storage medium incorporating an IC chip. The ball lending device 100 may be capable of lending a predetermined number of game balls according to the cash by inserting the cash.

[Launch control device 8]
The launch control device 8 includes a launch control IC 81 that controls driving of the game ball launch mechanism 32. Specifically, the firing control IC 81 drives the ball feeder 322 of the game ball firing mechanism 32 while the firing handle 22 is being rotated, so that the game balls stored in the upper plate 23 are fired by the firing rail 321. Feed on top. Then, the firing control IC 81 detects the operation amount of the firing handle 22 and drives the solenoid 323 of the game ball firing mechanism 32 according to the operation amount, so that the game ball on the shooting rail 321 is directed to the game board 31. Fire. At this time, the launch control IC 81 drives the ball feeder 322 and the solenoid 323 using a clock signal that is switched ON / OFF at a preset cycle (for example, 0.6 sec) as a drive signal. Thereby, in the gaming machine 10, one game ball is fired toward the game area every 0.6 seconds.

  The firing handle 22 is provided with a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation operation by the player, and a voltage is input to the firing control IC 81 according to the amount of rotation operation of the firing handle 22. Thereby, the launch control IC 81 sets the launch intensity of the game ball from the gaming ball launching mechanism 32 as the rotational operation amount of the firing handle 22 increases, based on the voltage value input according to the rotary operation amount of the launch handle 22. The voltage applied to the solenoid 323 is adjusted so as to be strong.

  Further, the firing handle 22 has a touch sensor 21a for detecting that the player is touching the firing handle 22, and a ball stop switch 21b for the player to perform an operation for arbitrarily stopping the firing of the game ball. Is provided. The launch control IC 81 uses the touch sensor 21a and the ball stop switch 21b to detect that the player is not touching the firing handle 22 by the touch sensor 21a, or that the ball stop switch 21b is operated by the player. When this is detected, the launch of the game ball by the game ball launching mechanism 32 is stopped. Thereby, for example, the firing handle 22 is fixed in a rotated state, and a game in a situation where the player does not touch the firing handle 22 is prevented. Further, the player can stop firing the ball game ball by operating the ball stop switch 21b at an arbitrary timing with the thumb or the like while rotating the firing handle 22.

[Power control device 9]
The power supply control device 9 generates a +12 V voltage for driving various sensors and driving units, a +5 V voltage for logic used in various control devices, and the like. Then, the power supply control device 9 supplies the generated voltage of +12 V or +5 V to the main control device 4, the sound lamp control device 5, the display control device 6, the payout control device 7, the firing control device 8, and the like.

  In addition, the power supply control device 9 is provided with a power switch 90 for turning on / off the power of the gaming machine 10 and a RAM erasing switch 91 operated when returning the gaming machine 10 to the initial state. The gaming machine 10 is initialized when the power is turned on by operating the power switch 90 while the RAM erase switch 91 is ON.

  In addition, the power supply control device 9 is provided with a capacitor and a secondary battery as charging means that is charged by electric power supplied from power supply equipment. Thereby, in the gaming machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off, information in the RAM provided in the various control devices is held for a predetermined period by the power discharged from the capacitor. Further, in the gaming machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off, various control devices can be driven by the power discharged from the secondary battery for a predetermined period.

  Further, when determining that the power supply has been interrupted, the power supply control device 9 inputs a power failure signal to the main control device 4, the audio lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, and the like. For example, when the power supply control device 9 outputs a preset 24 V DC voltage based on the power supplied from the power supply equipment, the power supply control device 9 is in a power outage state when the DC voltage reaches a preset less than 22 V. Is determined. When receiving the power failure signal from the power supply control device 9, the main control device 4, the sound lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7 and the like interrupt the control being executed and execute a predetermined NMI interruption process.

[Processing of Main Controller 4]
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 is started up when the power is turned on, main processing executed after the start-up processing, main timer interrupt processing started periodically, and executed at the time of power failure. It performs NMI interrupt processing and the like. In the present embodiment, the description of the start-up process and the NMI interrupt process is omitted.

[Main timer interrupt processing of main controller 4]
FIG. 8 is a flowchart for explaining an example of the procedure of the main timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 41. The main timer interrupt process is executed, for example, every 2 msec.

<Step S1001>
First, in step S1001, the MPU 41 executes a sensor detection process for determining a detection state of various sensors or switches connected to the main control device 4. For example, the detection state of the ball entry sensors 313a to 317a, the magnet sensor 35, the radio wave sensor 36, and the like is determined. At this time, when the entry of a game ball into any of the ball entry sensors 313a to 317a is detected, the MPU 41 stores the information in the RAM 412 as winning detection information.

<Step S1002>
Next, in step S1002, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value of the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1003>
Subsequently, in step S1003, the MPU 41 updates the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal hit random number counter C4. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the ordinary hit random number counter C4, and the counter value reaches the maximum value. In this case, the counter value is cleared to 0.

<Steps S1004 and S1005>
After that, the MPU 41 executes a start winning process, which will be described later, when the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315 is won (step S1004), and executes a firing control process (step S1005).

  The above-described firing control processing is performed under the condition that the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is touching the firing handle 22 and the ball stop switch 21b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is a process for enabling firing. In addition, the above-mentioned firing control processing invalidates the firing of the game ball when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player does not touch the firing handle 22 or when the ball stop switch 21b is operated. This is the processing to be performed. The MPU 41 instructs the launch control device 8 to launch game balls when the launch of gaming balls is valid.

<Step S1006>
In step S1006, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the electric accessory 315b of the second operating port 315 is to be in the electric-power-open state based on the ordinary random number counter C4 stored in the electric-power holding area 412c. Execute the process. Specifically, in the through gate process, first, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the current game mode is the high frequency support mode based on the high frequency mode flag. When the normal random number counter C4 is 0 to 29, the MPU 41 determines that a normal symbol has been won, and when the normal random number counter C4 is 30 to 250, the MPU 41 fails. Is determined to be. In addition, in the high frequency support mode, the MPU 41 determines that a normal symbol has been won when the ordinary random number counter C4 is 0 to 199, and deviates when the ordinary random number counter C4 is 200 to 250. Is determined to be. If the MPU 41 determines that the normal symbol has been won in the through gate process, the MPU 41 keeps the electric accessory 315b open for a predetermined time. Thereby, it becomes possible to win a game ball to the second operating port 315 at the upper right of the game board 31 on which the electric accessory 315b is juxtaposed.

[Start winning process of main controller 4]
Here, the start winning process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1004 in FIG. 8 will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1101>
First, in step S1101, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a game ball has won the first operating port 314. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has won the first operating port 314 (step S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1102, and determines that the game ball has not won the first operating port 314. Then (step S1101: No), the process proceeds to step S1106.

<Steps S1102 and S1103>
In step S1102, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the number of holds N stored in the number-of-holds storage area NAA of the RAM 412 is the maximum number of holds (4 in the present embodiment). Here, if the number of reservations N is the maximum number of reservations (step S1102: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1106. On the other hand, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the reserved number N if the reserved number N is not the maximum reserved number (step S1102: No) (step S1103).

<Step S1104>
In step S1104, the MPU 41 checks the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 in FIG. 8, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 updated in the main processing described later (step S1302 in FIG. 11). And S1309) are stored in the first empty holding area of the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 of the first holding area REA of the holding area 412b in the RAM 412.

<Step S1105>
In step S1105, the MPU 41 checks the content of the hit / failure information before the hit / failure information for the first hold acquired in step S1104 is subjected to the jackpot success / failure determination in the later-described change start process (S1408 in FIG. 12). Then, a first hold command setting process of setting a first hold command based on the confirmation result is executed. The details of the first hold command setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1106>
In step S1106, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a game ball has won the second operating port 315. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has won the second operating port 315 (step S1106: Yes), the processing shifts to step S1107, and determines that the game ball has not won the second operating port 315. Then (step S1106: No), the start winning process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S1005 in FIG.

<Steps S1107 and S1108>
In step S1107, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the number of holds M stored in the number-of-holds storage area NAB of the RAM 412 is the maximum number of holds (4 in the present embodiment). Here, if the number of holdings M is the maximum number of holdings (step S1107: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the start winning process, and shifts the process to step S1005 in FIG. On the other hand, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the reserved number M if the reserved number M is not the maximum reserved number (step S1107: No) (step S1108).

<Step S1109>
In step S1109, the MPU 41 compares the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 in FIG. 8, and the variation type counter CS1 updated in the main processing described later. The data is stored in the first free reserved area of the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 of the second reserved storage area REB of the reserved storage area 412b in the RAM 412.

<Step S1110>
In step S1110, the MPU 41 checks the content of the hit / failure information before the hit / failure information for the second hold acquired in step S1109 is to be determined as a jackpot success / failure in a later-described change start process (S1408 in FIG. 12). Then, a second hold command setting process for setting a second hold command is executed based on the confirmation result. Here, the second hold command setting process is the same as the first hold command setting process described later with reference to FIG. 10, and thus detailed description is omitted. In the second hold command setting process, the first hold command setting process of FIG. 10 may be replaced with “second hold command” for “first hold command” and “M for hold number” for “number of hold N”. Good.

[First hold command setting process of main controller 4]
Here, the first hold command setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1105 in FIG. 9 will be described with reference to FIG. The first hold command includes information indicating that the command is the first hold command, and information such as the type of the first hold command (big hit type or out of order), the variation pattern, and the number of holds N. .

<Step S1201>
In step S1201, the MPU 41 reads the number of holds N from the number-of-holds storage area NAA of the first hold storage area REA, and reads the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to each first hold from the RAM 412.

<Step S1202>
In step S1202, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the mode is the high-probability mode. If the mode is the high-probability mode (step S1202: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1203. If the mode is not the high-probability mode (step S1202) : No), the process proceeds to step S1204. For example, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the mode is the high probability mode based on a high probability mode flag that can be set to ON in a game state transition process (step S1305 in the main process of FIG. 11) described later. The high-probability mode flag is set to ON by the MPU 41 when shifting to the high-probability mode, and is set to OFF when shifting to the low-probability mode.

<Steps S1203 and S1204>
In step S1203, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read in step S1201 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning, based on the high probability mode winning / failing table (see FIG. 7B). Perform a pass / fail decision. On the other hand, in step S1204, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read in step S1201 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning based on the low-probability mode winning / failing table (see FIG. 7A). Is performed.

<Step S1205>
In step S1205, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning. Here, if the MPU 41 determines that the value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning (step S1205: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1206, and the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1206. If it is determined that the read value is not the value corresponding to the jackpot (Step S1205: No), the process proceeds to Step S1208.

<Step S1206>
In step S1206, the MPU 41 reads the values of the jackpot type counter C2 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. For example, when the hit / fail information is stored in the third hold storage area RE3 in step S1104 in FIG. 9, the big hit type counter C2 and the change type counter CS1 included in the hit / fail information stored in the third hold storage area RE3. Is read out. It should be noted that among the first hold storage area RE1 to the fourth hold storage area RE4, the hold area in which the pass / fail information is stored in step S1104 of FIG. 9 is determined by the value of the hold number N stored in the hold number storage area NA. It is possible.

<Step S1207>
In step S1207, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type counter C2, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the number of holds N in the first hold command. As described above, since the first hold command includes the hold number N read in step S1201, the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 receiving the first hold command transmits the hold number included in the first hold command. By referring to the number N, it is possible to recognize which one of the first hold storage area RE1 to the fourth hold storage area RE4 corresponds to the pass / fail information stored in the first hold storage area RE1 to the fourth hold storage area RE4. .

<Steps S1208 and S1209>
In step S1208, the MPU 41 reads the value of the variation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. Next, the MPU 41 sets the information indicating that the lottery result is out of order, the variation type counter CS1 and the number of holds N in the first hold command (step S1209).

  The first hold command that is set to ON in the first hold command setting process is stored in the RAM 412, and is executed in step S1301 of a main process (see FIG. 11) described below, which is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 together with another command, and then deleted. Further, the content of the first hold command described here is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to the above description as long as the voice lamp control device 5 can grasp the same content as the hold command. For example, it is conceivable that some or all of the information of the first hold command is included in another command.

[Main processing of main controller 4]
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 41 will be described with reference to FIG. In the main processing, main control processing of the game is executed. In the main processing, the processing of steps S1301 to S1306 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of, for example, 4 msec, and the counter updating processing of steps S1307 to S1309 is executed with the remaining time.

<Step S1301>
First, in step S1301, the MPU 41 performs an external output process of transmitting output data such as a command set in the main timer interrupt process or the previous main process to each control device such as the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140. Execute For example, when various commands such as a variation pattern command, a hold number command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot start command, and a jackpot end command are set in the RAM 413, the sub control unit 332 Send the command to In step S1001 in FIG. 8, it is determined whether or not the prize detection information is stored in the RAM 413. If the prize detection information is stored in the RAM 413, a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 7.

<Step S1302>
In step S1302, the MPU 41 updates the value of the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1303>
In step S1303, the MPU 41 sets a winning ball command to be output to the payout control device 7. Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a prize has occurred in the general prize port 313 or the like based on the prize detection information stored in the RAM 413. Then, if a winning has occurred, a winning ball command indicating the number of winning balls to be paid out according to the winning is set.

<Step S1304>
In step S1304, the MPU 41 executes a game time control process for controlling a game in each game time. Although the game turn control processing will be described later, in the game turn control processing, the above-described jackpot lottery is executed, and a change pattern command necessary for the symbol change display by the symbol display unit 341 is set. At this time, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process in FIG. 8, and the variation type counter CS1 updated in steps S1302 and S1309. Is set based on the respective values of the above, the fluctuation pattern command indicating the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation display time.

<Step S1305>
In step S1305, the MPU 41 executes a gaming state transition process for transitioning the gaming state based on the result of the jackpot lottery (see step S1604 in FIG. 14). In the game state transition process, the MPU 41 changes the game state when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the jackpot game state including the opening / closing execution mode, the probable variable time short game state that is the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, the low probability mode and the high frequency The game mode is shifted to a normal time saving game state that is a support mode, a normal non-time saving game state that is not a high frequency support mode in a low probability mode, and the like.

  For example, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state after the end of the game round for the jackpot, and executes the jackpot game including the open / close execution mode. Specifically, when the 5R certain variable big hit flag, 16R certain variable big hit flag or 5R normal big hit flag which is set to on in step S1607, S1608 or S1609 of FIG. 14 described later is on at the end of the game round for the big hit, The game state is shifted to the jackpot game state after the end of the game round for the jackpot. Then, in the opening / closing execution mode of the jackpot game state, the MPU 41 opens the opening / closing door 316b of the variable winning opening 316 and thereafter, when the maximum opening time of the opening / closing door 316b of the variable winning opening 316 has elapsed, or in the variable winning opening 316. When a predetermined upper limit number of prizes has been won, one round of opening / closing processing for closing the opening / closing door 316b of the variable prize port 316 is repeatedly executed five or sixteen times depending on the type of big hit.

  In addition, after the execution of the jackpot game, the MPU 41 shifts the game state from the jackpot game state to the short-change time short game state when the jackpot type is the 5R probability jackpot or the 16R probability jackpot, and the jackpot type is the 5R regular jackpot. In this case, the game state is shifted from the big hit game state to the normal time reduction game state.

  Further, when shifting the transition of the gaming state, the MPU 41 sets a flag corresponding to the gaming state after the transition to ON. For example, the MPU 41 sets the high-probability mode flag to ON when the gaming state is shifted to the probable-variation time-saving gaming state, and sets the time-saving mode flag to ON when the gaming state is shifted to the normal time-saving gaming state. I do. Further, when the time reduction mode flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 sets a predetermined number of times of reduction (50 times or 100 times) in the time reduction counter as the number of times of execution of the game times in the time reduction mode.

<Step S1306>
In step S1306, the MPU 41 executes a display control process of the main display unit 37. By this display control process, the 7-segment displays 372 and 373 in the main display unit 37 execute the symbol variation display only during the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern command, and the symbol variation display is a main symbol indicating a lottery result. Will stop at the combination of Further, by the display control process, the symbol variation display is executed by the LED pair 371 in the main display unit 37 only during the predetermined ordinary symbol variation display time, and the symbol variation display is a symbol indicating whether or not the symbol has been normally won. Will stop. In addition, in the case of the normal symbol winning, the electric accessory 315b attached to the second operating port 315 is opened for a predetermined time.

<Step S1307>
In step S1307, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has arrived, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main process has arrived (step S1307: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1301, and executes each process from S1301 described above. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main process has not arrived (step S1307: No), the MPU 41 waits until the execution timing of the next main process arrives, that is, until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. During the remaining time up to this point, steps S1307, S1308, and S1309 are repeatedly executed until it is determined that the execution timing of the next main process has come (step S1307: Yes).

<Step S1308>
In step S1308, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1309>
In step S1309, the MPU 41 updates the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, 1 is added to the counter value of the variation type counter CS1, and when those counter values reach the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, after updating the fluctuation type counter CS1, the MPU 41 returns the processing to step S1307.

[Gaming round control processing]
Here, the game turn control process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1304 of FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1401>
In step S1401, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the gaming machine 10 is playing a jackpot game. If the gaming machine 10 is playing a jackpot game (step S1401: Yes), the game end control process ends, and the jackpot game is not being played. In this case (step S1401: No), the process proceeds to step S1402. For example, the presence or absence of the execution of the big hit game is determined based on the big hit game execution flag that the MPU 41 sets on at the start of the big hit game and turns off at the end of the big hit game. In addition, when the big hit game execution flag is set to ON at the start of the big hit game, the MPU 41 sets a big hit game start command, and transmits the big hit game start command to the voice lamp control device 5. On the other hand, when the big hit game start flag is turned off at the end of the big hit game, the MPU 41 sets a big hit game end command, and transmits the big hit game end command to the audio lamp control device 5.

<Step S1402>
In step S1402, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the symbol variation display is being performed. If the symbol variation display is being performed (step S1402: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1403, and if the symbol variation display is not being performed. (Step S1402: No), the process proceeds to step S1407. For example, whether or not the symbol variation display is being performed is set to ON in step S1614 (see FIG. 14) of the variation start process described later, and is OFF in step S1405 when the variation display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes). Is determined based on the variable display flag that is set to.

<Step S1403>
In step S1403, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variable display time has elapsed since the start of the symbol variable display. If it is determined that the variable display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1404. If it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S1403: No), the game times control processing ends.

<Steps S1404 and S1405>
If the variable display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the MPU 41 stops the combination of the main symbols according to the result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the game time on the 7-segment display 372, 373 of the main display unit 37. It is displayed (step S1404), and the variable display flag is set to off (step S1405). When the processing of step S1405 ends, the MPU 41 ends the game round control processing.

<Step S1406>
In step S1406, the MPU 41 determines whether both the hold number N stored in the hold number storage area NAA and the hold number M stored in the hold number storage area NAB of the hold storage area 412b are 0. I do. Here, when both the number of holdings N and the number of holdings M are 0 (step S1406: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the game times control processing. On the other hand, when one of the number of hold N and the number of hold M is not 0 (step S1406: No), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1407.

<Step S1407>
In step S1407, the MPU 41 performs a data setting process on the data of the success / failure information stored in the hold storage area 412b. When the processing in step S1407 ends, the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1408. The details of the data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1408>
In step S1408, the MPU 41 executes a variation start process for causing the symbol display unit 341 to perform a variation display based on the winning / failure information stored in the execution area AE, and ends the game round control process. The details of the change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Data setting process]
Here, an example of the data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1407 in FIG. 12 will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1501>
In step S1501, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the number of reservations M corresponding to the second special figure game is 0, and if the number of reservations M is 0 (step S1501: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1502. I do. On the other hand, when the hold number M is not 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1505.

<Steps S1502 to S1504>
The MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the number of holds N stored in the number-of-holds storage area NAA (step S1502), and moves the success / failure information from the first hold area REA1 to the execution area AE (step S1503). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the success / failure information of the second reserved area REA2 to the fourth reserved area REA4 one by one (step S1504). Specifically, in step S1504, the contact information of the second reservation area REA2 is moved to the first reservation area REA1, the contact information of the third reservation area REA3 is moved to the second reservation area REA2, and the contact information of the fourth reservation area REA4 is moved. The pass / fail information is moved to the third holding area REA3. When the processing in step S1504 ends, the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1508.

<Steps S1505 to S1507>
Step S1505 is executed when the number of holdings M is 0 (step S1501: No), but step S1501 is executed when both or one of the number of holdings M and the number of holdings N is not 0 in step S1406 of FIG. (Step S1406: Yes). Therefore, when the number of holds M is 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 determines that the number of holds N is not 0, and executes the processing of steps S1505 to S1507.

  Specifically, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the number of holds M stored in the number-of-holds storage area NAB (step S1505), and moves the hit / fail information from the first hold area REB1 to the execution area AE (step S1506). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the hit / fail information of the second to fourth holding areas REB2 to REB4 one by one (Step S1507). Specifically, in step S1507, the hit / fail information of the second holding area REB2 is moved to the first holding area REB1, the hit / fail information of the third holding area REB3 is moved to the second holding area REB2, and the hit information of the fourth holding area REB4 is moved. The pass / fail information is moved to the third holding area REB3. When the processing in step S1507 ends, the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1508.

<Step S1508 and Step S1509>
In step S1508, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the time-saving mode flag that can be set to on in the game state transition process (step S1305 in the main process of FIG. 11) is set to on, and the time-saving mode flag is set to on. If yes (step S1508: YES), the counter value of the time reduction counter is decremented by one (step S1509). On the other hand, when the time saving mode flag is not set to ON (step S1508: No), the MPU 41 ends the data setting process.

<Steps S1510 and S1511>
In step S1510, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is 0 (step S1510). Here, when the value of the time reduction counter is 0 (step S1510: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the time reduction mode flag to off (step S1511), and when the value of the time reduction counter is not 0 (step S1510: No), The data setting process ends, and the process proceeds to step S1408 in FIG.

[Change start processing]
Here, an example of the change start processing executed by the MPU 41 in step S1408 in FIG. 12 will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1601>
The MPU 41 determines whether or not a high-probability mode flag that can be set to on in the game state transition process (step S1305 in the main process of FIG. 11) is on (step S1601), and the high-probability mode flag is on. Is set (Step S1601: Yes), the process proceeds to Step S1602, and if the high probability mode flag is not set to ON (Step S1601: No), the process proceeds to Step S1603.

<Steps S1602 and S1603>
In step S1602, the MPU 41 determines that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included in the jackpot information currently stored in the execution area AE corresponds to the jackpot, based on the high-probability mode hit table (see FIG. 7B). A determination is made as to whether the value is a value. On the other hand, in step S1603, the MPU 41 determines that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included in the hit information currently stored in the execution area AE based on the low probability mode hit / fail table (see FIG. 7A). A determination is made as to whether the value is a corresponding value.

<Steps S1604 to S1610>
In step S1604, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the determination in step S1602 or S1603 is a jackpot. If the result of the hit determination is a jackpot (step S1604: YES), the jackpot type is determined (steps S1605 and S1606). Specifically, the MPU 41 determines that the jackpot type is 5R-variable jackpot based on the jackpot type counter C2 included in the hit / fail information currently stored in the execution area AE and the distribution table (see FIG. 7C). Is determined (step S1605), and it is determined whether or not it is a 16R probability change jackpot (step S1606).

  If the jackpot type is the 5R probability variable jackpot (step S1605: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the 5R probability variable jackpot flag to ON (step S1607). The 5R probability change jackpot flag indicates whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery of the hit / failure information currently stored in the execution area AE is a 5R probability change jackpot. In step S1607, the result of stopping the main display unit 37 in the game in which the result of the jackpot lottery is the 5R certain-variable jackpot is also set based on the hit / failure information. In addition, the 5R certain change big hit flag is set to off at the end of the change start processing. When the processing in step S1607 ends, the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1611.

  If the jackpot type is the 16R probability variable jackpot (step S1605: No, step S1606: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the 16R probability variable jackpot flag to ON (step S1608). The 16R probability variable jackpot flag indicates whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery of the hit / failure information currently stored in the execution area AE is a 16R probability variable jackpot. In step S1608, the result of stopping the main display unit 37 in the game time in which the result of the jackpot lottery is the 16R probability change jackpot is also set based on the hit / failure information. It should be noted that the 16R probability-change big hit flag is set to off at the end of the change start processing. When the processing in step S1608 ends, the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1611.

  If the jackpot type is 5R normal jackpot (step S1605: No, step S1606: No), the MPU 41 sets the 5R normal jackpot flag provided in the RAM 412 to ON (step S1609). The 5R normal jackpot flag indicates whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery of the hit / failure information currently stored in the execution area AE is a 5R normal jackpot. In step S1609, the result of stopping the main display unit 37 in the game in which the jackpot lottery result is the 5R regular jackpot is also set based on the hit / failure information. The 5R normal big hit flag is set to off at the end of the change start processing. When the processing in step S1609 ends, the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1611.

  On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination is not a jackpot (step S1604: NO), the MPU 41 sets the disconnection flag to ON (step S1610). The miss flag indicates whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery of the hit information currently stored in the execution area AE is miss. In step S1610, the result of stopping the main display unit 37 in the game in which the result of the jackpot is out of order is also set based on the hit / failure information. Note that the off flag is set to off at the end of the change start process. When the processing in step S1610 ends, the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1611.

<Step S1611>
In step S1611, the MPU 41 sets the variable display time of the 7-segment display 372, 373 of the main display unit 37 corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the game times in the variable display time counter. Specifically, when the normal big hit flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 specifies the change pattern based on the change type counter CS1 and the normal big hit change table (see FIG. 7E). In addition, when the 5R probability variable jackpot flag or the 16R probability variable jackpot flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 specifies the variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the probability variation jackpot variation table (see FIG. 7F). Further, when the deviation flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 specifies the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the deviation fluctuation table (see FIG. 7 (G)).

<Step S1612>
In step S1612, the MPU 41 sets a fluctuation pattern command including the result of the jackpot lottery in the game times and the fluctuation pattern specified in step S1611, and stores the fluctuation pattern command in the RAM 512. As a result, in step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 11) executed by the MPU 41, the variation pattern command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5, and the voice ramp control device 5 displays the symbol based on the variation pattern command. The symbol variation display and the like by the unit 341 are executed.

  As described above, when the lottery result is “normal jackpot”, the MPU 41 sets “A01” to “A01” in which “A” indicating the 5R normal jackpot is added to the variation patterns “01” to “03”. A03 "is set as the variation pattern command. In addition, when the lottery result is “5R probable jackpot”, the MPU 41 selects any one of “B01” to “B03” in which the variation pattern “01” to “03” has “B” indicating that it is a 5R probable jackpot. Is set as a fluctuation pattern. Further, when the lottery result is “16R probable jackpot”, the MPU 41 selects any one of “C01” to “C03” in which the variation patterns “01” to “03” have “C” indicating that it is a 16R probable jackpot. Is set as a fluctuation pattern. Further, when the lottery result is “out”, the MPU 41 changes any one of “D01” to “D08” with “D” indicating that it is out of the fluctuation patterns “01” to “08”. Set as a command. Further, when the lottery result is “missing”, the MPU 41 includes in the variation pattern command information on whether the reach is out of order, the reach other than the out of order, or completely out of reach.

<Steps S1613 and S1614>
The MPU 41 starts the symbol variation display on the main display unit 37 (step S1613), and sets the variation display flag to ON (step S1614). The symbol variation display started here stops after the variation display time set in step S1611 has elapsed, with the stop result set in any of steps S1607 to S1610.

[Process of Voice Lamp Control Device 5]
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 51 in the audio lamp control device 5 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  Note that another or another embodiment in which part or all of the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 in the present embodiment is executed by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 is also considered. Further, in the audio lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 also executes a control process of the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27, a startup process when the audio lamp control device 5 starts up, an NMI interrupt process when the power failure occurs, and the like. The description of those processes is omitted.

[Sub timer interrupt processing of voice lamp control device 5]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the sub-timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 51. The MPU 51 executes, for example, the sub timer interrupt process as a periodic process with a cycle of 1 msec.

  As shown in FIG. 15, in the sub timer interrupt processing, the MPU 51 detects the operation button operation detection processing (step S1701), the operation detection pattern determination processing (step S1702), the selection button operation detection processing (step S1703), and the selection operation detection. Pattern determination processing (Step S1704), determination button operation detection processing (Step S1705), determination operation detection pattern determination processing (Step S1706), counter update processing (Step S1707), command determination processing (Step S1708), game rendition processing ( (Step S1709), a jackpot game effect process (step S1710), and a game setting process (step S1711) are executed.

[Operation button operation detection processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the operation button operation detection process (step S1701) in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. In the operation detection process, a process for detecting the operation state of the operation button 20 and sequentially updating the operation history of the past three times is executed. In the gaming machine 10, the operation button operation detection processing is executed by the MPU 51, so that the operation button 20 is operated at a predetermined interval (1 msec interval in the present embodiment) corresponding to the interruption cycle of the sub timer interruption processing. Will be determined.

<Steps S1801 to S1803>
As shown in FIG. 16, in step S1801, the MPU 51 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the second detection flag to the first detection flag. In step S1802, the MPU 51 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the third detection flag to the second detection flag. Thereafter, in step S1803, the MPU 51 sets (overwrites) the operation state of the operation button 20 detected by the operation switch 20a to the third detection flag, and ends the operation detection processing.

  As described above, in the operation button operation detection processing, the processing states of steps S1801 to S1803 are executed, so that the operation states of the three most recent operations at 1 msec intervals as the operation history of the operation button 20 are the first detection flag to the third detection state. The flag is stored in the RAM 512. Specifically, the latest operation state is stored as the third detection flag, the immediately preceding operation state is stored as the second detection flag, and the immediately previous operation state is stored as the first detection flag.

[Operation button detection pattern judgment processing]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the operation button detection pattern determination process (step S1702) in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. In the operation button detection pattern determination process, an operation for determining the operation state of the operation button 20 from the operation history of the operation button 20 determined based on the first operation detection flag, the second operation detection flag, and the third operation detection flag Set the pattern flag. The operation pattern flag includes first to third operation pattern flags, and the operation state of the operation button 20 can be determined by a combination of ON and OFF of the first to third operation pattern flags. For example, as shown in FIG. 18A, when only the first operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 is continued. When only the second operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 has been started. If only the third operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 has been completed. If all of the first to third operation pattern flags are set to off, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 has not been performed.

<Step S1901>
As shown in FIG. 17, in step S1901, the MPU 51 determines whether the first operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 three times before is set to ON. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S1902 when the first operation detection flag is on (step S1901: Yes), and executes the processing when the first operation detection flag is off (step S1901: No). It moves to step S1905.

<Step S1902>
In step S1902, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is set to ON. Here, when the second operation detection flag is on (step S1902: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S1903, and when the second operation detection flag is off (step S1902: No), the MPU 51 executes the processing. It moves to step S1908.

<Step S1903>
In step S1903, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the most recent operation button 20 has been set to ON. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S1904 when the third operation detection flag is on (step S1903: Yes), and executes the processing when the third operation detection flag is off (step S1903: No). The process moves to step S1910.

<Step S1904>
In step S1904, the MPU 51 sets the first operation pattern flag on, sets the second operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag off, and ends the operation detection pattern determination processing. That is, the MPU 51 sets the first operation pattern flag to ON when an operation pattern of “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 for three times, and sets the second operation pattern The flag and the third operation pattern flag are set to off (see FIG. 18A). The first operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the operation button 20 is continued.

<Step S1905>
If the MPU 51 determines in step S1901 that the first operation detection flag is not on (step S1901: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is on. A determination is made (step S1905). Here, the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S1906 when the second operation detection flag is on (step S1905: Yes), and executes the processing when the second operation detection flag is off (step S1905: No). The process moves to step S1910.

<Step S1906>
In step S1906, the MPU 51 determines whether the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the most recent operation button 20 is on. Here, when the third operation detection flag is on (step S1906: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S1907. When the third operation detection flag is off (step S1906: No), the MPU 51 executes the processing. The process moves to step S1910.

<Step S1907>
In step S1907, the MPU 51 sets the second operation pattern flag to ON, sets the first operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the operation detection pattern determination processing. That is, the MPU 51 sets the second operation pattern flag to ON when an operation pattern of “OFF”, “ON”, and “ON” occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 for three times, and sets the first operation pattern The flag and the third operation pattern flag are set to off (see FIG. 18A). The second operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether the operation of the operation button 20 has been started). As described above, if it is determined whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state using the second operation pattern flag, the operation state of the operation button 20 three times is reflected. Or, erroneous detection of the operation start of the operation button 20 due to noise such as static electricity is prevented, and the start of operation of the operation button 20 is not reflected on the effect display at a timing not intended by the player.

<Step S1908>
If the MPU 51 determines in step S1902 that the second operation detection flag is not on (step S1902: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the third operation detection flag indicating the most recent operation state of the operation button 20 is on. (Step S1908). Here, the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S1910 when the third operation detection flag is on (step S1908: Yes), and executes the processing when the second operation detection flag is off (step S1908: No). It moves to step S1909.

<Step S1909>
In step S1909, the MPU 51 sets the third operation pattern flag on, sets the first operation pattern flag and the second operation pattern flag off, and ends the operation detection pattern determination processing. That is, the MPU 51 sets the third operation pattern flag to ON when an operation pattern of “ON”, “OFF”, and “OFF” occurs as three operation states of the operation button 20, and sets the first operation pattern The flag and the second operation pattern flag are set to off (see FIG. 18A). The third operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the operation button 20 has been completed). As described above, if it is determined whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state using the third operation pattern flag, the operation state of the operation button 20 for three times is reflected. Or, erroneous detection of the operation start of the operation button 20 due to noise such as static electricity is prevented, and the end of the operation of the operation button 20 is not reflected on the effect display at a timing not intended by the player.

<Step S1910>
In step S1910, the MPU 51 sets the first operation pattern flag, the second operation pattern flag, and the third operation pattern flag to off, and ends the operation detection pattern determination processing. That is, the MPU 51 turns off all of the first to third operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above such as “OFF”, “OFF”, “OFF” occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 for three times. (See FIG. 18A). When all of the first to third operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 51 determines that the operation button 20 is in the non-operation state.

[Selection button operation detection processing]
In the selection button operation detection process (step S1703 in FIG. 15), the MPU 51 executes an upper selection button operation process, a lower selection button operation process, a left selection button operation process, and a right selection button operation process.

<Up selection button operation processing>
In the upper selection button operation process, the MPU 51 detects the operation state of the upper selection button 211 and executes a process for sequentially updating the past three operation histories. Here, the upper selection button operation processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing in FIG. 16, and thus detailed description is omitted. In the upper selection button operation processing, the “operation detection flag” may be replaced with “up selection operation detection flag” in each step of the operation button operation detection processing in FIG.

<Lower selection button operation processing>
In the lower selection button operation processing, the MPU 51 detects the operation state of the lower selection button 212 and executes processing for sequentially updating the operation histories of the past three times. Here, the lower selection button operation processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing in FIG. 16, and thus detailed description is omitted. In the lower selection button operation processing, the “operation detection flag” may be replaced with “lower selection operation detection flag” in each step of the operation button operation detection processing in FIG.

<Left selection button operation processing>
In the left selection button operation processing, the MPU 51 detects the operation state of the left selection button 213 and executes processing for sequentially updating the operation histories for the past three times. Here, the left selection button operation processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing in FIG. 16, and thus detailed description is omitted. Note that the left selection button operation processing may be obtained by replacing the “operation detection flag” with the “left selection operation detection flag” in each step of the operation button operation detection processing in FIG.

<Right selection button operation processing>
In the right selection button operation processing, the MPU 51 detects the operation state of the right selection button 214 and executes processing for sequentially updating the past three operation histories. Here, the right selection button operation processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing in FIG. 16, and thus detailed description is omitted. In the right selection button operation process, the “operation detection flag” may be replaced with the “right selection operation detection flag” in each step of the operation button operation detection process in FIG.

[Selection operation detection pattern judgment processing]
In the selection operation detection pattern determination processing (step S1704 in FIG. 15), the MPU 51 performs the upper selection operation detection pattern determination processing, the lower selection operation detection pattern determination processing, the left selection operation detection pattern determination processing, and the right selection operation detection pattern determination processing. Execute.

<Upper selection operation detection pattern determination processing>
In the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 determines the upper selection button 211 based on the operation history of the upper selection button 211 determined based on the first upper selection operation detection flag, the second upper selection operation detection flag, and the third upper selection operation detection flag. An upper operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the selection button 211 is set. Here, the upper selection operation detection pattern determination processing is the same as the operation detection pattern determination processing in FIG. 17, and thus detailed description is omitted. In the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 17, the “operation detection flag” is set to “upper selection operation detection flag”, and the “operation pattern flag” is set to “upper selection operation pattern”. Flag ".

  Here, as shown in FIG. 18B, in the upper selection operation detection pattern determination processing, the MPU 51 determines that the operation patterns of “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” are the three operation states of the upper selection button 211. When this occurs, the first upper selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second upper selection operation pattern flag and the third upper selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. Then, the first upper selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the upper selection button 211 is continuing.

  The MPU 51 sets the second upper selection operation pattern flag to ON when an operation pattern of “OFF”, “ON”, and “ON” occurs as the operation state of the upper selection button 211 for three times. The first upper selection operation pattern flag and the third upper selection operation pattern flag are set to off. The second upper selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the upper selection button 211 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the upper selection button 211 has been started). Used.

  Further, the MPU 51 sets the third upper selection operation pattern flag to ON when the operation patterns of “ON”, “OFF”, and “OFF” are generated as the operation states of the upper selection button 211 three times, and The first upper selection operation pattern flag and the second upper selection operation pattern flag are set to off. The third upper selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the upper selection button 211 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the upper selection button 211 has been completed). Used.

  Further, when an operation pattern other than the above, such as “OFF”, “OFF”, or “OFF”, is generated as the operation state of the upper selection button 211 three times, the MPU 51 sets the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags. Set all to off. When all of the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 51 determines that the upper selection button 211 is in the non-operation state.

<Lower selection operation detection pattern determination processing>
In the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 determines the lower selection button from the operation history of the lower selection button 212 determined based on the first lower selection operation detection flag, the second lower selection operation detection flag, and the lower selection operation detection flag. A lower operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the key 212 is set. Here, the lower selection operation detection pattern determination processing is the same as the operation detection pattern determination processing in FIG. 17, and thus detailed description is omitted. In the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process, the “operation detection flag” is set to “lower selection operation detection flag” and the “operation pattern flag” is set to “lower selection operation pattern” in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. Flag ".

  Here, as shown in FIG. 18C, in the lower selection operation detection pattern determination processing, the MPU 51 determines that the operation patterns of “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” as the operation states of the lower selection button 212 for three times. When this occurs, the first lower selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second lower selection operation pattern flag and the third lower selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. Then, the first lower selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the lower selection button 212 is continued.

  Further, the MPU 51 sets the second lower selection operation pattern flag to ON when an operation pattern of “OFF”, “ON”, “ON” occurs as the operation state of the lower selection button 212 for three times, and The first lower selection operation pattern flag and the third lower selection operation pattern flag are set to off. The second lower selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the lower selection button 212 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether the operation of the lower selection button 212 has been started). Used.

  Further, the MPU 51 sets the third lower selection operation pattern flag to ON when an operation pattern of “ON”, “OFF”, and “OFF” occurs as the operation state of the lower selection button 212 for three times, and The first lower selection operation pattern flag and the second lower selection operation pattern flag are set to off. The third lower selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the lower selection button 212 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the lower selection button 212 has ended). Used.

  In addition, when an operation pattern other than the above such as “OFF”, “OFF”, or “OFF” occurs as the operation state of the lower selection button 212 for three times, the MPU 51 sets the first to third lower selection operation detection flags. Set all to off. When all of the first to third lower selection operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 51 determines that the lower selection button 212 is in the non-operation state.

<Left selection operation detection pattern determination process>
In the left selection operation detection pattern determination processing, the MPU 51 determines the left selection button from the operation history of the left selection button 213 determined based on the first left selection operation detection flag, the second left selection operation detection flag, and the left selection operation detection flag. A left operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the 213 is set. Here, the left selection operation detection pattern determination processing is the same as the operation detection pattern determination processing in FIG. 17, and thus detailed description is omitted. In the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the “operation detection flag” is set to “left selection operation detection flag” and the “operation pattern flag” is set to “left selection operation pattern” in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. Flag ".

  Here, as shown in FIG. 18 (D), in the left selection operation detection pattern determination processing, the MPU 51 determines that the operation patterns of “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” are the three operation states of the left selection button 213. When this occurs, the first left selection operation pattern flag is set to on, and the second left selection operation pattern flag and the third left selection operation pattern flag are set to off. The first left selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the left selection button 213 is continuing.

  The MPU 51 sets the second left selection operation pattern flag to ON when the operation patterns “OFF”, “ON”, and “ON” occur as the operation states of the left selection button 213 three times, and The first left selection operation pattern flag and the third left selection operation pattern flag are set to off. The second left selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the left selection button 213 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the left selection button 213 has been started). Used.

  Further, the MPU 51 sets the third left selection operation pattern flag to ON when the operation patterns “ON”, “OFF”, and “OFF” occur as the operation states of the left selection button 213 three times, and The first left selection operation pattern flag and the second left selection operation pattern flag are set to off. The third left selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the left selection button 213 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the left selection button 213 has been completed). Used.

  In addition, when an operation pattern other than the above, such as “OFF”, “OFF”, or “OFF”, is generated as the operation state of the left selection button 213 three times, the MPU 51 sets the first to third left selection operation pattern flags. Set all to off. When all of the first to third left selection operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 51 determines that the left selection button 213 is not operated.

<Right selection operation detection pattern determination processing>
In the right selection operation detection pattern determination processing, the MPU 51 determines the right selection button from the operation history of the right selection button 214 determined based on the first right selection operation detection flag, the second right selection operation detection flag, and the right selection operation detection flag. A right operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the operation 214 is set. Here, the right selection operation detection pattern determination processing is the same as the operation detection pattern determination processing in FIG. 17, and thus a detailed description is omitted. In the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, the “operation detection flag” is set to “right selection operation detection flag” and the “operation pattern flag” is set to “right selection operation pattern” in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. Flag ".

  Here, as shown in FIG. 18E, in the right selection operation detection pattern determination processing, the MPU 51 determines that the operation patterns of “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” are three times as the operation state of the right selection button 214. When this occurs, the first right selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second right selection operation pattern flag and the third right selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The first right selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the right selection button 214 is continuing.

  The MPU 51 sets the second right selection operation pattern flag to ON when an operation pattern of “OFF”, “ON”, or “ON” occurs as the operation state of the right selection button 214 for three times, and The first right selection operation pattern flag and the third right selection operation pattern flag are set to off. The second right selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the right selection button 214 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the right selection button 214 has been started). Used.

  Further, the MPU 51 sets the third right selection operation pattern flag to ON when the operation patterns of “ON”, “OFF”, and “OFF” occur as the operation states of the right selection button 214 three times, and The first right selection operation pattern flag and the second right selection operation pattern flag are set to off. The third right selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the right selection button 214 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the right selection button 214 has been completed). Used.

  In addition, when an operation pattern other than the above, such as “OFF”, “OFF”, or “OFF”, is generated as the operation state of the right selection button 214 three times, the MPU 51 sets the first to third right selection operation pattern flags. Set all to off. When all of the first to third right selection operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 51 determines that the right selection button 214 is not operated.

[OK button operation detection process]
In the determination button operation detection processing, the MPU 51 detects the operation state of the determination button 21B and executes processing for sequentially updating the operation history of the past three times. Here, the determination button operation detection processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing of FIG. 16, and thus a detailed description is omitted. In addition, the determination button operation detection process may read the “operation detection flag” as the “determination button operation detection flag” in each step of the operation button operation detection process of FIG.

[Determination operation detection pattern judgment processing]
In the determination operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 determines the operation state of the determination button 21B based on the operation history of the determination button 21B determined based on the first determination operation detection flag, the second determination operation detection flag, and the third determination operation detection flag. Set an operation pattern flag for determining Here, the determination operation detection pattern determination processing is the same as the operation detection pattern determination processing in FIG. 17, and thus a detailed description is omitted. In the determination operation detection pattern determination process, the “operation detection flag” may be replaced with “determination operation detection flag” in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 18 (F), in the determination operation detection pattern determination processing, the MPU 51 generates the operation patterns “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” as the three operation states of the determination button 21B. In this case, the first decision operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second decision operation pattern flag and the third decision operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The first determination operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the determination button 21B is continued.

  Further, the MPU 51 sets the second determination operation pattern flag to ON when the operation patterns “OFF”, “ON”, and “ON” occur as the operation states of the determination button 21B for three times, and performs the first determination. The operation pattern flag and the third determined operation pattern flag are set to off. The second determination operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the determination button 21B has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the determination button 21B has been started). .

  Further, when an operation pattern of “ON”, “OFF”, and “OFF” is generated as the operation state of the determination button 21B for three times, the MPU 51 sets the third determination operation pattern flag to ON, and performs the first determination. The operation pattern flag and the second decision operation pattern flag are set to off. The third determination operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the determination button 21B has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the determination button 21B has been completed). .

  When an operation pattern other than the above, such as “OFF”, “OFF”, or “OFF”, is generated as the three operation states of the determination button 21B, the MPU 51 sets all of the first to third determination operation pattern flags. Set to off. When all of the first to third determination operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 51 determines that the determination button 21B is in the non-operation state.

[Counter update processing]
Here, returning to the description of FIG. 15, in the counter update process (step S1707), the MPU 51 updates the effect type counter and the variation display counter. Specifically, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value of the effect type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The effect type counter updated here is used to determine the change type and the effect type based on the change pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 100. On the other hand, the MPU 51 decrements the variable display counter by one. This variable display counter is for measuring the variable display time of the symbol display unit 341. The counter value of the variable display counter is set to be 0 when the remaining variable display time becomes 0. Therefore, based on the counter value of the variable display counter, it is possible to grasp the remaining variable display time, that the variable display is being changed, that the variable display on the symbol display unit 341 has been completed, and the like. In the present embodiment, for example, the fluctuation display counter determines whether or not the fluctuation stop screen 92 (see FIG. 53A) in which the fluctuation display of the main symbol on the symbol display unit 341 has been stopped in step S3401 of FIG. In this case, the process is referred to when determining whether or not the variable display of the main symbol has been started on the symbol display unit 341 in step S3501 in FIG. 57, step S3601 in FIG. 58, and the like.

[Command judgment processing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the command determination process (step S1708 in FIG. 15). In the command determination processing, a command received from main controller 4 is determined, and processing corresponding to the command is executed.

<Step S2001>
As shown in FIG. 19, in step S2001, the MPU 51 determines whether a command has been received from the main control device 4. Here, when the MPU 51 receives the command (Step S2001: Yes), the processing shifts to Step S2002. On the other hand, if no command has been received (step S2001: No), the MPU 51 ends the command determination process. The command received from main controller 4 is stored in the unprocessed command storage area of RAM 512, and MPU 51 determines whether a command has been received by referring to the unprocessed command storage area. The command stored in the unprocessed command storage area is determined to have been received in step S2001, and is deleted from the unprocessed command storage area when the command has been processed. For example, the command is stored in the processing work storage area. It is memorized.

<Step S2002>
In step S2002, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a fluctuation pattern command. Here, if the command is a variation pattern command (step S2002: Yes), the processing proceeds to step S2003, and if the command is not a variation pattern command (step S2002: No), the processing proceeds to step S2006.

<Step S2003>
In step S2003, the MPU 51 determines a fluctuation pattern (stop symbol combination of main symbol, fluctuation type and effect type) based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 4. Specifically, the MPU 51 checks the variation pattern command, the first stop symbol selection table (see FIG. 20A), the variation type table (see FIG. 20B), and the effect type table (see FIG. 20B) stored in the ROM 511 in advance. 21A to 21C) and the value of the effect type counter stored in the RAM 512 to determine the variation pattern. Further, when the fluctuation pattern command includes information on the jackpot type, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot flag corresponding to the jackpot type to ON. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the 5R normal jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is 5R normal jackpot, sets the 5R certain variable jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is 5R positive variable jackpot, Is a 16R probability variable jackpot, the 16R probability variable jackpot flag is set to ON.

  The stop symbol combination of the main symbol includes a first stop symbol, a second stop symbol, and a final stop symbol. The first stop symbol is a main symbol that is first stopped and displayed on the symbol display section 341, the second stop symbol is a second main symbol that is stopped and displayed, and the last stopped symbol is finally stopped and displayed. It is a design that The effect type table includes a normal reach effect table corresponding to normal reach (see FIG. 21A), a super reach effect table corresponding to super reach (see FIG. 21B), and a special reach effect table corresponding to special reach (see FIG. 21B). FIG. 21C).

  FIG. 20A is a diagram illustrating an example of the first stop symbol selection table. As shown in FIG. 20 (A), in the first stop symbol selection table, a main symbol (first stop symbol) to be first stopped and displayed on the symbol display section 341 is determined. In FIG. 20A, a symbol combination indicating that the main symbol is “1” to “9” and “333” is a probable jackpot (either 5R probable jackpot or 16R probable jackpot), “777” "Is a symbol combination that indicates that it is a 16R probability variable jackpot, and that the zoro eyes other than" 333 "and" 777 "are either a 5R regular jackpot, a 5R probability variable jackpot, or a 16R probability variable jackpot. It is assumed.

  When the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", there is no distribution of "3" and "7" as the first stop symbol, and the first stop symbol is determined with a predetermined probability from a main symbol other than "3" and "7". It is determined. That is, when the lottery result is "5R regular jackpot", the symbol combination of "333" or "777" indicating the 5R probability variable jackpot or the 16R probability variable jackpot is not stopped and displayed.

  Also, when the lottery result is “5R probable jackpot”, there is no “7” as the first stop symbol, and the first stop symbol is determined with a predetermined probability from a main symbol other than “7”. That is, when the lottery result is “5R probability change jackpot”, the symbol combination of “777” indicating the 16R probability change hit is not stopped and displayed. On the other hand, even when the lottery result is “5R probability change jackpot”, symbol combinations other than the symbol combination of “333” indicating the 5R probability change jackpot may be stopped and displayed. In other words, even when the lottery result is “5R probable big hit”, a symbol combination other than the symbol combination “333” whose main symbol stop display result indicates a 5R normal big hit can be stopped and displayed. When the lottery result is “5R probable big hit” and the main symbol other than “3” other than “7” is determined as the first stop symbol, the MPU 51 sets the first promotion effect flag to ON. . The first promotion effect flag is referred to when it is determined whether or not to execute the 5R certain-change promotion effect that clearly indicates the 5R certain-change big hit in a state suggesting that it is the 5R normal big-hit, as shown in FIG. Step S2103 in the game effect determination process, step S2501 in the initial tentatively selected song output process in FIG. 37, step S2701 in the temporarily selected song output process in FIG. 40, and step S2803 in the selected song output process in FIG. 41.

  In addition, when the lottery result is "16 probable jackpot", there is a distribution to all the main symbols "1" to "9", and the first stop is performed at a predetermined probability from the main symbols "1" to "9". The symbol is determined. That is, even if the lottery result is “16R probability change jackpot”, symbol combinations other than the symbol combination of “777” indicating the 16R probability change jackpot may be stopped and displayed. In other words, even if the lottery result is "16R probable big hit", the main symbol stop display result indicates that the symbol combination other than the symbol combination of "777" indicating the 5R probable big hit or 5R normal big hit is stopped. Can be done. When the lottery result is “16R probable big hit” and “3” is determined as the first stop symbol, the MPU 51 sets the second promotion effect flag to ON, and sets “3” as the first stop symbol. When the main symbol other than “7” is determined, the MPU 51 sets the third promotion effect flag to ON. The second promotion effect flag is referred to when it is determined whether or not to execute the 16R promotion effect that clearly indicates the 16R probability change jackpot in a state suggesting the 5R probability change jackpot (the jackpot game in FIG. 22). Step S2106 in the effect determination process, step S2501 in the initial tentatively selected song output process in FIG. 37, step S2701 in the tentatively selected song output process in FIG. 40, and step S2803 in the selected song output process in FIG. The third promotion effect flag is referred to when it is determined whether or not to execute the 16R certain-change promotion effect that clearly indicates that it is the 16R certain-change big hit in a state suggesting that it is the 5R normal big-hit (the big hit in FIG. 22). Step S2109 in the game effect determination process, step S2501 in the initial tentatively selected song output process in FIG. 37, step S2701 in the tentatively selected song output process in FIG. 40, and step S2803 in the selected song output process in FIG.

  Then, when determining the first stop symbol when the lottery result is a big hit, the MPU 51 determines the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol to be the same symbols as the previously determined first stop symbol. Thereby, the stop symbol combination stopped and displayed on the activated line of the symbol display unit 341 in the game time is determined.

  On the other hand, when the lottery result is "out", there is a distribution to all the main symbols "1" to "9", and the first stop symbol is determined with a predetermined probability from the main symbols "1" to "9". Is done. If the lottery result is “missing” and the first stop symbol is determined, the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol selected based on the miss type table (FIG. 7D) and the first stop symbol determined previously. The second stop symbol is determined based on the symbol. For example, in the case where the out-of-off type is out-of-reach reach, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same symbol as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined to be the symbol before and after the first stop symbol. In addition, when the disengagement type is reach other than disengagement, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same symbol as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is different from the first stop symbol and the symbols before and after the first stop symbol. The pattern is determined. In addition, when the departure type is completely deviated, the second stop symbol is determined to be a symbol different from the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined irrespective of the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol. In addition, the stop symbol combination of the main symbol may be determined by the display control device 6, only the first stop symbol is determined by the audio lamp control device 5, and the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol are determined by the display control device 6. You may decide.

  FIG. 20B is a diagram illustrating an example of a fluctuation type table. As shown in FIG. 20B, in the variation type table, the variation display time and the content of the variation type corresponding to the variation pattern command are defined. For example, the fluctuation pattern command “A01” in which the lottery result is “normal jackpot” and the fluctuation pattern is “01” is associated with the fluctuation display time “30 s” and the fluctuation type “normal reach”. In addition, a fluctuation display time “60 s” and a fluctuation type “Super Reach” are associated with the fluctuation pattern command “B02” in which the lottery result is “5R probable big hit” and the fluctuation pattern is “02”. A fluctuation pattern command “C03” having a result “16 probable big hit” and a fluctuation pattern “03” is associated with a fluctuation display time “90 s” and a fluctuation type “special reach”. Further, the fluctuation pattern command “D04” in which the lottery result is “out” and the fluctuation pattern is “04” is associated with the fluctuation display time “7s” and the fluctuation type “no reach”. The fluctuation pattern command “D05” that is “out” and the fluctuation pattern is “05” is associated with the fluctuation display time “10 s” and the fluctuation type “no reach”.

  FIGS. 21A to 21C are diagrams illustrating an example of the effect type table. The effect type table is defined for each change type. FIG. 21 (A) is a normal reach effect table when the change type is normal reach, FIG. 21 (B) is a super reach effect table when the change type is super reach, and FIG. 21 (C) is It is a special reach effect table when the variation type is special reach. In the present embodiment, a case will be described as an example where there are five effect types corresponding to each variation type, but there may be six or more effect types. In FIG. 21, the effect type table when the change type is no reach is omitted.

  In the normal reach effect table shown in FIG. 21A, the effect type corresponding to the value of the effect type counter is “effect X1” to the effect type according to the lottery result (5R regular jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, 16R probability variable jackpot, and out of range). "Direction X5" is defined. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation type is normal reach, the MPU 51 selects an effect type corresponding to the value of the effect type counter from the normal reach effect table according to the lottery result.

  In the super reach effect table shown in FIG. 21B, “effect Y1” to “effect Y5” are determined as effect types corresponding to the value of the effect type counter in accordance with the lottery result. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation type is super reach, the MPU 51 selects an effect type corresponding to the value of the effect type counter from the super reach effect table according to the lottery result.

  Further, in the special reach effect table shown in FIG. 21C, “effect Z1” to “effect Z5” are determined as the effect types corresponding to the value of the effect type counter in accordance with the lottery result. If the MPU 51 determines that the variation type is special reach, the MPU 51 selects an effect type corresponding to the value of the effect type counter from the special reach effect table according to the lottery result.

  Then, the MPU 51 sets a variation pattern command, a variation type table, a rendering type table, and a display variation pattern command indicating a variation symbol and a rendering type, which are determined based on the main symbol stop symbol combination determined based on the rendering type counter. Remember. This display variation pattern command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in step S2005 described later. On the other hand, the display control device 6 that has received the display variation pattern command executes the symbol variation display and the effect display using the symbol display unit 341 based on the display variation pattern command. The display variation pattern command may include information on the presence or absence of the jackpot.

<Step S2004>
In step S2004, the MPU 51 sets the variable display time corresponding to the variable pattern command in the variable display counter. The fluctuation display time is determined according to the fluctuation pattern information included in the fluctuation pattern command. The variable display counter is decremented by one in the counter update process (step S1707) of FIG. 15, and the MPU 51 determines whether or not the symbol variable display is being performed, the remaining time of the variable display time, and the like based on the variable display counter. Can be determined. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the symbol variation display has ended when the variation display counter becomes 0.

<Step S2005>
In step S2005, the MPU 51 outputs to the display control device 6 a display variation pattern command for specifying the content of the stop symbol combination, the variation type, and the effect type of the main symbol in the symbol display unit 341 and ends the command determination process. Let it. The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the combination of the stop symbols, the variation type, and the effect type of the main symbol determined in step S2003. On the other hand, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores a variation image of a main symbol corresponding to each display variation pattern command, an effect image, and the like. Thereby, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes the variation display and the effect display on the symbol display unit 341 according to the combination of the stop symbol of the main symbol corresponding to the display variation pattern command, the variation type, and the effect type.

  Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 performs variable display of a plurality of main symbols (for example, three) until a preset variable display time elapses. Of the main symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed. When all the main symbols are stopped and the jackpot lottery result is displayed, a process corresponding to the symbol change display of the next game or the jackpot game is executed. Here, during the fluctuation display of the main symbol, various effects corresponding to the contents of the fluctuation type and the effect type specified by the display fluctuation pattern command are executed.

<Step S2006>
In step S2006, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a jackpot game start command. The big hit game start command is a command indicating that a big hit game is started, and is set when the big hit game execution flag is set to ON at the start of the big hit game by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 as described above. Here, if the received command is a jackpot game start command (step S2006: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2007, and if the received command is not a jackpot game start command (step S2006: No), the process proceeds. Shifts to step S2009.

<Step S2007>
When receiving the jackpot game start command, the MPU 51 executes a jackpot game effect determination process (step S2007). The jackpot game effect determination process is a process of determining an effect executed on the symbol display unit 341 or the like when the gaming state has shifted to the jackpot game state. The details of the jackpot game effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S2008>
In step S2008, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect start flag to ON. The jackpot game effect start flag is referred to when determining whether to execute an opening effect start process in the jackpot game effect process of FIG. 23 described later (step S2201).

<Step S2009>
In step S2009, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a jackpot game end command. The big hit game end command is a command for ending the big hit game, and is set when the big hit game execution flag is turned off at the end of the big hit game by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 as described above. Here, when the received command is the jackpot game end command (step S2009: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2010, and when the received command is not the jackpot game end command (step S2009: No), the processing is performed. Shifts to step S2011.

<Step S2010>
In step S2010, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect end flag to ON. The jackpot game effect end flag is set to ON in, for example, step S2013 described below, and is referred to in the jackpot game effect process of FIG. 23 described later when determining whether to execute the ending effect end process in the jackpot game effect. (Step S2216).

<Step S2011>
In step S2011, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a hold command. The suspension command includes the first suspension command and the second suspension command as described above. The first hold command includes information for specifying the jackpot type or out of order, the change pattern, and the number N of change indications generated by winning the first operation port 314. The second hold command includes information for specifying the jackpot type or out, the change pattern, and the number M of change display reservations M generated by winning the second operation port 315. Here, if the received command is a hold command (Step S2011: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to Step S2012. If the received command is not a hold command (Step S2011: No), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to Step S2013. Transition.

<Step S2012>
In step S2012, when the received hold command is the first hold command, the MPU 51 stores the jackpot type or the outage, the change pattern, the number of holds N, and the like specified by the first hold command in the change type area of the RAM 512. . Similarly, when the received hold command is the second hold command, the MPU 51 stores the jackpot type or the outlier, the change pattern, the number of holds M, and the like specified by the second hold command in the change type area of the RAM 512.

<Step S2013>
In step S2013, the MPU 51 executes a process based on another command received from the main control device 4, and then ends the command determination process. For example, the MPU 51 sets the opening / closing execution mode start flag to ON when receiving the opening / closing execution mode start command, and sets the opening / closing execution mode end flag to ON when receiving the opening / closing execution mode end command. Note that the opening / closing execution mode start flag is referred to in the jackpot game rendering process shown in FIG. 23 described below when ending the opening rendering and determining whether to start the opening / closing execution mode rendering (steps S2206 to S2208). . On the other hand, the open / close execution mode end flag is referred to in the jackpot game effect process of FIG. 23 described below when ending the open / close execution mode effect and determining whether to start the ending effect (steps S2212 to S2214). .

[Big hit game production decision processing]
Here, FIG. 22 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect determination process (Step S2007 in FIG. 19). In the jackpot game effect determination processing, the effects executed in the jackpot game such as the opening effect, the ending effect, and the opening / closing execution mode effect performed in the jackpot game are determined.

<Step S2101>
In step S2101, the MPU 51 determines an opening effect to be executed from the transition to the jackpot game to the start of the open / close execution mode. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines the opening effect according to the symbol combination (or the first stop symbol) of the main symbol stopped and displayed, for example, based on the opening effect table stored in the ROM 511. Further, the MPU 51 transmits information of the determined opening effect type to the display control device 6 as an opening effect command. Here, as the opening effect, the MPU 51 specifies that the symbol combination is “777” and the 16R probable change jackpot, and that the symbol combination is “333” and the 5R probable change jackpot. If the suggested effect or the symbol combination is a slot other than “777” and “333”, the effect indicating that it is a 5R normal jackpot is determined. That is, the opening effect is determined not according to the jackpot type but according to the symbol combination (or the first stop symbol) of the stopped and displayed main symbol.

<Step S2102>
In step S2102, the MPU 51 determines an ending effect to be performed after the open / close execution mode ends and before the big hit game ends. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines an ending effect according to the jackpot type based on, for example, an ending effect table stored in the ROM 511. Further, the MPU 51 transmits information of the determined ending effect type to the display control device 6 as an ending effect command.

  Here, the ending effect is to inform the player that the big hit game is finished after the opening / closing execution mode is finished. In the ending effect, for example, information such as a jackpot lottery result (clearly indicating a game state to be shifted to after the completion of the jackpot game) in the game time leading to the jackpot game is displayed on the symbol display section 341. Specifically, in the ending effect, in the normal time-saving game state (low-probability mode and high-frequency support mode), or in the normal non-time-saving game state (low-probability mode and non-high-frequency support mode), the lottery result is a big hit. When the initial hit is a 5R probability change jackpot or a 16R probability change jackpot, an image indicating that the game mode shifts to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, that is, the short game time short game state, is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 and the first hit is 5R. In the case of a normal jackpot, an image clearly indicating transition to the normal non-time saving game state is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. An image that clearly indicates that the game state shifts to the probable change time saving game state is, for example, “OORUSH rush”. On the other hand, the image that clearly indicates the transition to the normal non-time saving gaming state is, for example, “entering a chance zone”, and the number of times of saving is displayed together. Further, in the ending effect in a case where the lottery result is a big hit in the probabilistic short time gaming state, an image that clearly indicates that the game is to shift to the probabilistic short time gaming state again is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. An image that clearly indicates that the game mode is to shift to the probable change time reduction gaming state again is, for example, “continue XXRUSH”. In addition, the ending effect is an image indicating the number of transitions to the probability-changing time-saving gaming state (for example, the number of RUSH continuations) with respect to one initial hit, and an image of a character appearing in the jackpot effect in the game time leading to the jackpot game. The information may be displayed on the display unit 341. An image indicating the number of transitions to the certainty-saving time-saving gaming state or a character image is determined in step S2102.

  Further, in the ending effect, an image relating to payouts such as the number of payouts in the jackpot game and the total number of payouts in the extended villa is displayed on the symbol display section 341. In addition, the ending effect may be such as to display a confirmed image or the like that clearly indicates that a later-described holding villa is to be executed. These images are determined, for example, in step S2214 of the jackpot game rendering process described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S2103>
In step S2103, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the first promotion effect flag is set to on. If the first promotion effect flag is on (step S2103: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2104, and the process proceeds to step S2104. If the 1 promotion effect flag is off (step S2103: No), the process proceeds to step S2106. The first promotion effect flag indicates that the lottery result is a 5R probability variable jackpot during or after execution of the 5R normal jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect indicating that the lottery result is a 5R normal jackpot. Is performed. In the first promotion effect flag, a symbol combination (a symbol combination other than “333” and “777”) indicating that the lottery result is “5R probable jackpot” and indicating the 5R normal jackpot is determined as the main symbol stop display result is determined. In this case, it is set to ON in step S2003 in the command determination process of FIG.

<Step S2104>
In step S2104, the MPU 51 determines an effect indicating a 5R normal big hit (5R normal big hit opening / closing execution mode effect) as an effect to be executed in the opening / closing execution mode. For example, the 5R normal big hit opening / closing execution mode effect is determined based on the 5R normal big hit opening / closing execution mode effect table stored in the ROM 511. Further, the MPU 51 transmits the type information of the determined 5R normal jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect to the display control device 6 as an opening / closing execution mode effect command.

<Step S2105>
In step S2105, the MPU 51 determines a 5R certainty change promotion effect. The 5R certain change promotion effect is determined based on, for example, a 5R certain change promotion effect table stored in the ROM 511. In addition, the MPU 51 transmits the information of the determined type of the 5R certainty promotion effect to the display control device 6 as a certainty promotion effect command.

<Step S2106>
In step S2106, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second promotion effect flag is set to on. If the second promotion effect flag is on (step S2106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2107, and the process proceeds to step S2107. If the 2 promotion effect flag is OFF (step S2106: NO), the process proceeds to step S2109. The second promotion effect flag indicates that the lottery result is a 16R probability change jackpot during or after the execution of the 5R probability change jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect indicating that the lottery result is a 5R probability change jackpot. This indicates whether or not to execute. When the lottery result is “16R probable jackpot” and the symbol combination indicating the 5R regular jackpot or 5R probable jackpot is determined as the stop display result of the main symbol, the second promotion effect flag is determined by the command determination in FIG. It is set to ON in step S2003 in the processing.

<Step S2107>
In step S2107, the MPU 51 determines an effect that suggests the 5R probability change jackpot (5R probability change hit opening / closing execution mode effect) as the effect to be executed in the opening / closing execution mode. For example, the opening / closing execution mode effect for the 5R probability change jackpot is determined based on the 5R probability changing jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect table stored in the ROM 511. In addition, the MPU 51 transmits the type information of the determined 5R likelihood change jackpot open / close execution mode effect to the display control device 6 as an open / close execution mode effect command.

<Step S2108>
In step S2108, the MPU 51 determines a 16R promotion effect. The 16R promotion effect is determined based on the 16R promotion effect table stored in the ROM 511, for example. Further, the MPU 51 transmits the information of the type of the selected 16R promotion effect to the display control device 6 as a 16R promotion effect command.

<Step S2109>
In step S2109, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the third promotion effect flag is set to on. If the third promotion effect flag is on (step S2109: Yes), the process shifts to step S2110. If the 3 promotion effect flag is off (step S2109: No), the process proceeds to step S2112. The third promotion effect flag indicates whether the lottery result is a 16R certain-variable jackpot, which indicates that the lottery result is a 16R certain-variable big hit, during or after the 5R normal big-hit suggestion effect, which indicates that the lottery result is a 5R normal big-hit. No. If the lottery result is “16R probable jackpot” and a symbol combination indicating the 5R normal jackpot is determined as the stop display result of the main symbol, the third promotion effect flag is determined in step S2003 in the command determination process of FIG. Is set to on.

<Step S2110>
In step S2110, similarly to step S2104, the MPU 51 determines an effect indicating a 5R normal jackpot (5R normal jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect) as an effect to be executed in the opening / closing execution mode, and determines the determined 5R normal jackpot opening / closing execution. The mode effect type information is transmitted to the display control device 6 as an open / close execution mode effect command.

<Step S2111>
In step S2111, the MPU 51 determines a 16R certain change promotion effect. The 16R certain change promotion effect is determined based on, for example, a 16R certain change promotion effect table stored in the ROM 511. Further, the MPU 51 transmits the information on the determined type of the 16R certain-change promotion effect to the display control device 6 as a 16R certain-change promotion effect command.

<Step S2112>
In step S2112, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the 5R certain variable jackpot flag set to on in step S2003 in the command determination process of FIG. 19 is set to on. If the 5R certain variable jackpot flag is on (step S2112) : Yes), the process moves to step S2113, and if the 5R certain-variable-big-hit flag is off (step S2112: No), the process moves to step S2114.

<Step S2113>
In step S2113, similarly to step S2107, the MPU 51 determines an effect indicating the 5R probability change jackpot (5R probability change jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect) as an effect executed in the opening / closing execution mode, and determines the determined 5R probability change jackpot opening / closing execution. The type information of the mode effect is transmitted to the display control device 6 as an opening / closing execution mode effect command, and the 5R certain change big hit flag is set to off.

<Step S2114>
In step S2114, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the 16R certain variable big hit flag set to on in step S2003 in the command determination process of FIG. 19 is set to on. If the 16R certain variable big hit flag is on (step S2114) : Yes), the process proceeds to step S2115, and when the 16R certain variable big hit flag is off (step S2114: No), the process proceeds to step S2116.

<Step S2115>
In step S2115, the MPU 51 determines an effect that suggests the 16R probability-change jackpot (effect of opening and closing the 16R probability-change jackpot execution mode) as the effect to be executed in the opening / closing execution mode. For example, the opening / closing execution mode effect for the 16R certain-variable big hit is determined based on the 16R certain-variable big-hit opening / closing execution mode effect table stored in the ROM 511. Further, the MPU 51 transmits the determined type information of the 16R certain-variable big hit opening / closing execution mode effect to the display control device 6 as an open / close execution mode effect command, and sets the 16R certain variable big hit flag to OFF.

<Step S2116>
In step S2116, similarly to step S2104, the MPU 51 determines an effect indicating a 5R normal jackpot (5R normal jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect) as an effect to be executed in the opening / closing execution mode, and determines the determined 5R normal jackpot opening / closing execution. The type information of the mode effect is transmitted to the display control device 6 as an open / close execution mode effect command, and the 5R normal big hit flag is set to off.

[Big hit game production process]
Here, FIG. 23 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the jackpot game rendering process (step S1710 in FIG. 15). In the jackpot game effect process, the opening effect, the ending effect, the opening / closing execution mode effect, and the like determined in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. 22 are executed.

<Step S2201>
In step S2201, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot game effect start flag set to on in step S2008 in the command determination process of FIG. 19 is set to on. If the jackpot game effect start flag is on ( Step S2201: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2202, and if the jackpot game effect start flag is off (step S2201: No), the process proceeds to step S2206.

<Steps S2202 and S2203>
If the jackpot game effect start flag is on (step S2201: Yes), the MPU 51 executes an opening effect start process (step S2202), and sets the jackpot game effect start flag to off (step S2203). In the opening effect start process, the MPU 51 causes the speaker 26 and the illuminator 27 to execute the sound effect and the lamp effect as the opening effect determined in step S2101 in FIG. A command for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute an image effect is transmitted.

<Step S2204>
In step S2204, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a so-called holding series is executed after the end of the jackpot game. The reservation consecutive cottage is a jackpot (5R) as hit information in any one of the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 of the second reservation storage area REB when the jackpot game ends and the game state shifts to the time saving mode. This is executed when information indicating that there is a probable jackpot, a 16R probable jackpot or a 5R regular jackpot is included. In other words, the hold series means that a jackpot game occurs within the number of games with the number of reservations M at the end of the jackpot game as an upper limit. For example, when the number of reservations M at the end of the jackpot game is four, a case where a jackpot occurs within four game rounds is referred to as a hold series. Whether or not the hold series is executed can be determined, for example, by referring to the change type area of the RAM 512 and determining whether or not the jackpot type specified by the second hold command is stored.

  However, in step S2204, at the stage of starting the opening effect, the change type area is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the holding extended villa is executed. That is, if the result of the jackpot lottery from the start of the jackpot game effect to the end of the opening / closing execution mode effect is a jackpot, it is not the target of determination of the reserved retreat in step S2204. Note that the start winning of the game ball to the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315 from the start of the jackpot game effect to the end of the opening / closing execution mode effect is suspended in, for example, an ending effect start process in step S2214 described later. In the case of executing the held extended villa finalizing effect by determining whether or not to execute the held extended villa finalizing effect that clearly indicates that the extended villa is to be performed, in step S2102 of the jackpot game effect deciding process (see FIG. 22). In the determined ending effect, a reserved extended-village effect is executed.

<Step S2205>
In step S2205, the MPU 51 sets the hold extended-village flag to ON, and ends the jackpot game rendering process. The reserved consecutive cottage flag is determined in step S2904 and step S2906 of the music selection button effect processing of FIG. 42 described later by a 5R sure variable selection button effect lottery table (see FIG. 45) or 16R certain variable selection button effect lottery for determining the music selection button effect. Referenced when selecting a table (see FIG. 48). More specifically, the reserved consecutive villa flags are determined by the steps S3003, S3008, S3014, and S3019 in the 5R sure variable selection button effect determination processing of FIG. It is referred to in S3119. In other words, in the held extended villa finalizing effect described later, the reserved extended villa finalizing effect is executed for the reserved extended villa where the result of the jackpot lottery before the opening effect is started is the big hit. Note that the determination in step S2204 is based on the steps S3003, S3008, S3014, and S3019 of the 5R certain variable selection button effect determination processing of FIG. It may be performed in S3119. In this case, since the determination as to whether or not the hold extended villa is executed is made at the stage of determining the music selection button effect, the hold extended villa at the lottery during the jackpot game is also the one until the music selection button effect is started. Since it is a target, the possibility that the reserved extended-village effect is executed is higher than in the case where it is determined whether or not the reserved extended-village is executed at the stage of starting the opening effect (step S2204). Therefore, the interest of the game is improved for the player who wants to know during the jackpot game that the reserved series is executed. In addition, the reserved extended villa effect may be executed in the ending effect as described above. In this case, the reserved extended villa finalizing effect is performed when the player has set not to execute the reserved extended villa finalizing effect as a music selection button effect (step S4113 in the music selection button effect setting screen processing in FIG. 66 described later, or described later). 73. In step S4513 in the music selection button effect setting history screen process of FIG. 73, the limited effect may be performed as a limited effect (when the non-execution of the held extended villa fixed effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON). Thereby, even when the player has set the non-execution of the reserved extended-village confirmation effect, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the reserved extended-village is to be executed.

<Step S2206>
In step S2206, the MPU 51 determines whether the open / close execution mode start flag set to on in step S2013 of FIG. 19 is set to on, and if the open / close execution mode start flag is on (step S2206: Yes) ), The process proceeds to step S2207. If the open / close execution mode start flag is OFF (step S2206: No), the process proceeds to step S2212.

<Steps S2207 and S2208>
When the opening / closing execution mode start flag is on (step S2206: Yes), the MPU 51 executes an opening effect ending process (step S2207), and executes an opening / closing execution mode effect start process (step S2208). That is, the MPU 51 ends the opening effect and starts the opening / closing execution mode effect determined in step S2104, S2107, S2110, S2113, S2115 or S2116 in the jackpot game effect determining process of FIG.

<Steps S2209 to S2211>
In step S2209, the MPU 51 executes a music selection image display process for displaying a music selection image 83 (see FIG. 25) for causing the player to select a music output in the open / close execution mode of the jackpot game effect. Next, the MPU 51 outputs the music (initial provisionally selected music image) corresponding to the provisionally selected music image 832 (initial provisionally selected music image) first displayed as the provisionally selected music image 832 in the music selection image 83. An output process is performed (step S2210). The tentatively selected music image 832 is selected by a player's determination operation on the determination button 21B from among a plurality of music (in this embodiment, 20 music) that can be output from the speaker 26 by the player's selection in the jackpot state as described above. It is an image which shows that it is a possible provisionally selected music piece. Further, the MPU 51 sets the opening / closing execution mode start flag to off (step S2211), and ends the big hit game rendering process. Details of the music selection image display processing will be described later with reference to FIG. The details of the initial provisionally selected music output process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S2212>
In step S2212, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the open / close execution mode end flag set to on in step S2013 in the command determination process of FIG. 19 is set to on. If the open / close execution mode end flag is on ( In step S2212, the process proceeds to step S2213. If the open / close execution mode end flag is OFF (step S2212: No), the process proceeds to step S2216.

<Step S2213>
When the open / close execution mode end flag is on (step S2212: Yes), the MPU 51 executes an open / close execution mode effect end process (step S2213). In the opening / closing execution mode effect ending process, the MPU 51 ends the execution of the image effect on the symbol display unit 341 and the output of the music from the speaker 26, for example.

<Steps S2214 and S2215>
The MPU 51 executes the ending effect start process (step S2214), sets the open / close execution mode end flag to off (S2215), and ends the jackpot game effect process. In the ending effect start process, the MPU 51 causes the symbol display unit 341 and the speaker 26 to start the ending effect determined in step S2102 (see FIG. 22) of the above-described jackpot game effect determination process. Note that, when the MPU 51 causes the symbol display unit 341 to display an image related to the number of balls to be played in the jackpot game or the total number of balls to be played in the extended game as the ending effect, the image related to the number of balls to be played before the ending effect is started. decide. In addition, when executing the reserved extended-village confirmation effect in the ending production, the MPU 51 displays the reserved extended-village confirmation image on the symbol display unit 341 before the ending production starts, outputs the reserved extended-village confirmation sound from the speaker 26, and the like. To determine the holding rendezvous.

<Step S2216>
In step S2216, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot game effect ending flag set to on in step S2010 in the command determination process of FIG. 19 is set to on. Step S2216: Yes), the process moves to step S2217, and if the jackpot game effect ending flag is off (step S2216: No), the process moves to step S2219.

<Steps S2217 and S2218>
When the jackpot game effect end flag is on (step S2216: Yes), the MPU 51 executes an ending effect end process (step S2217), sets the jackpot game effect end flag to off (step S2218), and sets the jackpot game. The production process ends.

<Steps S2219 and S2220>
In step S2219, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the music selection processing flag set to on in step S2306 in the music selection image display processing of FIG. If it is on (step S2219: Yes), the music selection processing is executed (step S2220), and if the music selection processing flag is off (step S2219: No), the big hit game production processing ends. The details of the music selection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Song selection image display processing]
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the music selection image display process (step S2209 in FIG. 23). In the music selection image display process, a music selection image 83 for causing the player to select a music output in the open / close execution mode of the jackpot game effect is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 (see FIG. 25). FIG. 25 is an example of a music selection image display screen 82 including a music selection image 83 displayed on the symbol display unit 341. FIG. 25 shows a state in which a later-described unselected song in the song selection image 83 is provisionally selected. Hereinafter, an example of the music selection image display screen 82 will be described first with reference to FIG. 25, and then the music selection image display processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 25, on the music selection image display screen 82, a music selection image 83, a selection determination section image 84, an operation explanation image 85, and a lyrics telop image 86 are displayed. It is not essential to display images other than the music selection image 83 on the music selection image display screen 82, and some or all of the images other than the music selection image 83 may not be displayed. Other images may be displayed in place of some or all of the other images.

  The music selection image 83 is for allowing the player to select music to be output by the speaker 26 from a plurality of music pieces (20 music pieces A to T in this embodiment) prepared in advance to be output from the speaker 26. It is. A prescribed number (“10” in the present embodiment) is provided in advance for the number of the music selection images 83 displayed on the symbol display section 341, and a part of the plurality of music (in this embodiment, 20 music) The music selection image 83 corresponding to (the ten songs in the middle) is displayed in a display area 837 preset in the symbol display unit 341. In other words, the number of the plurality of music pieces is larger than the number of the music piece selection images 83 (the total number of the selected music piece images 831, the temporarily selected music piece images 832, and the unselected music piece images 833). In FIG. 25, music pieces that are not displayed in the display area 837 among a plurality of music pieces are indicated by virtual lines (reference numeral 838 in the drawing). In addition, the number of the plurality of songs that can be output in the jackpot game is larger than the display upper limit number of the plurality of songs prepared in advance to be output from the speaker 26. The number may be the same.

  The music selection image 83 includes a selected music image 831, a temporarily selected music image 832, and an unselected music image 833 displayed so as to be distinguishable from each other. Here, being distinguishable from each other is not limited to the case where the already selected music image 831, the temporarily selected music image 832, and the unselected music image 833 themselves can be distinguished. For example, the already-selected music image 831, the tentatively-selected music image 832, and the unselected music image 833 have the same display mode, and these images 831, 832, and 834 are marked (for example, the indicator image 835 and the cursor image 836 in FIG. 25). This also includes the case where the images can be distinguished from each other by adding an image.

  The already-selected music image 831 is an image indicating that the already-selected music has already been selected by the player. In the example of FIG. 25, the music selection images 83 for the music A, the music J, and the music D correspond to the already-selected music image 831. The tentatively selected music image 832 is an image indicating that the tentatively selected music image is a tentatively selected music piece that can be selected by a determination operation on the determination button 21B by the player. In the example of FIG. 25, the music selection image 83 for the music H corresponds to the provisionally selected music image 832. The unselected music image 833 is an image that is a music other than the already selected music and is an unselected music that has not been selected by the player. In the example of FIG. 25, the music selection images 83 for the music K, the music L, the music M, the music I, the music B, and the music C correspond to the unselected music images 833. However, as described later, an upper limit number (three in the present embodiment) is provided for the already-selected songs. It is processed not as a song but as an unselected song.

  In the music selection image 83, the temporarily selected music image 832 is changed by the player performing an operation on the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212. Note that details of the already-selected music image 831, the temporarily-selected music image 832, and the unselected music image 833, and details of an example of changing the temporarily-selected music image 832 by a player's operation on the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212 will be described later. I do.

  Note that FIG. 25 shows a case where the selected music image 831, the temporarily selected music image 832, and the non-selected music image 834 are simultaneously displayed as the music selection image 83 for convenience of description, but in the present embodiment, As described later, the non-selected music image 834 is not displayed in the music selection image 83 initially displayed on the symbol display unit 341 (see FIG. 26).

  These music images 831 to 833 (music selection images 83) are displayed in a display area 837 set on the left side of the symbol display unit 341. The display area 837 is set to, for example, １ ／ or less of the area of the music selection image display screen 82 of the symbol display unit 341, preferably １ ／ or less, more preferably １ ／ or less. Is set to the area of The display area 837 may be set in a part of the music selection image display screen 82, and does not necessarily have to be set on the left side of the music selection image display screen 82. It may be on the lower side or the like.

  By the way, as a conventional gaming machine, there is a gaming machine in which a music selection image is displayed on the entire or substantially entire area of a display screen. For example, there is an image in which a plurality of rectangular music selection images are displayed in a matrix over the entire area or substantially the entire area of the display screen. In such a conventional gaming machine, the open / close execution mode effect executed on the symbol display unit 341 cannot be visually recognized while the song selection image is displayed on the display screen, and the open / close execution mode effect performed while the song is selected. Can not enjoy.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the display area 837 is set to a part (the left side in the present embodiment) of the music selection image display screen 82. Therefore, in the gaming machine 10, even when the music selection image 83 is displayed, the player can visually recognize the open / close mode effect, and can enjoy the open / close execution mode effect even while the music is being selected. it can.

  In the display area 837, the already-selected music image 831, the tentatively-selected music image 832, and the unselected music image 833 are displayed vertically in this order. Specifically, in the music selection image 83, up to the third in the display area 837, the selected music image 831, the fourth is the tentatively selected music image 832, and the remaining six are the unselected music images 833. . In the music selection images 83 arranged in this manner, the tentatively selected music image 832 is displayed between the already-selected music image 831 and the unselected music image 833. Note that the music selection image 83 is not limited to the display mode in which the plurality of music selection images 83 are vertically arranged in the display area 837, but may be a display mode in which the music selection images 83 are horizontally, diagonally, or in a matrix.

  The already-selected music image 831 is an image indicating that the already-selected music has already been selected by the player. The already-selected music image 831 includes a temporarily selected music image 832 and an unselected music image depending on the color, size, shape, and the like of the outline portion such as a frame, the character portion, the character background portion, the effect around the outline portion, and the like. It is displayed so as to be distinguishable from the selected music image 833. In addition, the upper limit number is predetermined for the number of the selected music images 831 in the music selection image 83. In the present embodiment, the upper limit number of the selected music image 831 is three. The upper limit is not limited to three, and may be one, but is preferably selected from two or more. However, the upper limit number of the selected music images 831 is determined in consideration of the number of images 831 to 834 displayed as the music selection images 83, ease of selection when selecting the selected music based on the selected music images 831, and the like. In this case, it is preferable to select from the range of 2 to 5.

  The selected music image 831 is given a display order (music order). In the present embodiment, the display order is made higher in the order of the newest music selection date and time, and the already-selected tune having the higher display order is displayed closer to the tentatively-selected music image 832 in the initial music selection image 83. In the example of FIG. 25, the selected music images 831 corresponding to the selected music, that is, the music A, the music J, and the music D, are displayed in the display area 837 at the third to highest positions in the upper and lower rows of the music selection image 83. ing. In other words, the song selection date and time of song A, song J and song D of the plurality of songs are new in this order. In the present embodiment, the already-selected music image 831 is displayed in a predetermined area while the music selection image 83 is displayed. Specifically, the already-selected music image 831 is fixedly displayed at the third position from the top in the upper and lower rows of the music selection image 83, and is displayed even when the temporary selection image 832 described later is changed. The position of the selected music image 831 does not change. However, when the already-selected music piece is provisionally selected, the music selection image 83 corresponding to the temporarily-selected music piece is displayed as the temporarily-selected music image 832 instead of the already-selected music image 831 as described later (FIG. 27 (A) to FIG. 27 (C)).

  The display order of the selected music image 831 may be given based on a condition other than the selection date and time, for example, the selection frequency. The selection frequency is, for example, the cumulative number of selections, the number of selections in the latest predetermined number (for example, 10), and the selection rate in the latest predetermined number of times. In the following, “selection frequency” is used in the same meaning.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a predetermined mark (“good” in the example of FIG. 25) is attached to the side of the already-selected music image 831 to distinguish it from the tentatively-selected music image 832 and the unselected music image 833. Has been facilitated. However, the selected music image 831 only needs to be distinguishable from the tentatively selected music image 832 and the unselected music image 833, and the predetermined mark may be omitted, or the already selected music image 831 may be temporarily selected. The display form may be the same as that of the music image 832 or the unselected music image 833 and may be distinguished only by the predetermined mark, and there is no limitation on the display form.

  By the way, in the conventional gaming machine, the image for the tentatively selected music piece is distinguishable from other music pieces, but the image for the tentatively selected music piece is displayed in the same manner, including music pieces selected in the past. . On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the selected music image 831 for the selected music is distinguished from the unselected music image 832 for the unselected music, so that The already-selected tune having the suffix can be distinguished from the unselected tune. This makes it possible to easily find the already-selected music piece and to easily perform the operation of selecting the already-selected music piece. When the display position of the selected music image 831 is set to a predetermined area and the temporarily selected music image 832 is displayed below and adjacent to the already selected music image 831, the player selects the music selection image 83. In this case, the most recently selected music piece can be easily found out by selecting the most recently selected music piece, and the most recently selected music piece can be selected again by operating the selection determining section 21. Furthermore, the display order is given to the selected music pieces, and the music pieces are displayed in the initial music selection image 83 at positions closer to the tentatively selected music image 832 in the descending order of display order. Will not be. Therefore, for example, when the same music piece is repeatedly selected and the user wants to select a selected music piece other than the music piece, the player can easily find the selected music piece to be selected. Thereby, the operation burden on the player when selecting the previously selected music piece again is reduced.

  Further, as described later, in the present embodiment, it is possible to select a plurality of songs for a single jackpot game during a predetermined song selection valid period (for example, a period during which the opening and closing execution mode of the first R is executed). However, when a plurality of music selections are performed in one jackpot game, only the last selected music selected last is set as the already selected music (step S2813 of the selected music output processing in FIG. 41). . When the number of selected songs is less than the upper limit number, for example, when the number of selected songs is 1 or 2, the number of selected song images 831 corresponding to the number of selected songs is displayed. On the other hand, when the number of the selected music pieces is 0, or when the player has set not to display the selected music piece image 831 as described later (step S4013 of the music list display setting process in FIG. 63, or When the selected music image non-display setting flag is set to ON in step S4413 of the music list display setting history screen processing in FIG. 71), the selected music image 831 is not displayed. At this time, if the number of the selected music pieces is less than the upper limit number, the unselected music image 833 other than the non-selected music image 834 is displayed. Thus, even when the number of the selected music images 831 to be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 is less than the upper limit, the unselected music images 833 are displayed instead of the selected music images 831. The specified number of music selection images 83 can be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 without excess or shortage.

  The tentatively selected music image 832 is an image indicating that the tentatively selected music image is a tentatively selected music piece that can be selected by a determination operation on the determination button 21B by the player. In the example of FIG. 25, the tune H is the tentatively selected tune, and the tentatively selected tune image 832 can be distinguished from the already-selected tune image 831 and the unselected tune image 833. A predetermined mark (in the present embodiment, an indicator image 835 of the character “temporary”) is attached to the tentatively selected music image 832, and a cursor image 836 for emphasizing that it is the tentatively selected music image 832. Is surrounded by

  The temporarily selected music image 832 may be any type as long as it can be distinguished from the already-selected music image 831 and the unselected music image 833, and the predetermined mark may be omitted. The display mode may be the same as that of the music image 831 or the unselected music image 833, and only the predetermined mark may be used. There is no limitation on the display mode.

  Further, the temporarily selected music image 832 is changed in accordance with an operation performed by the player on the selection determining unit 21. In the present embodiment, when the selected music image 831 is displayed, a predetermined area, that is, the selected music image 831 is displayed at the third to highest positions in the upper and lower rows of the music selection image 83. Therefore, the manner of changing the temporarily selected music image 832 differs between the case where the already selected music is temporarily selected and the case where the unselected music is temporarily selected. Here, FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating an example of an initial display of the music selection image 83, and FIGS. 27A to 27C are diagrams illustrating a modification example of the temporarily selected music image 832 in the already-selected music. is there. FIGS. 26 and 27 (A) to 27 (C) show only the display area 837 of the music selection image display screen 82 of the symbol display section 341.

  As shown in FIG. 26, the user operates the lower selection button 212 when temporarily selecting music from unselected music. By doing so, the positions of the indicator image 835 and the cursor image 836 are kept as they are, and the unselected music image 833 is scrolled downward. In the example shown in FIG. 26, by operating the lower selection button 212, the tentatively selected music is changed in a loop of music P → music T → music S →... → music F → music E → music P. . In addition, when the desired unselected song is provisionally selected, by operating the determination button 21B, the unselected song can be output from the speaker 26 as the selected song.

  As shown in FIG. 26, in the music selection image 83 displayed on the symbol display unit 341 first, in the music loop when the music is temporarily selected from the unselected music, the non-selected music (non-selected image 834) Are located farthest from the initial temporarily selected music image 832 (initial temporarily selected music).

  On the other hand, when temporarily selecting a music piece from the already selected music pieces, the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212 is operated. Specifically, first, by operating the upper selection button 211 once in the state shown in FIG. 26, the indicator image 835 and the cursor image 836 are changed from the music selection image 83 for the music P as shown in FIG. The program moves to the music selection image 83 for the music A displayed immediately above the music P. Thereby, the music selection image 83 for the music P is changed from the temporarily selected music image 832 to the unselected music image 833, while the music selection image 83 for the music A is changed from the already selected music image 831 to the temporarily selected music image 832. Is done. Further, by performing an operation on the determination button 21B, it is possible to select the tentatively selected song A (the already-selected song).

  By operating the upper selection button 211 once in the state shown in FIG. 27A, the indicator image 835 and the cursor image 836 are changed from the music selection image 83 for the music A to the music J as shown in FIG. Move to the music selection image 83 for. Thereby, the music selection image 83 for music A is changed from the temporarily selected music image 832 to the already selected music image 831, while the music selection image 83 for music J is changed from the already selected music image 831 to the temporarily selected music image 832. Is done. Further, by performing an operation on the determination button 21B, it is possible to select a tentatively selected song J (selected song).

  Similarly, by operating the upper operation button 211 once in the state shown in FIG. 27 (B), the music selection image 83 for the music J is changed from the temporarily selected music image 832 to the music selection image as shown in FIG. 27 (C). While being changed to the image 831, the music selection image 83 for the music D is changed from the already selected music image 831 to the temporarily selected music image 832. Thus, by performing an operation on the enter button 21B, it is possible to select the tentatively selected music D (the already selected music). Even if the upper selection button 211 is operated from the state shown in FIG. 27C, the temporarily selected music image 832 is not changed, and the state where the music D is temporarily selected is maintained.

  On the other hand, by operating the lower operation button 212 once in the state shown in FIG. 27B or FIG. 27C, as shown in FIG. 27A or FIG. The cursor image 836 moves to the music selection image 83 corresponding to the music immediately below, and the tentatively selected music is changed. By operating the enter button 21B, the tentatively selected music A or music J is selected. It becomes possible to do.

  By operating the lower operation button 212 once in the state shown in FIG. 27 (A), the indicator image 835 and the cursor image 836 move to the music selection image 83 corresponding to the music P that is the unselected music immediately below. While moving, the tentatively selected song is changed. As a result, as described with reference to FIG. 26, by operating the lower selection button 212, a music piece is temporarily selected from the unselected music pieces, and by operating the determination button 21B, the unselected music piece is selected. It can be output from the speaker 26.

  By the way, as a conventional gaming machine, there is a gaming machine such as the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment in which a music to be output during a jackpot game can be selected from a plurality of music. The number of selectable songs in the jackpot game varies depending on the model, but some of them can select songs to be output during the special game from 20 or more songs. When the number of selectable songs is large, the range of song selection becomes large, so that not only can various songs be enjoyed, but also the possibility that a song that matches the taste of the player is included increases. Therefore, in gaming machines that allow users to select songs during a jackpot game, the player can listen to various songs and let the player find their favorite songs, thereby increasing the attention to the jackpot game and the interest in special games By doing so, the willingness to play can be improved.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine, the image for the tentatively selected music is displayed separately from the images for other tunes. However, the images for the non-selected songs that are not selected by the player in spite of being displayed are displayed without distinction from each other. This makes it difficult to find the target song if you want to repeatedly select the player's favorite song or want to listen to the previously selected song again, even if you can find the target song. By the time you are involved. The difficulty of finding such a target song increases as the number of selectable songs increases. There are also gaming machines in which a period during which a song output during a jackpot game can be selected (song selection valid period) is set. For example, there is a gaming machine in which the music selection validity period is limited to a time when an opening effect in a jackpot game or a first round of a round game (opening / closing execution mode) ends. In such a gaming machine, it is necessary to search for the target music within a limited period which is not so long, so that it becomes more difficult to find the target music. In addition, when the selection of the target music in the jackpot game is bothersome and difficult, there is a concern that the player may not perform the music selection in the jackpot game. In this, we will prepare a plurality of songs and let the player select a song and listen to various songs, and also let the player find the favorite song to improve the attention and interest in the jackpot game The purpose of improving the willingness to play is buried.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as the music selection image 83 for allowing the player to select a music, the already-selected music that has already been selected by the player is selected. The music image 831 is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 so as to be distinguishable from the unselected music image 833. As described above, since the selected music image 831 can be distinguished from the unselected music image 833, the player can select a previously selected music that has been selected before from the music selection image 83. , The selected music can be provisionally selected based on the selected music image 831 and selected. Specifically, the player operates the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212 of the selection deciding unit 21 while checking the position of the selected music image 831 in the music selection image 83, so that the selected music is selected. It can be temporarily selected and displayed as a temporarily selected music image 832. In this state, by operating the determination button 21B, the selected music can be output again from the speaker 26 as the selected music. Therefore, when the player wants to repeatedly select a favorite song or wants to listen to a previously selected song again, the player can easily find the selected song even if the number of selectable songs is large. Can be. In addition, it is possible to efficiently select the previously selected music piece and output the selected music piece from the speaker 26 with a small number of operations on the selection determining section 21.

  In the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the tentatively selected music image 832 is displayed between the selected music image 831 and the unselected music image 833 in the music selection image 83, and the temporarily selected music image 832 is displayed as the temporarily selected music image 832. 831 and the unselected image 833 are both displayed adjacent to each other. For this reason, the player changes the tentatively selected music image 832 in the music selection image 832 by operating the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212, thereby selecting the previously selected music that has been selected before and the previously selected music. Even when selecting any of the unselected songs that have not been performed, the target song can be provisionally selected with a small number of operations. As a result, the gaming machine 10 corresponds to various types of players, such as a player who tends to repeatedly select an already-selected music piece and a player who tends to select an unselected music piece. The target music can be selected with a small number of operations.

  Returning to FIG. 25, the unselected music image 833 is an image indicating that it is a music other than the already-selected music. In the example of FIG. 25, the music K, the music L, the music M, the music I, the music B, and the music C are unselected music. The unselected music image 833 is displayed so as to be distinguishable from the already selected music image 831 and the temporarily selected music image 832. The unselected music image 833 includes a non-selected music image 834 indicating that it is a non-selected music. The non-selected tune is a tune that has not been selected by the player even though it was initially displayed as the tentatively selected tune image 832 in the tune selection image 83. In the example of FIG. 25, the music I, the music B, and the music C are non-selected music. The non-selected music image 834 includes, for example, an outline portion such as a frame, a character portion, a character background portion, a color, a pattern, and a pattern, and a color, a size, and a shape of an effect around the outline portion. The non-selected music image 834 is displayed so as to be distinguishable. In the present embodiment, a predetermined mark (in this embodiment, the character “dislike”) is attached to the side of the non-selected music image 834, so that it is easy to distinguish the non-selected music image 834. However, the non-selected music image 834 only needs to be distinguishable, and the predetermined mark may be omitted, or the image may be distinguished only by the predetermined mark. Absent.

  In addition, an upper limit number is predetermined for the number of non-selected music images 834 displayed in the music selection image 83. In the present embodiment, the upper limit number of the non-selected music images 834 displayed in the music selection image 83 is three. Note that the upper limit number of the non-selected music images 834 displayed in the music selection image 83 may be other than 3 as in the case of the already-selected music image 831. When the number of unselected songs is less than the upper limit number, for example, when the number of unselected songs is 1 or 2, the number of unselected song images 834 corresponding to the number of unselected songs is displayed. On the other hand, when the number of non-selected music pieces is 0, or when the player has set not to display the non-selected music piece image 834 as described later (step S4013 of the music list display setting process in FIG. 63, or When the non-selected music image non-display setting flag is set to ON in step S4413 of the music list display setting history screen processing in FIG. 71), the non-selected music image 834 is not displayed. If the number of unselected songs is less than the upper limit when displaying the unselected song images 834, the unselected song images 833 other than the unselected song images 834 are displayed for the shortage. As described above, even when the number of the non-selected music images 834 to be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 is less than the upper limit, the non-selected music images other than the non-selected music image 834 are used instead of the non-selected music images 834. By displaying the image 833, the specified number of music selection images 83 can be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 without excess or shortage.

  The selection deciding section image 84 is an image imitating the selection deciding section 21, and indicates that the temporarily selected music can be changed by operating the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212. The operation explanation image 85 indicates that the temporarily selected music can be changed by operating the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212, and that the temporarily selected music can be determined as the music to be output from the speaker 26 by operating the determination button 21B. Things. The lyrics telop image 86 displays the lyrics of the tentatively selected tune output from the speaker 26 or the tune selected by the player in accordance with the output of the tune. However, the selection determination section image 84, the operation explanation image 85, and the lyrics telop image 86 are not essential images, and all or some of them may be omitted.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, an example has been described in which music is selected using the upper selection button 211 and the lower selection button 212. In addition to the upper selection button 211 and the lower selection button 212, a left selection button 213 and a right selection button The music may be selected using the 214. For example, the upper selection button 211 and the lower selection button 212 are used to select music from unselected music, and the left selection button 213 and right selection button 214 are used to select music from already selected music. Is also good. In this case, for example, by operating the upper selection button 211, the positions of the indicator image 835 and the cursor image 836 are kept as they are, the unselected music image 833 is scrolled upward, and by operating the lower selection button 212, The selected music image 833 is scrolled downward, and the music selection image 83 moved to the position of the indicator image 835 and the cursor image 836 is changed from the unselected music image 833 to the temporarily selected music image 832. On the other hand, when the left selection button 213 or the right selection button 214 is operated, the indicator image 835 and the cursor image 836 move upward or downward, and the music selection image 83 for the already-selected music becomes the temporary selection music image 832. You may make it be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the display position of the selected music image 831 is determined in advance. However, as shown in FIG. 28, for example, the operation of the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212 causes the selected music image 831 to be unselected. The selected music image 833 may be scrolled in the upward direction A1 or the downward direction A2. In this way, compared to the case where the temporarily selected music is changed by the method described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27, the selected music and the unselected music can be used without using the upper selection button 211 and the lower selection button 212 properly. Since the music can be provisionally selected from any of the selected music, the operability in temporarily selecting the music is improved. As shown in FIG. 28, even when the selected music image 831 is scrolled in the upward direction A1 or the downward direction A2 together with the unselected music image 833 by operating the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212, first, In the music selection image 83 displayed on the symbol display section 341, it is preferable that the non-selected music (non-selected image 834) is arranged at a position farthest from the initial provisionally selected music image 832 (initial provisionally selected music).

<Steps S2301 and S2302>
Returning to the description of FIG. 24, in step S2301, the MPU 51 creates a selected music list to display the music selection image 83. The MPU 51 also creates a non-selected music list (step S2302). The already-selected music list and the non-selected music list are referred to when an initial arrangement order data table (see FIG. 31) for the music selection image 83 described later is created, and are stored in, for example, the RAM 512 shown in FIG. It can be created from the music selection counter data table.

  Here, FIG. 29 is an example of a song selection counter data table for a plurality of songs that can be output from the speaker 26 in a jackpot game effect. As shown in FIG. 29, the music selection counter data table includes a selection count counter, history data on a selected music, and history data on an unselected music. In the music selection counter data table, the music for which the selected flag is set to off is data relating to the unselected music, and the data for which the non-selection flag is set to on is the non-selected music. It is data about. The music selection counter data table is updated by a music selection counter data update process of FIG. 39 described later. Details regarding updating of the music selection counter data table will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  The selection number counter is selected by the player as the music to be output from the speaker 26 in the jackpot game effect from a predetermined starting point (for example, when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on) to the present, for the 20 music pieces of the music pieces A to T. It shows the number of selections made. In the present embodiment, the music rank of the selected music piece is determined based on the selection date and time. However, when the music rank of the selected music piece is determined by the selection frequency, the music rank is determined with reference to the selection frequency counter. .

  The history data relating to the selected music includes music ranking data for each of the music A to music T and a selected flag.

  The music piece ranking data specifies the display position of the selected music piece image 831. The music piece ranking data is assigned a younger rank in order of the date and time of the most recently selected music piece, and the display rank is made higher. Specifically, the display order of the selected songs is assigned the first to third ranks for the top three songs, and the remaining songs are not ranked. In the table shown in FIG. 29, “1”, “2”, or “3” is described according to the display order, and “0” is shown when there is no order. That is, the display order of the already-selected music pieces is such that the first place is the music piece A, the second place is the music piece J, the third place is the music piece D, and the remaining pieces of music other than the music pieces A, J and D have no rank. If there is no song corresponding to the top three songs (in a state where no song is selected), all the songs are not ranked. If the top three songs are two songs, only the first and second places are determined without determining the third place. Similarly, if the top three songs are one song, Only the first place is determined without determining the second and third places.

  The already-selected flag is a flag indicating whether or not to be displayed as the already-selected music image 831 in the music selection image 83. The MPU 51 determines that one of the first to third display ranks is assigned in the music selection counter data update processing of FIG. It is determined that the already-selected flag is set to off for a song having no. Then, the MPU 51 refers to the history data on the selected music in the music selection counter data table, and according to the music ranking data, displays the selected music image 831 in the music selection image 83 as shown in FIG. Create a list of selected songs.

  On the other hand, the history data relating to the non-selected music pieces includes music ranking data and non-selection flags for each of the music pieces A to T.

  The music rank data specifies the display position of the non-selected music image 834, and the rank is assigned in ascending order of date and time that was not selected most recently, and the display rank is increased. As the display order of the non-selected songs, the first to third ranks are assigned to the top three songs, and the remaining songs are not ranked. In the table shown in FIG. 29, the display order of the non-selected songs is the song C at the first place, the song B at the second place, the song I at the third place, and the remaining songs other than the song C, the song B, and the song I. Has no ranking. If there is no song corresponding to the top three songs, all songs are ranked without. If the top three songs are two songs, only the first and second places are determined without determining the third place. Similarly, if the top three songs are one song, Only the first place is determined without determining the second and third places.

  The non-selection flag is a flag indicating whether or not to be displayed as the non-selected music image 834 on the music selection image 83. The MPU 51 determines that one of the first to third display ranks is assigned in the music selection counter data update processing of FIG. 39 described later, and that the non-selection flag is set to ON for the music, and the display rank is determined. It is determined that the already-selected flag is set to off for a song having no. Then, the MPU 51 refers to the history data relating to the non-selected music in the music selection counter data table, and according to the music ranking data, displays it as the non-selected music image 834 in the music selection image 83 as shown in FIG. Create a non-selected song list.

  Note that the MPU 51 may assign younger rankings to the selection data (for example, the cumulative number of selections or the selection rate at a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) from the latest) in the history data regarding the selected music and the non-selected music. The display order may not be limited to three songs as in the illustrated example, but may be another number. For example, priorities may be assigned to all songs.

<Step S2303>
Returning to the description of FIG. 24, in step S2303, the MPU 51 determines the tentatively selected tune (initial tentatively selected tune) when the tune selection image 83 is first displayed on the symbol display unit 341 after the transition to the jackpot game. Execute the selected music determination process. Details of the initial provisionally selected music piece determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Steps S2304 and S2305>
When the initial provisionally selected music piece determination processing in step S2303 has been completed, the MPU 51 stores the initial provisionally selected music piece determined in step S2303 in the RAM 512 (step S2304), and executes an initial music selection image display processing (step S2305). Note that the initially provisionally selected music stored in step S2304 is referred to when it is determined whether or not the initially provisionally selected music has been selected in step S3202 in the music selection counter data updating process of FIG. 50 described below. Further, in the initial music selection image display processing in step S2305, the MPU 51 determines an initial arrangement for a plurality of music pieces and transmits initial arrangement order data relating to the initial arrangement to the symbol display unit 341. The initial arrangement is determined based on, for example, the already-selected music list table shown in FIG. 30A, the non-selected music list table shown in FIG. 30B, and the initial provisionally selected music determined in step S2303 in FIG. You.

  Here, FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating an example of an initial arrangement order data table regarding the initial arrangement order for a plurality of songs for displaying the song selection image 83, and FIG. 32 is an example of the initial arrangement of the song selection image 83. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 31, the initial array order data table is a table of the initial array order data, and includes array order data relating to the initial array order and additional data.

  The arrangement order data defines the initial arrangement order for a plurality of music pieces A to T. The initial arrangement order is from the first place to the twentieth place, and the first to third places are assigned to the already-selected music pieces, and the eleventh to thirteenth places are assigned to the non-selected music pieces. Specifically, the first to third places in the initial arrangement order are respectively assigned to the third, second, and first places in the already-selected music list order in the already-selected music list table shown in FIG. . According to the order of the already-selected music list table shown in FIG. 30A, music D, music J, and music A are respectively assigned to the first to third places of the initial arrangement order. Also, the eleventh to thirteenth ranks of the initial arrangement rank are respectively assigned to the first, second, and third ranks of the non-selected music ranking in the non-selected music list table shown in FIG. According to the order of the non-selected music list table shown in FIG. 30B, the music I, the music B, and the music C are respectively assigned to the eleventh to thirteenth ranks of the initial arrangement order. In addition, the fourth place of the initial arrangement order is assigned to the tentatively selected music piece. The example illustrated in FIG. 31 indicates that the music piece P has been determined as the tentatively selected music piece in step S2303 in FIG. The 5th to 10th and 14th to 20th places of the initial arrangement order are assigned to unselected songs other than the non-selected songs. Then, unselected songs other than the non-selected songs are assigned in ascending order of the song number to the younger one of the fifth to tenth and the fourteenth to twentieth. In the example shown in FIG. 31, the song E is in the fifth place in the song ranking, the song F is in the sixth place in the song rank, the song G is in the seventh place in the song rank, the song H is in the eighth place in the song rank, and the song K is the fifth place in the song rank. The tune 9 is in the ninth place, the tune L is in the 10th place in the tune rank, the tune M is in the 14th place in the tune rank, the tune N is in the 15th place in the tune rank, the tune O is the 16th place in the tune rank, and the tune Q is The song R is assigned to the song ranking 17th, the song R is assigned to the song ranking 18th, the song S is assigned to the song ranking 19th, and the song T is assigned to the song ranking 20th.

  On the other hand, the additional data includes music type data indicating whether the music is a selected music, a tentatively selected music, a non-selected music, and an unselected music other than the non-selected music, and a non-display setting for the selected music and the non-selected music. Includes data indicating whether the flag is set to ON or OFF. Here, the non-display setting flags for the selected music piece and the non-selected music piece are displayed in the same manner as the unselected music piece image 833 other than the non-selected music piece image 834 for each of the selected music piece image 831 and the non-selected music piece image 834. This is a flag that is set to ON when display is set by the player. In the present embodiment, the non-display setting flag is a non-selected music image, and the selected music image non-display setting flag that displays the selected music image 831 in the same display mode as the unselected music image 833. A non-selected music image non-display setting flag that is displayed in the same display manner as the unselected music image 833 other than 834 is included. The selected music image non-display setting flag and the non-selected music image non-display setting flag are set in step S4013 of the music list display setting screen processing shown in FIG. 63 described later or in step S4413 of the music list display setting history screen processing shown in FIG. Is set to on.

  In the example of FIG. 31, based on the additional data, the MPU 51 determines that the music A, the music J, and the music D are already selected music, that the non-display flag for the already selected music is set to off, that the music M, It is possible to specify that the music I and the music B are non-selected music, that the non-display flag for the already-selected music is set to off, and that the music P is a temporarily selected music.

  Then, according to the initial arrangement order shown in FIG. 31, the initial arrangement for a plurality of music pieces is in the order shown in FIG. 32, and on the music selection image display screen 82 of the symbol display section 341 as shown in FIG. 26 and FIG. Displayed in a simple manner. In the present embodiment, since the upper limit number of the music selection images 83 displayed on the music selection image display screen 82 is 10, the music selection images 83 for the first to tenth music in the initial arrangement order are displayed. You. Since the non-display flag for the selected music piece is set to off, the music selection image 83 is displayed as including the selected music image 831. The unselected songs are initially arranged at the farthest position from the tentatively selected song because the initial arrangement order is assigned from the 11th to the 13th. That is, when creating the initial arrangement order data, the MPU 51 arranges the non-selected songs at the position where the minimum number of operations on the selection button 21A necessary for making the non-selected songs the temporarily selected songs is the largest. Further, the non-selected music image 834 corresponding to the non-selected music is not displayed when the music selection image 83 is first displayed on the symbol display unit 341, and the lower selection button 212 is operated by the player and the unselected music is not displayed. The image 833 is displayed by scrolling.

  In the present embodiment, the selected songs are assigned to the first to third places of the initial arrangement order, and the non-selected songs are assigned to the 11th to 13th positions of the initial arrangement order. It is not necessary to group the number of selected songs in one place, and similarly, it is not necessary to group the upper limit number of non-selected songs in one place. For example, as shown in FIG. , And the upper limit number of unselected songs may be discretely assigned. In the example shown in FIG. 34, a plurality of songs are arranged with their song numbers unchanged, and the initial arrangement of the plurality of songs is determined such that the initial arrangement order of the song P determined as the tentatively selected song is fourth. Have been.

<Step S2306>
Returning to the description of FIG. 24, in step S2306, the MPU 51 sets the music selection processing flag to ON, and ends the music selection image display processing. For example, the music selection processing flag is referred to when determining whether to continue the music selection processing (step S2219 in the big hit game rendering processing in FIG. 23) and whether the music selection validity period has elapsed (FIG. 23). Step S2608 in the music selection process of No. 39).

[Initial tentative selection music determination processing]
Here, FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the initial provisionally selected song determination processing (step S2303 in FIG. 24). In the initial tentatively selected music piece determination process, the initial tentatively selected music piece corresponding to the initial tentatively selected music piece image 832 to be displayed first as the tentatively selected music piece image 832 of the music selection image 83 is determined based on the value obtained from the tentatively selected music piece lottery counter. decide.

<Steps S2401 and S2402>
The MPU 51 acquires the value of the initial provisionally selected music lottery counter to select the initial provisionally selected music piece (step S2401), and refers to the provisionally selected music lottery table and corresponds to the value of the provisionally selected music lottery counter acquired in step S2401. The music to be performed is provisionally determined as the initial provisionally selected music (step S2402).

  FIG. 36 is an example of the tentatively selected music lottery table. As shown in FIG. 36, the provisionally selected music lottery table associates the values of the provisionally selected music lottery counters with the music pieces A to T. For example, when the value of the acquired initial provisionally selected song lottery counter is “0”, the MPU 51 tentatively determines the music A as the initial provisionally selected song, and the acquired value of the obtained initial provisionally selected song lottery counter is “88”. In the case of, the music I is provisionally determined as the initial provisionally selected music, and if the acquired value of the initial provisionally selected music lottery counter is “155”, the music P is provisionally determined as the initial provisionally selected music.

<Steps S2403 and S2404>
Returning to the description of FIG. 35, in step S2403, the MPU 51 determines whether the music provisionally determined as the initial temporarily selected music is a selected music or a non-selected music (disliked music), that is, whether the music is an unselected music. If the tentatively determined tune is a selected tune or a non-selected tune (if it is not an unselected tune) (step S2403: Yes), the initial tentatively selected tune is determined without determining the initial tentatively selected tune. The determination processing ends. That is, in the next sub-timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 15), the MPU 51 executes the initial provisionally selected music piece determination processing again and tries to determine the initial provisionally selected music piece. On the other hand, if the temporarily determined music is not a selected music or a non-selected music (unselected music) (step S2403: No), the MPU 51 determines the music temporarily determined in step S2402 as the initial temporarily selected music. Then (step S2404), the initial provisionally selected song determination processing ends. For example, whether or not the music is a selected music or a non-selected music can be determined by referring to a music selection counter data table (see FIG. 29) and whether or not the selected flag or the non-selection flag is set to ON. In the example of FIG. 29, when the music provisionally determined by the lottery in step S2402 is the music A, the music D, or the music J, it is determined that the music is the selected music, and the music temporarily determined is the music B, the music If it is C or music I, it is determined to be a non-selected music. By this, until the music other than the selected music (music A, music D, and music J) and the non-selected music (music B, music C, and music I) are determined as the initial tentatively selected music (step S2403: No), The initial provisionally selected song determination processing is repeatedly performed.

  By the way, the already-selected music is a music that the player has previously listened to by selection by the player, and the non-selected music is a music that the player has previously listened to by being output as an initial temporarily selected music. It is. When the initial tentatively selected music piece is determined from the already-selected music piece or the non-selected music piece, the music piece that the player has listened to before is output, so that the opportunity for the player to listen to the unselected music piece is reduced. In addition, the non-selected music is a music that the player has not previously selected, and if such a music is output again as the initial tentatively selected music, the player may have a feeling of disgust, and the jackpot game may be sufficiently performed. Can not entertain.

  In contrast, in step S2403, a lottery of the initial provisionally selected music is performed until a music other than the already-selected music and the non-selected music is selected. Therefore, even when the player finally selects a music piece from the already selected music piece, it is possible for the player to listen to the unselected music piece in the process up to that point, and the goodness of the unselected music piece to the player. Can give an opportunity to communicate. In addition, the player is bothered by the fact that a song that was previously selected as a tentatively selected song in step S2404 but was not selected by the player is selected again in step S2404 and displayed as the tentatively selected song image 832. You will be free from it.

  In the case where non-display setting described later is performed by the player on the selected music image 831 (step S4013 in the music list display setting screen processing in FIG. 63 or step S4413 in the music list display setting history screen processing in FIG. 71). , The non-display setting flag is set to ON), the music piece including the already-selected music piece may be selected as the initial provisionally selected music piece. Similarly, when the non-display setting is made by the player for the non-selected music image 834, the music including the non-selected music may be selected as the initial temporarily selected music. That is, the selected music image 831 and the non-selected music image 834 may not be selected as the initial tentatively selected music only when those images 831 and 834 are displayed as the music selection image 83. .

[Initial temporary selection music output processing]
Here, FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the initial provisionally selected music piece output processing (step S2210 in FIG. 23). In the initial provisionally selected music output process, when the temporarily selected music image 832 is first displayed on the symbol display unit 341 after the transition to the jackpot game, the initial provisionally selected music corresponding to the initial provisionally selected music image 832 is output from the speaker 26. Processing. In this initial tentatively selected tune output process, the initially tentatively selected tune is normally output from the speaker 26 in a melody pattern of default settings. The melody pattern defines an output start portion when music is output from the speaker 26.

  Here, FIG. 38 is a diagram illustrating an example of a melody pattern table in which default settings of melody patterns are determined for each of a plurality of songs (songs A to T) for the provisionally selected song and the selected song. In the example of the melody pattern table shown in FIG. 38, a melody pattern 1 and a melody pattern 2 are defined as melody patterns. In the melody pattern 1, the basic unit is “A melody (starting singing part) → B melody → chorus part”, the output of music starts from the A melody (starting singing part), and the basic unit is repeatedly output. That is, in the case of melody pattern 1, "A melody (starting singing part) → B melody → chorus part → A melody (starting singing part) → B melody → chorus part → A melody (starting singing part) → ..." Becomes It should be noted that the basic unit of the melody pattern 1 may further include an intro part (prelude part), that is, “intro part (prelude part) → A melody (starting singing part) → B melody → chorus part”. Can be In this case, the output start of the melody pattern 1 is not the A melody (song start portion) but the intro portion. The melody pattern 2 has a basic unit of “chorus portion → A melody (starting singing portion) → B melody”, the output of music starts from the chorus portion, and the basic unit is repeatedly output as in the melody pattern 1. In the tentatively-selected tune including the initial tentatively-selected tune, the default setting of the melody pattern is such that all of the tunes A to T are set to the melody pattern 2, that is, the output start from the chorus portion. In the tentatively selected tune, the melody pattern 2 is the default setting for all of the tunes A to T, but the melody pattern 1 may be the default setting for some or all of the tunes. The default setting of the melody pattern of the selected music will be described later in the selected music output process of FIG.

  In the present embodiment, a melody pattern different from the default setting can be set by the player as described later with respect to the output of the temporarily selected music including the initial temporarily selected music (the melody pattern setting screen processing in FIG. 61). Or the melody pattern setting history screen processing in FIG. 69), when a melody pattern different from the default setting is set by the player, the initial provisionally selected music is output from the speaker 26 in the melody pattern set by the player. You.

  Further, in the initial tentatively selected music output process, when the promotion effect flag is set to ON (when the promotion effect is scheduled to be executed in the big hit game effect), a melody pattern is randomly selected. May cause inconsistency in the melody pattern of the initial tentatively selected song. For example, if the melody pattern is set to the default, the output start portion of the initial temporarily selected song is a rust portion, and if the promotion effect flag is set to ON, the output start of the initial temporarily selected song is started. The part may be a part different from the chorus part, for example, a music start part (intro part (prelude part) or A melody part (singing start part)). Note that randomly selecting a melody pattern is equivalent to performing a contradictory output lottery (step S2804 of the selected music output process in FIG. 41 described later).

  When the output contradiction (contradiction of the melody pattern) of the output start portion of the initial provisionally selected song occurs, the promotion effect is executed, that is, the result of the jackpot lottery is output as the initial provisionally selected song. It is determined that the result is more advantageous for the player than the result suggested before. Therefore, at the time when the output contradiction (contradiction of the melody pattern) of the output start portion of the initial provisionally selected music piece occurs, for example, the current gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the 5R normal jackpot gaming state. It can be known that the game state is any of the gaming state and the 16R probability variable jackpot game state, or that the 16R probability variable jackpot game state is more advantageous to the player than the 5R probability variable jackpot game state.

  By the way, there is no conventional gaming machine that causes inconsistency in the melody pattern when the initial provisionally selected music is output. Therefore, the conventional gaming machine cannot make the player interested in the effect of outputting the initial provisionally selected music. On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to grasp in advance that the promotion effect will be executed by the fixed effect in which the melody pattern of the initial provisionally selected music piece has a contradiction. Therefore, the player can check whether the fixed effect is executed by paying attention to the melody pattern of the initial tentatively selected music, and even if the effect is not interested in the player with the conventional gaming machine, Since the effect can be noticed, the player can enjoy the jackpot game effect. On the other hand, whether or not a melody pattern contradiction occurs is determined by randomly selecting a melody pattern. Therefore, even when no melody pattern contradiction occurs, there is a possibility that a promotion effect is executed. Therefore, even if there is no inconsistency in the melody pattern of the initial tentatively selected song, the promotion effect may be performed after the temporarily selected song is output, and thus the player performs the promotion effect after outputting the temporarily selected song. You can enjoy the jackpot game while expecting that.

  The initial provisionally selected music piece output processing having such technical significance will be specifically described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S2501>
The MPU 51 determines whether or not the promotion effect flag is set to ON (step S2501). Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether any one of the first promotion effect flag, the second promotion effect flag, and the third promotion effect flag set to ON in step S2003 of FIG. 19 is set to ON. I do. If the promotion effect flag is set to ON (step S2501: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2507, and if the promotion effect flag is set to OFF (step S2501: No), the MPU 51 executes the process. The process moves to S2502.

<Steps S2502 to S2506>
If the promotion effect flag is set to off (step S2501: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the tentatively selected music melody pattern setting flag set in step S3913 in FIG. 61 or S4313 in FIG. 69 is set to on. (Step S2502).

  Here, when the tentatively-selected tune melody pattern setting flag is off (step S2502: No), that is, when the melody pattern is not set by the player, the MPU 51 sets the default melody pattern 2 for the tentatively-selected song. (Refer to FIG. 38) (step S2503), the speaker 26 outputs the tentatively-selected tune from the chorus portion (step S2504), and ends the tentatively-selected tune output processing.

  On the other hand, when the tentatively selected melody pattern flag is on (step S2502: Yes), that is, when the melody pattern is set by the player, the MPU 51 determines the melody pattern 1 ( 38 is selected (step S2505), and the speaker 26 is caused to output the initial tentatively selected tune from the melody (starting singing) (step S2506), and the initial tentatively selected tune output process ends.

<Step S2507>
If the promotion effect flag is set to ON (step S2501: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the melody pattern from a plurality of predetermined melody patterns (two in this embodiment) for outputting the initial provisionally selected music from the speaker 26. Are randomly selected (step S2507). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether a melody pattern (temporary output start portion) of the melody pattern of the tentatively selected music is different from the default melody pattern by the player when the promotion effect is scheduled to be performed. Is determined by random lottery of the melody pattern regardless of whether or not is set. Thereby, the MPU 51 can generate a contradiction in the melody pattern (output start portion) when the promotion effect is scheduled to be performed.

<Step S2508>
In step S2508, the MPU 51 determines whether the melody pattern of the initial provisionally selected music piece determined in step S2507 is the melody pattern 1. When the melody pattern 1 is selected (Step S2508: Yes), the MPU 51 causes the speaker 26 to output the initial provisionally selected music piece from the A melody (starting singing part) (Step S2506), and performs the initial provisionally selected music piece output process. finish. On the other hand, when the melody pattern 2 is selected (step S2508: No), the MPU 51 causes the speaker 26 to output the initial provisionally selected music from the chorus portion (step S2504), and ends the initial provisionally selected music output processing.

  In the initial provisionally selected music piece output process of FIG. 37, the melody pattern is randomly selected (step S2507) on condition that the promotion effect flag is set to ON (step S2501: Yes). Instead of selecting a pattern at random, whether output contradiction (contradiction of the melody pattern) of the output start portion of the initial tentatively selected tune of the melody pattern is performed as in step S2804 in the selected tune output process of FIG. 41 described later. May be performed.

[Song selection process]
Here, FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the music selection processing (step S2220 in FIG. 23). In the music selection processing, the player selects a music to be output in the jackpot game, and executes processing such as output of the selected music when the music is selected by the player.

<Step S2601>
In step S2601, the MPU 51 determines whether the upper selection button 211 has been operated based on the upper selection button operation data (see FIG. 18B).

  The MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2602 when the upper selection button 211 has been operated (step S2601: Yes), and shifts the processing to step S2603 when the upper selection button 211 has not been operated (step S2601: No). I do.

<Step S2602>
In step S2602, the MPU 51 executes a cursor movement display process of moving the cursor image 836 indicating the temporarily selected music piece upward. For example, when the upper selection button 211 is operated in the initial music selection image 83 shown in FIG. 26, as shown in FIG. To the next higher music A. Thereby, the music selection image 83 for the music A is changed from the already-selected music image 831 to the temporarily selected music image 832. Upon ending the cursor movement display processing, the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2605.

<Step S2603>
In step S2603, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the lower selection button 212 has been operated based on the lower selection button operation data (see FIG. 18C).

  If the lower selection button 212 has been operated (step S2603: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2604. If the lower selection button 212 has not been operated (step S2603: NO), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2606. I do.

<Step S2604>
In step S2604, the MPU 51 executes an unselected music image movement display process of moving the unselected music image 833 downward. For example, when the lower selection button 212 is operated in the music selection image 83 shown in FIG. 26, the MPU 51 moves the unselected music images 833 for the music E, the music F, the music G, the music H, and the music K downward. . At this time, while the unselected music image 833 for the music L is deleted, the music selection image 83 for the music T is newly displayed as the temporarily selected music image 832, so that the temporarily selected music is changed from the music P to the music T. Be changed.

  As described above, the player can change the tentatively selected music piece to the already selected music piece by operating the upper selection button 211, and can select the temporarily selected music piece from the unselected music pieces by operating the lower selection button 212. Therefore, as described above, the player changes the tentatively selected music image 832 in the music selection image 83 by operating the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212, thereby selecting the previously selected music that has been selected before. , And unselected songs that have never been selected before, the target song can be provisionally selected with a small number of operations.

<Step S2605>
In step S2605, the MPU 51 executes a temporarily selected song output process for outputting the temporarily selected song from the speaker 26, and ends the song selection process. The details of the temporarily selected music output process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S2606>
In step S2606, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the enter button 21B has been operated based on the enter button operation data (see FIG. 18F). Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the operation on the determination button 21B has been started based on whether or not the second determination operation pattern flag is set to ON, and determines whether or not the determination button 21B has been operated. to decide. When the determination button 21B is operated (Step S2606: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to Step S2607, and when the determination button 21B is not operated (Step S2606: No), the processing shifts to Step S2610.

<Steps S2607 to S2609>
When the determination button 21B is operated (Step S2606: Yes), the MPU 51 adds 1 to the determination operation counter (Step S2607). The determination operation counter determines whether or not it is the first music determination in the song selection effective period of the jackpot game (for example, the period during which the first R opening / closing execution mode is executed) in step S2802 in the selected music output process of FIG. 41 described below. Is referred to when judging. Further, the MPU 51 executes a selected music output process for outputting the music selected by the player from the speaker 26 (step S2608), and executes a music selection button effect in response to an operation on the determination button 21B at the time of selection. The processing is executed (step S2609). The details of the selected music output process will be described later with reference to FIG. Details of the music selection button effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S2610>
In step S2610, the MPU 51 determines whether the music selection valid period has elapsed. When the music selection effective period has elapsed (step S2610: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2611. On the other hand, when the music selection valid period has not elapsed (step S2610: No), the MPU 51 ends the music selection processing. That is, until the music selection validity period elapses, the music selection processing flag set to on in step S2306 in the music selection image display processing of FIG. 24 is not set to off (step S2612). During the period, the determination of the presence or absence of an operation on the determination button 21B in step S2606 is repeatedly performed. In other words, it is possible to select a song a plurality of times (change the selected song) during the song selection valid period. In addition, during the music selection valid period, since the selection of the music is made effective by the operation on the determination button 21B, the music selection button production (the production of the expectation degree suggestion (the suggestion production 1 to the suggestion production 1) is performed by the music selection button production process of FIG. 8), it is also a period during which the certain variation fixed effect (fixed effect 1 to fixed effect 4) and the reserved extended house fixed effect (fixed effect 2 and fixed effect 4) can be executed. That is, in the present embodiment, the execution timing of the expectation degree suggesting effect, the probable change determining effect, and the holding extended guesthouse determining effect are limited to within the music selection validity period. In this way, by restricting the execution timing of the music selection button effect, it is possible to prevent the determination button 21B from being operated unnecessarily to confirm whether the music selection button effect is to be executed.

<Steps S2611 and S2612>
When the music selection validity period has elapsed (step S2610: Yes), the MPU 51 performs a music selection counter data update process for updating data based on the music selection by the player in order to display the already selected music image 831 in the music selection image 83. At the same time (step S2611), the music selection processing flag is set to off (step S2612), and the music selection processing ends. The details of the music selection counter data updating process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Temporary selection music output processing]
FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the temporarily selected music piece output process (step S2605 in FIG. 39). In the temporarily selected music output processing, when the temporarily selected music is changed by the player operating the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212, the temporarily selected music is output from the speaker 26. In this temporarily selected music output process, the temporarily selected music is normally output from the speaker 26 in the melody pattern of the default setting. As shown in FIG. 38, the melody pattern defines an output start portion when the tentatively selected music is output from the speaker 26 as described above (see FIG. 38), and differs from the default melody depending on the player. A pattern can be set (melody pattern setting screen processing in FIG. 61 or melody pattern setting history screen processing in FIG. 69). When a melody pattern different from the default setting is set by the player, the initial temporarily selected music is output from the speaker 26 in the melody pattern set by the player.

  Furthermore, when the promotion effect flag is set to ON (the promotion effect is scheduled to be executed in the jackpot game effect) and the tentatively selected song is an unselected song, a melody pattern is randomly selected. Therefore, inconsistency may occur with respect to the melody pattern. For example, if the melody pattern is set to the default and the output start portion of the temporarily selected song is a rust portion, the promotion effect flag is set to ON, and if the temporarily selected song is an unselected song, The output start portion of the tentatively selected song may be a portion different from the chorus portion, for example, a song start portion (intro portion (prelude portion) or A melody portion (singing start portion)). Note that randomly selecting a melody pattern is equivalent to performing a contradictory output lottery (step S2803 of the selected music output process in FIG. 41 described later).

  When the output contradiction (contradiction of the melody pattern) of the output start portion of the tentatively selected song occurs, the promotion effect is executed, that is, the jackpot lottery result is output before the tentatively selected song is output. It is determined that the result is more advantageous for the player than the suggested result. Therefore, when the output contradiction (inconsistency of the melody pattern) of the output start portion of the provisionally selected music piece occurs, for example, the current game state is more advantageous to the player than the 5R normal jackpot game state. It is possible to know that the state is any one of the state and the 16R probability variable jackpot game state, or that the 16R probability variable jackpot game state is more advantageous to the player than the 5R probability variable jackpot game state.

  By the way, there is no conventional gaming machine that causes inconsistency in the melody pattern when the tentatively selected music is output. For this reason, the conventional gaming machine has not been able to give the player sufficient interest in the act of temporarily selecting a music or the effect of outputting the temporarily selected music, and as a result, Sometimes the song is not changed from the initial tentatively selected song.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to grasp in advance that the promotion effect will be executed by the fixed effect in which the melody pattern of the tentatively selected music piece causes inconsistency. Therefore, the player performs an act of temporarily selecting a song, and at that time, can check whether the finalized performance is performed by paying attention to the melody pattern of the temporarily selected song, so that the player can fully enjoy the conventional game machine. The act of provisionally selecting a song that could not be performed can be sufficiently enjoyed. In addition, even if the effect is not interested in the player in the conventional gaming machine, the effect can be noticed, so that the player can fully enjoy the jackpot game. Also, by generating an inconsistency in the melody pattern on the condition that the temporarily selected music is an unselected music, the player is motivated to actively perform the act of temporarily selecting the music, and to the player An unselected song can be positively temporarily selected. Thereby, even when the player finally selects a music piece from the already selected music piece, it is possible to motivate the player to listen to the unselected music piece in the process up to that point, and to give the player An opportunity to convey the goodness of unselected songs can be secured.

  The temporarily selected music output processing having such a technical significance will be specifically described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S2701>
In step S2701, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the promotion effect flag is set to ON. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether any one of the first promotion effect flag, the second promotion effect flag, and the third promotion effect flag set to ON in step S2003 of FIG. 19 is set to ON. I do.

  Here, if the promotion effect flag is set to ON (step S2701: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2702, and if the promotion effect flag is set to OFF (step S2701: No), The processing moves to step S2703.

<Step S2702>
In step S2702, the MPU 51 determines whether an unselected song has been provisionally selected. If an unselected song is provisionally selected (step S2702: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2703. If an unselected song is not temporarily selected (step S2702: NO), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2708. I do.

<Steps S2703 to S2707>
In step S2703, the MPU 51 determines whether the tentatively selected music melody pattern setting flag set in step S3913 in FIG. 61 and S4313 in FIG. 69 is set to ON.

  Here, if the melody pattern setting flag of the provisionally selected tune is off (step S2703: No), that is, if the melody pattern is not set by the player, the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern 2 of the default setting for the provisionally selected tune. (See FIG. 38) (step S2704), the speaker 26 is caused to output the tentatively selected song from the chorus portion (step S2705), and the initial temporarily selected song output processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the temporarily selected music melody pattern setting flag is ON (step S2703: YES), that is, if the melody pattern is set by the player, the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern 1 different from the default setting (FIG. 38) (step S2506), and causes the speaker 26 to output the tentatively selected music piece from the A melody part (singing out part) (step S2707), and ends the initial tentatively selected music piece output processing.

<Step S2708>
When the promotion effect flag is set to ON (step S2701: Yes) and the temporarily selected song is an unselected song (step S2702: Yes), the MPU 51 causes the speaker 26 to output the temporarily selected song. A melody pattern is randomly selected from a plurality of melody patterns (two in this embodiment) (step S2708). In other words, the MPU 51 determines whether or not to generate a contradiction of the melody pattern (output start portion) on the condition that an unselected song is temporarily selected when the promotion effect is scheduled to be performed. Regardless of whether the melody pattern of the selected music piece is set to a melody pattern different from the default setting, the melody pattern is determined by random lottery of the melody pattern. Thereby, the MPU 51 can generate a contradiction in the melody pattern (output start portion) when the promotion effect is scheduled to be performed.

  In the provisionally-selected tune output process shown in FIG. 40, the melody pattern is randomized on condition that the promotion effect flag is set to ON and the unselected tune is provisionally selected (step S2701: Yes and step S2702: Yes). (Step S2708), but instead of randomly selecting a melody pattern, a lottery is performed to determine whether to perform output contradiction (contradiction of melody pattern) at the output start portion of the initial tentatively selected tune of the melody pattern. You may do so. Further, in the present embodiment, when an unselected song is selected, a melody pattern is randomly selected regardless of whether or not the temporarily selected song melody pattern setting flag is set to ON by the player. When the selected music melody pattern setting flag is set to ON, the player setting may be prioritized, and the tentatively selected music may be output with a melody pattern different from the default setting. That is, in the non-default state in which the tentatively-selected tune melody pattern setting flag is set to ON, output inconsistency of the tentatively-selected tune is prevented from occurring, and only in the default state in which the player is not set for the melody pattern. Pattern inconsistencies may occur. Conversely, in the non-default state where the tentatively-selected song melody pattern setting flag is set to ON, output inconsistency of the tentatively-selected song occurs, and in the default state where the player setting for the melody pattern is not made May not cause a melody pattern inconsistency.

  In the tentatively selected tune output process shown in FIG. 40, a melody pattern is randomly selected each time an unselected tune is temporarily selected. However, an upper limit may be set for the number of times to select a melody pattern randomly. Although there is no particular limitation on the upper limit, it is, for example, about 1 to 5 times. By setting the upper limit on the number of times that the melody pattern is randomly selected, it is possible to prevent the player from unnecessarily repeatedly selecting unselected songs. In the provisionally-selected song output process shown in FIG. 40, a melody pattern of the tentatively-selected song may be inconsistent on condition that an unselected song is tentatively selected. A contradiction may be generated in the pattern. For example, a contradiction may be generated in the melody pattern on condition that the already-selected music piece is temporarily selected. In addition, a contradiction in the melody pattern may be generated regardless of whether the selected music piece or the unselected music piece is provisionally selected. In this way, even if a player who does not know the conditions under which the melody pattern of the tentatively selected music in the gaming machine 10 causes inconsistency is played, it is possible to cause inconsistency in the melody pattern of the tentatively selected music. Because it can be done, the fun of jackpot games is improved.

[Selected music output process]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the selected music piece output process (step S2609 in FIG. 39). In the selected music output process, a process of outputting the selected music from the speaker 26 is performed when a music is selected by the player's determination operation on the determination button 21B. In this music output process, the selected music is normally output from the speaker 26 in a melody pattern of a default setting. As shown in FIG. 38, the melody pattern defines an output start portion when the music is output from the speaker 26 as described above. For the selected music, the selected music and the unselected music are individually set. Default settings are defined. In the selected tune, the default setting of the melody pattern is such that all the tunes A to T are set to start the output from the melody pattern 1, that is, the A melody (song start portion). In an unselected song, the default setting of the melody pattern is such that all of the songs A to T are set to start the output from the melody pattern 2, that is, the chorus portion. In the selected music, the melody pattern 1 is the default setting for all the tunes A to T, but the melody pattern 2 may be the default setting for some or all of the tunes. In the unselected songs, the default setting for all songs A to T is melody pattern 2, but the default setting for some or all songs may be melody pattern 1.

  The melody pattern of the selected music can be set by the player to a melody pattern different from the default setting for each of the already-selected music and the unselected music (the melody pattern setting screen processing in FIG. 61 or FIG. 61). 69 melody pattern setting history screen processing). When a melody pattern different from the default setting is set by the player, the selected music is output from the speaker 26 in the melody pattern set by the player. For example, when the selected music is a selected music, the output is started from a melody pattern 2 different from the default setting, and when the selected music is an unselected music, the output is started from a melody pattern 1 different from the default setting. .

  Further, in the selected music output process, when the selected music is an unselected music in the first music selection in the music selection valid period (for example, the opening / closing execution mode of the first round) and the promotion effect flag is set to ON. By performing the contradictory output lottery (in a case where the promotion effect is scheduled to be executed in the big hit game effect), a contradiction can be caused in the melody pattern by randomly selecting the melody pattern. For example, if the melody pattern is set to the default, if the output start portion of the selected song is a rust portion, the promotion effect flag is set to ON, and if the selected song is an unselected song, the selected The output start part of the music may be a part different from the chorus part, for example, a music start part (intro part (prelude part) or A melody part (singing start part)). Performing the contradictory output lottery is equivalent to randomly selecting a melody pattern (step S2507 of the initial temporarily selected music output process in FIG. 37 and step S2708 of the temporarily selected music output process in FIG. 40).

  When output contradiction (inconsistency in melody pattern) occurs in the output start portion of the selected music in this way, the promotion effect is executed, that is, the jackpot lottery result is suggested before the selected music is output. It is determined that the result is more advantageous for the player than the result of the game. Therefore, when the output inconsistency (inconsistency in the melody pattern) of the output start portion of the selected music occurs, for example, the current game state is a 5R certain-variable jackpot gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the 5R normal jackpot gaming state. And the 16R probable jackpot game state, or the 16R probable jackpot game state which is more advantageous to the player than the 5R probable jackpot game state.

  By the way, there is no conventional gaming machine that causes inconsistency in the melody pattern when the selected music is output. For this reason, the conventional gaming machines have not been able to give the player sufficient interest in the act of selecting music and the effect of outputting the selected music, and as a result, the player cannot even select the music. Sometimes not.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to know in advance that the promotion effect is to be executed by the fixed effect in which the melody pattern of the selected music piece causes inconsistency. For this reason, the player performs an act of selecting a music, and at that time, can check whether the fixed effect is performed by paying attention to the melody pattern of the selected music, so that the conventional gaming machine can enjoy enough. The act of selecting songs that could not be performed can be sufficiently enjoyed. In addition, even if the effect is not interested in the player in the conventional gaming machine, the effect can be noticed, so that the player can fully enjoy the jackpot game. Also, by generating a contradiction of the melody pattern on condition that the selected music is an unselected music, the motivation to actively perform the act of selecting the music is given to the player, and the player is not selected. Music can be provisionally selected positively. As a result, the player can be motivated to listen to the unselected music piece, and the opportunity to convey the goodness of the unselected music piece to the player can be secured.

  The selected music output process having such technical significance will be specifically described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S2801>
In step S2801, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selected song selected by the player operating the enter button 21B is an unselected song. If the selected song is an unselected song (step S2801: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2802, and if the selected song is not an unselected song, that is, if the selected song is a selected song (step S2801: No), the process moves to step S2810.

<Step S2802>
In step S2802, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the first song determination in the song selection effective period of the jackpot game. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the determination operation counter (see steps S2606 and S2607 in FIG. 39) that is incremented by one by the music determination operation on the determination button 21B is one.

  Here, if it is the first music determination (step S2802: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2803, and if it is not the first music determination, that is, if it is the second or subsequent music determination (step S2802). : No), the process moves to step S2809.

<Step S2803>
In step S2803, the MPU 51 determines whether any of the first promotion effect flag, the second promotion effect flag, and the third promotion effect flag set to on in step S2003 of FIG. 19 is set to on. . If any promotion effect flag is set to ON (S2803: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2804, and if any promotion effect flag is not set to ON (step S2803: No) ) And the process moves to step S2809.

<Step S2804>
In step S2804, the MPU 51 performs a contradictory output lottery. Inconsistent output means that when the melody pattern is set to the default setting, the selected music is output from the speaker 26 with a melody pattern different from the default setting, and the melody pattern is set to a melody pattern different from the default setting. Means that the selected music is output from the speaker 26 with the melody pattern of the default setting. In the present embodiment, the contradictory output lottery is executed by selecting an unselected song when any of the first to third promotion effect flags is set to ON (step S2801 and step S2803: YES). ). For this reason, the inconsistency occurs in the output of the music when the unselected music is selected, and for example, the current game state is more advantageous to the player than the 5R normal jackpot game state, and the 5R probable big hit game state and 16R It is possible to know that the state is either the probable jackpot game state or the 16R probable jackpot game state which is more advantageous to the player than the 5R jackpot game state. Therefore, the determination operation for selecting an unselected music piece can be enjoyed not as an act of simply selecting a music piece but as an act of confirming whether or not the player is in a jackpot game state more advantageous to the player. As a result, the player can be motivated to actively select an unselected song and listen to the unselected song, thereby securing an opportunity to convey the goodness of the unselected song to the player.

  In addition, by performing the contradictory output lottery only for the first song determination (step S2802: Yes), the player unnecessarily repeats the unselected song in the jackpot game state for the purpose of executing the song selection button effect. Can be suppressed. Note that the number of times the contradictory output lottery is performed in step S2802 is not limited to one time per one big hit game, and may be performed two times or more. However, it is preferable to set an upper limit for the number of inconsistent output lotteries per jackpot game from the viewpoint of suppressing unnecessarily repeated selection of unselected songs.

  In step S2804, the contradictory output lottery is that an unselected song is selected (step S2801: Yes), that it is the first song determination (step S2802: Yes), and that the first to third promotion effect flags Is set to ON (step S2803: YES). However, the fact that an unselected music piece is selected and that the first music piece is determined means that a contradictory output lottery is selected. Conditions can be excluded. In other words, the contradictory output lottery may be performed under the condition that at least one of the first to third promotion effect flags is set to ON. In this case, the contradictory output is changed from the 5R normal jackpot to the 5R probability variable jackpot. The promotion has a significance as a performance that clearly indicates that it is in a state advantageous to a player who has promoted the 16R from the 5R certain jackpot to the 16R certain jackpot and the 16R certain jackpot from the 5R regular jackpot to the 16R certain jackpot. In addition, by setting the selection of an unselected song as a condition of the contradictory output lottery, a player who wants to confirm that the inconsistent output is more advantageous will select an unselected song. The opportunity to convey the goodness of unselected songs to On the other hand, by setting the first song determination as a condition for the contradictory output lottery, it is not necessary to listen to the selected song sufficiently and to select a song unnecessarily to check whether the contradictory output is executed. It can be suppressed from being repeated.

<Step S2805>
In step S2805, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the contradictory output lottery has been won. The process moves to step S2809.

<Steps S2806 to S2808>
If the contradictory output lottery is won (step S2805: YES), the MPU 51 sets the unselected song melody pattern setting flag set to ON in step S3913 in FIG. 61 or S4313 in FIG. 69 in step S2806. It is determined whether or not there is. The MPU 51 sets the unselected song melody pattern setting flag to ON (step S2806: YES), that is, sets the melody pattern 1 different from the melody pattern 2 which is the default setting (see FIG. 38). Then, the melody pattern 2 which is the default setting for executing the contradictory output is selected (step S2807). On the other hand, when the unselected song melody pattern setting flag is set to off (step S2806: No), that is, when the melody pattern is set to the default melody pattern 2 (see FIG. 38), the MPU 51 executes contradictory output. To do so, a melody pattern 1 different from the default setting is selected (step S2808).

<Step S2809>
If the selected song is an unselected song (step S2801: Yes), it is not the first song decision (if it is the second or later song decision) (step S2802: No), or the first to third promotion effects If none of the flags is set to ON (step S2803: NO), the MPU 51 sets the unselected song melody pattern setting flag to ON without executing the contradictory output lottery (step S2804) in step S2809. It is determined whether or not there is. Also, in step S2809, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the unselected song melody pattern setting flag is set to ON even when the contradiction output lottery has not been won (step S2805: No). The MPU 51 sets the unselected song melody pattern setting flag to ON (step S2809: YES), that is, sets the melody pattern 1 different from the melody pattern 2 which is the default setting (see FIG. 38). Then, the melody pattern 1 for outputting the selected music from the A melody (song start portion) without executing the contradictory output is selected (step S2808). On the other hand, when the unselected song melody pattern setting flag is set to off (step S2809: No), that is, when the melody pattern is set to the default melody pattern 2 (see FIG. 38), the MPU 51 executes inconsistent output. Instead, the melody pattern 2 of the default setting to be output from the chorus portion of the selected music is selected (step S2807).

<Step S2810>
When the selected music is not an unselected music (when the selected music is a already-selected music) (step S2801: No), the MPU 51 in step S2810 sets the already-selected music set in step S3913 in FIG. 61 or step S4313 in FIG. It is determined whether the melody pattern setting flag is set to ON. If the selected music melody pattern setting flag is set to ON (step S2810: Yes), that is, if the melody pattern 2 is set to a melody pattern 2 different from the default setting, the MPU 51 does not execute the contradictory output, and The melody pattern 2 to be output from the rust portion is selected (step S2807). On the other hand, when the already-selected melody pattern setting flag is set to off (step S2809: No), that is, when the melody pattern is set to the default melody pattern, the MPU 51 does not execute the contradictory output, and The melody pattern 1 to be output from the A melody (song start portion) is selected (step S2808).

<Steps S2811 and S2812>
When the melody pattern of the selected music piece is selected (step S2807 or S2808), the MPU 51 outputs the selected music piece from the speaker 26 with the selected melody pattern (step S2811), and updates the storage of the selected music piece (step S2812). Then, the selected music output process ends. By updating the memory of the selected music piece when the music piece is selected, it is possible to specify the last selected music piece during the music piece selection period even if a plurality of music selections are made during the music selection period. . In addition, since the last selected song can be specified in the song selection valid period, the song ranking of the already selected song in the song selection counter data table (see FIG. 29) can be updated based on the finally selected song.

  In the selected music output process shown in FIG. 41, the contradictory output lottery is performed when an unselected music is selected. However, the contradictory output lottery may be performed when an already selected music is selected. Also in this case, if the contradictory output lottery is won, for example, the current game state is one of the 5R probability variable jackpot game state and the 16R probability variable jackpot game state that are more advantageous to the player than the 5R normal jackpot game state, or It is possible to know that the player is in the 16R certain-variable jackpot game state, which is more advantageous to the player than the 5R certain-variable jackpot game state. Also, in the case where the contradictory output lottery is performed when the already-selected music piece is selected, it is preferable to set an upper limit on the number of contradictory output lotteries. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from unnecessarily repeatedly selecting the selected music piece in the jackpot game state.

[Song selection button effect processing]
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the music selection button effect processing (step S2609 in FIG. 39). In the music selection button effect processing, when the promotion effect flag set to ON in step S2003 of FIG. 19 is set to ON (when the promotion effect is scheduled to be executed), an unselected song is selected. In this case, a music selection button effect is determined, and the determined music selection button effect is executed. The music selection button effect is an expectation suggestion effect that indicates the degree of expectation that the promotion effect will be executed, and a positive change confirmation effect that clearly indicates that the promotion effect is to be executed. That is, in the music selection button effect processing, when the promotion effect is executed later, the effect indicating the degree of expectation and the certain change confirmation effect are executed according to the music determination operation.

  By the way, as a conventional gaming machine, when a decision operation is performed on a decision button 21B for deciding a song, a suggestion effect or a promotion effect indicating a degree of expectation that a promotion effect is executed is executed. There was no thing to execute a probable change definite production that clearly indicates. For this reason, conventional gaming machines have not been able to give the player sufficient interest in the act of selecting music and the performance when the selected music is performed, and as a result, the player has even selected the music. Sometimes not.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the music selection is performed at the time of music selection, it is possible to grasp in advance the degree of expectation that the promotion effect will be performed by the music selection button effect. For this reason, the player performs an act of selecting a music, and pays attention to the music selection button effect performed at that time, so that the act of selecting a music that could not be sufficiently enjoyed with a conventional gaming machine can be performed. You can enjoy. In addition, even if the effect is not interested in the player in the conventional gaming machine, the effect can be noticed, so that the player can fully enjoy the jackpot game. Also, by generating a contradiction of the melody pattern on condition that the selected music is an unselected music, the motivation to actively perform the act of selecting the music is given to the player, and the player is not selected. Music can be provisionally selected positively. As a result, the player can be motivated to listen to the unselected music piece, and the opportunity to convey the goodness of the unselected music piece to the player can be secured.

  The music selection button effect processing having such technical significance will be specifically described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S2901>
In step S2901, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selected music piece selected by the player operating the enter button 21B is an unselected music piece. If the selected song is an unselected song (step S2901: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2902, and if the selected song is not an unselected song, that is, if the selected song is an already-selected song (step S2901: No), the music selection button effect processing ends without executing the music selection button effect.

  Here, by determining whether or not an unselected song has been determined in step S2901, a song selection button effect can be executed on condition that an unselected song is selected. Therefore, a music selection button effect (expected effect suggestive effect (suggestive effect 1 to suggestive effect 8) shown in FIG. A player who wishes to perform the effect 4)) can be made to actively select an unselected music piece. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to widely listen to various songs prepared in advance for output in the special game state.

  In the present embodiment, the song selection button effect is executed on condition that an unselected song is selected. However, even when the already-selected song is selected, the song selection button effect may be executed. . Then, the operation on the selection deciding unit 21 for selecting a music can be enjoyed not only as an act for simply selecting a music, but also as an act for executing a music selection button effect. As a result, the player can be made to actively select a song, and the degree of interest in the jackpot game and the interest in the jackpot game can be increased, thereby improving the player's willingness to play.

<Step S2902>
In step S2902, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the first song determination in the song selection effective period of the jackpot game. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the determination operation counter (see steps S2606 and S2607 in FIG. 39) that is incremented by one by the music determination operation on the determination button 21B is one. If it is the first music determination (step S2902: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2903, and if it is not the first music determination, that is, if it is the second or subsequent music determination (step S2902: No). Then, the music selection button effect processing is terminated without executing the music selection button effect.

  Here, by determining whether or not it is the first music determination in step S2902, the number of times of executing the music selection button effect is limited to one time of the first music determination when an unselected music is selected. Is done. Thereby, when performing the music selection button effect, it is possible to suppress the player from repeatedly and unnecessarily selecting music without sufficiently listening to the unselected music in the jackpot game state.

  Note that the number of times the music selection button effect is executed is not limited to one per jackpot game, and may be executed two or more times. However, it is preferable to set an upper limit number (for example, 2 to 5 times) of the number of music selection button effects for one big hit game from the viewpoint of suppressing unnecessarily repeated selection of unselected music.

<Step S2903>
In step S2903, the MPU 51 determines whether the first promotion effect flag set to on in step S2003 of FIG. 19 is set to on. When the first promotion effect flag is set to ON (S2903: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2904, and when the first promotion effect flag is not set (step S2903: No), the MPU 51 executes the process. It moves to step S2805.

<Step S2904>
In step S2904, the MPU 51 selects the song selection button effect including a suggestion effect indicating the degree of expectation that the jackpot gaming state is the 5R certain jackpot game state, and a 5R certain change confirmation effect indicating that the jackpot gaming state is the 5R certain jackpot game state. Is executed. Details of the 5R likelihood tune selection button effect determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S2905>
In step S2905, the MPU 51 determines whether the second promotion effect flag or the third promotion effect flag set on in step S2003 of FIG. 19 is set on. When the second promotion effect flag or the third promotion effect flag is set to ON (S2905: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2906, and turns on the second promotion effect flag and the third promotion effect flag. If it is not set (step S2905: No), the music selection button effect processing ends without executing the music selection button effect.

  In the music selection button effect processing of FIG. 42, the music selection button effect can be executed on condition that the promotion effect flag is set to ON. However, when the promotion effect flag is set to OFF for this music selection button effect. May be executed. However, when the promotion effect flag is set to OFF, the song selection button effect executes only the suggestion effect indicating the degree of expectation that the jackpot game state is the probability change jackpot game state, and executes the probability change jackpot game state. Is not executed.

<Step S2906>
In step S2906, the MPU 51 selects the song selection button effect including the suggestion effect indicating the degree of expectation that the jackpot gaming state is the 16R certain jackpot game state and the 16R certain change confirmation effect indicating that the jackpot gaming state is the 16R certain jackpot game state. Is executed. The details of the 16R certain variable selection button effect determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

<S2907>
When the 5R certain variable song selection button effect determination processing or the 16R certain variable song selection button effect determination processing has been executed (step S2904 or S2906), the MPU 51 sets the promotion effect flag set on to off (step S2907).

<Steps S2908 and S2909>
In step S2908, the MPU 51 determines whether or not no effect (see FIGS. 45 and 48) has been selected in the 5R certain variable selection button effect determination processing or the 16R certain variable selection button effect determination processing. When no effect is selected (step S2908: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the music selection button effect processing without executing the music selection button effect. On the other hand, when no effect is not selected (step S2908: No), the MPU 51 executes the music selection button effect selected in the 5R certain variable song selection button effect determination process or the 16R certain variable song selection button effect determination process (step S2909). The music selection button effect processing ends.

  Here, the music selection button effect processing is executed when the music selection processing flag is set to ON (Step S2219: Yes and S2220 in FIG. 23). That is, the music selection button effect processing is executed for the first music determination operation until the music selection validity period elapses. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary selection of music for checking whether or not the music selection button effect is executed without sufficiently listening to the selected music.

[5R probable variable selection button production decision processing]
Here, FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the 5R certain variable song selection button effect determination processing (step S2904 in FIG. 42). In the 5R certain variable song selection button effect determination process, a song selection button effect (including no effect) to be executed when music selection is performed by a determination operation on the determination button 21B during the music selection effective period is determined. In the following, before describing the 5R certain variable selection button production determination process, a music selection button production table showing the degree of expectation of various music selection button productions shown in FIG. 44 and a 5R certain variation selection button production lottery table shown in FIG. 45 are determined. The 5R probable variable selection button effect lottery table will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 44, the song selection button effect table defines suggested effects 1 to 8 and fixed effects 1 to 4 according to the degree of expectation (probable change expectation) for the probability change jackpot as the type of the music selection button effect. The suggestion effects 1 to 8 are expectation effect suggestion effects that indicate the expectation that the jackpot that has caused the transition to the jackpot gaming state is a probability change jackpot. On the other hand, the confirmed effects 1 to 4 are effects that clearly indicate that the jackpot that has caused the transition to the jackpot gaming state is a probability-change jackpot, and are the probability-change confirmation effects in which the probability of change probability is 100%.

  The suggestion effect 1 is an effect in which the mini-character A is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 by operating the determination button 21B at the time of music selection, and the probability of change is 10%.

  The suggestion effect 2 is an effect in which the cursor image 836 (see FIG. 25) surrounding the temporarily selected music image 832 changes to blue by operating the enter button 21B at the time of music selection, and the probability of change is 10%.

  The suggestion effect 3 is an effect in which the mini-character B is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 by operating the determination button 21B at the time of music selection, and the probability of change is 20%.

  The suggestion effect 4 is an effect in which the cursor image 836 (see FIG. 25) surrounding the temporarily selected music image 832 changes to yellow by operating the enter button 21B at the time of music selection, and the probability of change is 20%.

  The suggestion effect 5 is an effect in which the mini-characters A and B are displayed on the symbol display unit 341 by operating the determination button 21B at the time of music selection, and the probability of change is 30%.

  The suggestion effect 6 is an effect in which the cursor image 836 (see FIG. 25) surrounding the temporarily selected music image 832 is changed to red by operating the enter button 21B at the time of music selection, and the probability of change is 50%.

  The suggestion effect 7 is an effect in which the mini-character C is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 by operating the enter button 21B at the time of music selection, and the probability of change is 66%.

  The suggested effect 8 is an effect in which the mini-characters A, B, and C are displayed on the symbol display unit 341 by the operation of the determination button 21B at the time of music selection and the operation of the determination button 21B at the time of music selection. It is a production.

  The fixed effect 1 is an effect in which the cursor image 836 (see FIG. 25) surrounding the temporarily selected music image 832 changes to a rainbow color by operating the enter button 21B at the time of music selection, and is an opportunity to shift to the jackpot game state. This is a 5R certain change confirmed effect that clearly indicates that the big hit is a 5R certain change big hit.

  The fixed effect 2 is an effect in which a special mini-character is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 by operating the enter button 21B at the time of music selection, and that the jackpot that has caused the transition to the jackpot gaming state is a 5R probability variable jackpot. It is a probable change confirmation effect to be specified. In addition, the determined effect 2 is a jackpot (5R probability variable jackpot, 16R probability variable jackpot, or 5R regular jackpot) in one of the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 of the second reserved storage area REB as the success / failure information. Is displayed, that is, when the jackpot game ends and the gaming state shifts to the time-saving mode, the hold series that generates the jackpot due to the second hold is executed. It is also a definitive production.

  In the fixed effect 3, a special operation sound (for example, a high-pitched operation sound such as “picone”) whose operation sound is different from the normal operation sound when the determination button 21B is operated at the time of music selection is output by operating the determination button 21B at the time of music selection. This is a 16R certain change confirmed effect that clearly indicates that the big hit that triggered the transition to the big hit gaming state is a 16R certain change big hit.

  The fixed effect 4 is an effect in which a special operation sound is output and a special mini-character is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 by operating the enter button 21B at the time of music selection, and a big hit that has caused the transition to the big hit gaming state. Is a probable change confirmation effect that clearly indicates that the game is a 16R probability change jackpot. In addition, the confirmed effect 4 is a jackpot (5R probability variable jackpot, 16R probability variable jackpot, or 5R normal jackpot) in one of the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 of the second reserved storage area REB as the success / failure information. Is displayed, that is, when the jackpot game ends and the gaming state shifts to the time-saving mode, the hold series that generates the jackpot due to the second hold is executed. It is also a definitive production.

  Note that the held extended villa finalizing effect also corresponds to a probability change finalizing effect, but a later-described song selection button effect setting screen process (FIGS. 66 and 67) and a later-described song selection button effect setting history screen process (FIGS. 73 and 74) ) Is defined separately from the probable effect.

  As shown in FIG. 45, the 5R certain variable song selection button effect lottery table is referred to when a determination operation is performed on the determination button 21B during the music selection effective period in the 5R certain variable jackpot game state. The 5R certain variable selection button effect lottery table is stored in the RAM 512 of the MPU 51, and stores eight lottery tables A1 to A8. In each of the tables A1 to A8, the relationship between the music selection button effect lottery counter stored in the RAM 512 of the MPU 51 and the effect type is determined, and the music selection button effect can be determined according to the count value of the music selection button effect lottery counter. Has been. In the tables A1 to A4, there is no allocation of the music selection button effect lottery counter for the suggestion effects 1 to 8 indicating the probability of the probability that the jackpot is the jackpot. On the other hand, in the tables A5 to A8, there are allocations of the song selection button effect lottery counters for the suggested effects 1 to 8, and any of the suggested effects 1 to 8 may be determined. In the 5R-probable-variable-selection-button-effect lottery table, since the reference is made in the game state of the 5R-probable-variable-hit, there are no defined effects 3 and 4 for specifying the 16R-probable-variable-hit.

  Specifically, the table A1 is a table in which only the “no effect” in which the 5R certain variable song selection button effect is not executed by the operation of the determination button 21B at the time of music selection is determined. That is, in the table A1, none of the "suggested effects 1" to "suggested effects 8", the "confirmed effects 1", and the "confirmed effects 2" are selected as the song selection button effects.

  The table A2 is a table in which, by operating the determination button 21B at the time of music selection, only “no effect”, or “determination effect 2”, which is a definite change finalizing effect and a reservation consecutive villa finalizing effect, is determined. That is, in the table A2, “suggested effect 1” to “suggested effect 8” and “fixed effect 1” are not selected as the song selection button effects.

  The table A3 is a table in which “no effect” or “confirmed effect 1”, which is a definite change effect, is determined by operating the enter button 21B during music selection. That is, in the table A3, “Suggested Effect 1” to “Suggested Effect 8” and “Fixed Effect 2” are not selected as the song selection button effects.

  The table A4 is a table in which “no effect”, “confirmed effect 1”, or “confirmed effect 2” is determined by operating the enter button 21B during music selection. That is, in the table A4, “Suggested Effect 1” to “Suggested Effect 8” are not selected as the music selection button effects.

  The table A5 is a table in which “No effect” or “Suggested effect 1” to “Suggested effect 8” is determined by operating the determination button 21B at the time of music selection. That is, in the table A5, the “determined effect 1” and the “determined effect 2” are not selected as the music selection button effects.

  The table A6 is a table in which “No effect”, “Suggested effect 1” to “Suggested effect 8” or “Fixed effect 2” is determined by operating the determination button 21B at the time of music selection. That is, in the table A6, the "determined effect 1" is not selected as the music selection button effect.

  The table A7 is a table in which “No effect”, “Suggested effect 1” to “Suggested effect 8” or “Fixed effect 1” is determined by operating the determination button 21B at the time of music selection. That is, in the table A7, the “determined effect 2” is not selected as the music selection button effect.

  The table A8 is a table in which “No effect”, “Suggested effect 1” to “Suggested effect 8”, “Fixed effect 1”, or “Fixed effect 2” is determined by operating the determination button 21B at the time of music selection. . In other words, in the table A8, any of "Suggested Effect 1" to "Suggested Effect 8", "Confirmed Effect 1", and "Confirmed Effect 2" can be selected as the song selection button effect.

  Here, FIG. 46 is a diagram illustrating an example of a 5R certain variable song selection button effect lottery table determination table. The 5R certain variable selection button production lottery table determination table defines conditions for selecting the tables A1 to A8, and is referred to in the 5R certain variable selection button production determination processing shown in FIG. The 5R likelihood tune selection button effect lottery table determination table defines the relationship between the game setting and the reserved extended-village flags and the tables A1 to A8. The game setting is a setting by the player as to whether or not to execute each of the expectation degree suggesting effect, the probable change confirming effect, and the hold extended guesthouse confirming effect. If the player has set not to perform the expected degree suggestion effect, the expected degree is determined in step S4113 in the music selection button effect setting screen processing in FIG. 66 or in step S4513 in the music selection button effect setting history screen processing in FIG. The suggestion effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON. Similarly, in accordance with the setting by the player, in step S4113 in the music selection button effect setting screen processing in FIG. 66 or in step S4513 in the music selection button effect setting history screen processing in FIG. The fixed effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON. On the other hand, the reserved extended villa flag indicates that the reserved extended villa is to be executed, and is set to ON in step S2205 in FIG.

  In the 5R probable variation selection button production lottery table determination table, for example, in the table A1 in which only “no production” is determined, the expectation suggestion production non-execution setting flag is turned on as a game setting, the probabilistic decision production non-execution setting flag is turned on, If the reserved extended-village fixed effect non-execution setting flag is ON and the reserved extended-village flag is ON, or the expected degree suggestive effect non-execution setting flag is ON, the probability change confirmed effect non-execution setting flag is ON, and the reserved extended-village flag is set Selected when off. Note that, similarly to the table A1, the tables A2 to A8 are selected when the game setting flag and the holding extended residence flag satisfy the conditions shown in FIG.

<Step S3001>
Returning to the description of FIG. 43, in the 5R certain variable selection button effect determination processing, in step S3001, the MPU 51 sets the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting flag set to on in step S4113 of FIG. 66 or step S4513 of FIG. It is determined whether or not is set. That is, the MPU 51 does not execute the expectation suggestion effect indicating the expectation that the gaming state is the 5R certain-variable jackpot game state or the 16R certain-variable jackpot gaming state, even if the operation is performed on the determination button 21B at the time of music selection. It is determined whether the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting is set. If the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON (if the expectation degree effect non-execution setting is performed) (step S3001: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3002, and If the suggested effect non-execution is set to off (if the expected degree suggested effect non-execution is not set) (step S3001: No), the process proceeds to step S3012.

<Step S3002>
In step S3002, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the probability-change-determined-effect non-execution setting flag set to on in step S4113 in FIG. 66 or step S4513 in FIG. 73 is set to on. That is, the MPU 51 does not execute the probability change confirmation effect that clearly indicates that the game state is the 5R probability change jackpot game state or the 16R probability change jackpot game state even if the operation is performed on the determination button 21B at the time of music selection. It is determined whether or not the effect non-execution setting is made. When the probability-change-determined effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON (when the probability-change-determined effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3002: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3003, When the execution setting flag is set to off (when the non-execution setting of the certain variation determination effect is not performed) (step S3002: No), the process proceeds to step S3008.

<Step S3003>
In step S3003, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the hold extended villa flag indicating that the hold extended villa set to be turned on in step S2205 in FIG. 23 is to be executed is turned on. The MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3004 when the hold extended flag is set to ON (step S3003: Yes), and executes the processing when the hold extended flag is set to OFF (step S3003: No). Shifts to step S3005.

<Step S3004>
In step S3004, when the reservation extended-village flag is set to ON (step S3003: Yes), the reserved extended-village confirmation effect not set to ON in step S4113 of FIG. 66 or step S4513 of FIG. 73 is not executed. It is determined whether the setting flag is set to ON. In other words, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the setting of the non-execution of the reserved extended villa effect, which is the setting not to execute the reserved extended villa effect, which indicates that the reserved extended villa is performed. The MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3005 when the reserved extended-village fixed effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON (when the reserved extended-village fixed effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3004: Yes). If the reserved extended-village fixed effect non-execution setting flag is set to OFF (if the reserved extended-village fixed effect non-execution setting is not made) (step S3004: No), the process proceeds to step S3007.

<Steps S3005 and S3006>
In step S3005, the MPU 51 executes the music selection button effect lottery in the table A1 (see FIG. 45) for selecting “no effect” regardless of which button random number counter value is selected. That is, the MPU 51 sets the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to ON (the expectation effect suggestion effect non-execution setting is performed) (step S3001: Yes), and sets the certain-variation confirmation effect non-execution setting flag to ON (probable change). When the fixed production non-execution setting is performed (step S3002: Yes), the reserved extended-village flag is set to ON (step S3003: Yes), and when the reserved extended-village fixed production non-execution setting flag is set to ON ( (If the reserved consecutive-villa fixed effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3004: Yes), the table A1 is selected as the 5R certain variable song selection button effect lottery table (see FIG. 46). In step S3005, the MPU 51 sets the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to ON (sets the expectation effect suggestion effect non-execution setting) (step S3001: Yes), and turns on the probability change confirmation effect non-execution setting flag. Even if the setting is made (probable change confirmation effect non-execution setting is performed) (step S3002: Yes), the table A1 is used as the 5R certain variable song selection button effect lottery table even when the hold extended flag is set to off (step S3003: No). Is selected (see FIG. 46). In addition, when the music selection button effect lottery in the table A1 has been performed (step S3005), the MPU 51 sets the hold extended flag to off (step S3006), and ends the 5R certain variable selection button effect determination process.

<Step S3007>
In step S3007, the MPU 51 executes the song selection button effect lottery in the table A2 (see FIG. 45) in which there is a value of the button lottery random number counter for selecting the “determined effect 2” which is the 5R certain change finalizing effect and the reserved consecutive room finalizing effect. I do. That is, the MPU 51 sets the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to ON (the expectation effect suggestion effect non-execution setting is performed) (step S3001: Yes), and sets the certain-variation confirmation effect non-execution setting flag to ON (probable change). When the fixed production non-execution setting is performed) (step S3002: Yes), the reserved extended-village flag is set to ON (step S3003: Yes), and when the reserved extended-village fixed production non-execution setting flag is set to OFF ( When the setting of non-execution of the held consecutive villa finalization effect has not been made (step S3004: No), the table A2 is selected as the 5R certain variable song selection button effect lottery table (see FIG. 46). In addition, when the music selection button effect lottery in the table A2 is performed (step S3007), the MPU 51 sets the hold extended villa flag to off (step S3006), and ends the 5R certain variable selection music button effect determination process.

<Step S3008>
In step S3008, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the hold extended villa flag indicating that the hold extended villa set to be turned on in step S2205 in FIG. 23 is executed is set to ON. The MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3009 when the reservation extended flag is set to ON (step S3008: Yes), and executes the processing when the reserved extended residence flag is set to OFF (step S3008: No). Shifts to step S3010.

<Step S3009>
In step S3009, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the reservation extended-village-determination-effect non-execution setting flag set to on in step S4113 in FIG. 66 or step S4513 in FIG. 73 is set to on. When the hold extended-village fixed effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON (step S3009: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3010, and sets the hold consecutive extended-village fixed effect non-execution setting flag to OFF. If there is (Step S3009: No), the process moves to Step S3011.

<Step S3010>
In step S3010, the MPU 51 executes the song selection button effect lottery in the table A3 (see FIG. 45) in which the value of the button lottery random number counter for selecting “determined effect 1” that is the 5R certainty-determining effect is present. That is, the MPU 51 sets the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to ON (sets the expectation effect suggestion effect non-execution) (step S3001: Yes), and sets the certain-variation confirmation effect non-execution setting flag to OFF (probability change). The determined effect non-execution setting has not been performed) (step S3002: No), the reserved extended-village flag is set to ON (step S3008: Yes), and the reserved extended-village determined effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON. In this case (when the setting of non-execution of the held consecutive villa finalization effect is set) (step S3009: Yes), the table A3 is selected as the 5R certain variable song selection button effect lottery table (see FIG. 46). In step S3010, the MPU 51 sets the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to ON (sets the expectation degree effect effect non-execution setting) (step S3001: Yes), and turns off the probability change confirmation effect non-execution setting flag. Even if the setting is made (the probability change non-execution effect non-execution setting is not performed) (step S3002: No), and the hold extended flag is set to off (step S3008: No), the 5R probability change song selection button effect lottery table Is selected as the table A3 (see FIG. 46). In addition, when the music selection button effect lottery in the table A3 has been performed (step S3010), the MPU 51 sets the hold extended flag to off (step S3006), and ends the 5R certain variable selection button effect determination process.

<Step S3011>
In step S3011, the MPU 51 executes the song selection button effect lottery in the table A4 (see FIG. 45) in which the value of the button lottery random number counter for selecting “determined effect 1” and “determined effect 2” exists. That is, the MPU 51 sets the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to ON (sets the expectation effect suggestion effect non-execution) (step S3001: Yes), and sets the certain-variation confirmation effect non-execution setting flag to OFF (probability change). The determined effect non-execution setting has not been performed (step S3002: No), the reserved extended-village flag is set to ON (step S3008: Yes), and the reserved extended-village confirmed effect non-execution setting flag is set to OFF. In this case (when the setting of non-execution of the held consecutive villa finalization effect has not been made) (step S3009: No), the table A4 is selected as the 5R certain variable song selection button effect lottery table (see FIG. 46). In addition, when the music selection button effect lottery in the table A4 is performed (step S3011), the MPU 51 sets the hold extended flag to off (step S3006), and ends the 5R certain variable selection music button effect determination process.

<Step S3012>
When the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting flag is set to off (step S3001: No), in step S3012, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the probable change confirmed effect non-execution setting flag is set to on. When the probability-change-determined effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON (step S3012: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3013, and when the probability-change-determined effect non-execution setting flag is set to OFF (step S3013). S3012: No), and the process moves to step S3017.

<Step S3013>
In step S3013, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the reservation extended-village flag is set to ON. The MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3014 when the reservation extended flag is set to ON (step S3013: Yes), and executes the processing when the reservation extended flag is set to OFF (step S3013: No). Is shifted to step S3015.

<Step S3014>
In step S3014, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the reserved extended-village effect rendering non-execution setting flag is set to ON. When the reserved extended-village fixed effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON (step S3014: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3015, and sets the reserved consecutive extended-village fixed effect non-execution setting flag to OFF. If there is (Step S3014: No), the process proceeds to Step S3016.

<Step S3015>
In step S3015, the MPU 51 executes the song selection button effect lottery in the table A5 (see FIG. 45) in which the value of the button lottery random number counter for selecting “suggest effect 1” to “suggest effect 8” exists. That is, the MPU 51 sets the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to off (the expectation effect suggestion effect non-execution setting is not performed) (step S3001: No), and sets the certainty change confirmed effect non-execution setting flag to on. (Step S3012: Yes), the reserved extended-village flag is set to ON (Step S3013: Yes), and the reserved consecutive-village rendered effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON. In this case (when the setting of the non-execution of the held consecutive villa finalization effect has been made) (step S3014: Yes), the table A5 is selected as the 5R certain variable song selection button effect lottery table (see FIG. 46). Also, in step S3015, the MPU 51 sets the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to OFF (the expectation degree effect effect non-execution setting is not performed) (step S3001: No), and sets the probability change confirmation effect non-execution setting flag. Is set to ON (probable change confirmation effect non-execution setting is performed) (step S3012: Yes), and the 5R certain variable song selection button effect lottery table is also set when the hold extended flag is set to off (step S3013: No). Is selected as the table A5 (see FIG. 46). In addition, when the music selection button effect lottery in the table A5 has been performed (step S3015), the MPU 51 sets the hold extended-flag flag to off (step S3006), and ends the 5R certain variable selection button effect determination processing.

<Step S3016>
In step S3016, the MPU 51 executes the song selection button effect lottery in the table A6 (see FIG. 45) in which the value of the button lottery random number counter for selecting the "suggest effect 1" to "suggest effect 8" and the "fixed effect 2" is present. I do. That is, the MPU 51 sets the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to OFF (the expectation effect suggestion effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3001: No), and sets the positive-variation confirmation effect non-execution setting flag to ON. (Step S3012: Yes), the reserved extended-village flag is set to ON (Step S3013: Yes), and the reserved extended-village rendered effect non-execution setting flag is set to OFF. (When the hold has not been set) (step S3014: No), the table A6 is selected as the 5R certain variable song selection button effect lottery table (see FIG. 46). In addition, when the music selection button effect lottery in the table A6 is performed (step S3016), the MPU 51 sets the hold extended flag to off (step S3006), and ends the 5R certain variable selection music button effect determination process.

<Step S3017>
When both the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting flag and the probable change confirmed effect non-execution setting flag are set to off (No in steps S3001 and S3012), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the hold extended flag is set to on. Is determined (step S3017). The MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3018 when the reservation extended flag is set to ON (step S3017: Yes), and executes the processing when the reservation extended flag is set to OFF (step S3017: No). Is shifted to step S3019.

<Step S3018>
In step S3018, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the hold extended villa fixed effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON. When the reserved extended-village fixed effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON (step S3018: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3019, and sets the reserved consecutive extended-village fixed effect non-execution setting flag to OFF. If there is (Step S3018: No), the process proceeds to Step S3020.

<Step S3019>
In step S3019, the MPU 51 executes the song selection button effect lottery in the table A7 (see FIG. 45) in which the values of the button lottery random number counters for selecting “suggest effect 1” to “suggest effect 8” and “fixed effect 1” exist. I do. That is, the MPU 51 sets the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to off (the expectation degree effect effect non-execution setting is not performed) (step S3001: No), and sets the certainty change confirmed effect non-execution setting flag to off. (Step S3012: No), the reserved extended-village flag is set to ON (Step S3017: Yes), and the reserved extended-village rendered effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON. (Step S3018: Yes), the table A7 is selected as the 5R sure variable selection button production lottery table (see FIG. 46). Also, in step S3019, the MPU 51 sets the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to off (the expectation effect suggestion effect non-execution setting is not performed) (step S3001: No), and sets the probability change confirmation effect non-execution setting flag. Is set to OFF (the setting of non-execution of the fixed-change confirmation effect is not performed) (step S3012: No), and the 5R certain-change song selection button is set even if the hold extended flag is set to off (step S3017: No). The table A7 is selected as the effect lottery table (see FIG. 46). In addition, when the music selection button effect lottery in the table A7 has been performed (step S3019), the MPU 51 sets the hold extended villa flag to off (step S3006), and ends the 5R sure variable selection button effect determination process.

<Step S3020>
In step S3020, the MPU 51 checks the table A8 (refer to FIG. 45) in which the values of the button lottery random number counters for selecting “suggested effect 1” to “suggested effect 8”, “determined effect 1”, and “determined effect 2” exist. Executes a song selection button production lottery. That is, the MPU 51 sets the expectation degree effect non-execution setting flag to off (the expectation degree effect non-execution setting is not performed) (step S3001: No), and sets the probability change confirmed effect non-execution setting flag to off. (Step S3012: No), the reserved extended-village flag is set to ON (Step S3017: Yes), and the reserved extended-village rendered effect non-execution setting flag is set to OFF If the setting has been made (if the setting of non-execution of the held consecutive villa finalization effect has not been made) (step S3018: No), the table A8 is selected as the 5R certain variable song selection button effect lottery table (see FIG. 46). In addition, when the music selection button effect lottery in the table A8 is performed (step S3020), the MPU 51 sets the hold extended villa flag to off (step S3006), and ends the 5R certain variable music selection button effect determination process.

[16R probable variable selection button production decision processing]
Here, FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the 16R certain variable song selection button effect determination process (step S2906 in FIG. 42). In the 16R certain variable selection button production lottery table shown in FIG. 48, the 16R certain variable selection button production lottery table for determining the 16R certain variable selection button production lottery table shown in FIG. 48 is operated when the enter button 21B is operated. (Including no directing). Note that the 16R certain variable song selection button effect determination process is basically the same as the above-described 5R certain variable song selection button effect determination process. In the 5R certain variable song selection button effect determination process shown in FIG. A8 ”may be replaced with“ table B1 ”to“ table B8 ”.

  The 16R certain variable song selection button effect lottery table shown in FIG. 48 is referred to when a determination operation is performed on the determination button 21B during the music selection effective period in the 16R certain variable jackpot game state. The 16R certain variable selection button effect lottery table is stored in the RAM 512 of the MPU 51, and stores eight lottery tables B1 to B8. The 16R certain variable song selection button production lottery table is basically the same as the 5R certain variable song selection button production lottery table. However, instead of "confirmed production 1" in the 5R certain variable song selection button production lottery table, "determined effect 3" is specified. Thus, “determined effect 4” is specified instead of “determined effect 2”. That is, in the 16R certain variable selection button production lottery table, since the 16R certain variable big hit gaming state is referred, the fixed production 1 and the fixed production 3 that clearly indicate the 5R certain variable big hit are not specified. It should be noted that a detailed description of the 16R certain variable song selection button effect lottery table is omitted.

  FIG. 49 is a diagram illustrating an example of a 16R certain variable song selection button effect lottery table determination table. The 16R certain variable song selection button effect lottery table determination table defines conditions for selecting the tables B1 to B8, and is referred to in the 16R certain variable song selection button effect determination process shown in FIG. The 16R probability variable song selection button effect lottery table determination table defines the relationship between the game settings and the reserved extended-village flags and the tables B1 to B8. Note that the game setting and the hold consecutive flag are synonymous with those in the case of the 5R certain variable song selection button effect lottery table determination table. In the 16R probable variation selection button production lottery table determination table, for example, in the table B1 (see FIG. 48) in which only “no production” is determined, the expectation degree suggestion production non-execution setting flag is turned on as the game setting, When the setting flag is ON, the reserved extended-village non-execution setting flag is ON, and the reserved extended-village flag is ON, or the expected degree suggestive rendering non-execution setting flag is ON, the positive variation confirmed rendering non-execution setting flag is ON, and This is selected when the hold extended flag is off. In addition, the table B2 to the table B8 are selected when the game setting flag and the holding extended-village flag satisfy the condition shown in FIG. 49, similarly to the table B1.

<Steps S3101 to S3107>
Returning to the description of FIG. 47, in the 16R certainty variable song selection button effect determination process, the MPU 51 sets the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to ON (expectation effect effect non-execution setting is performed) (step S3101: Yes). The confirmed effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON (a probable change confirmed effect non-execution setting is performed) (step S3102: Yes), the reserved extended villa flag is set to ON (step S3103: Yes), and the reserved extended villa finalized effect When the execution setting flag is set to ON (when the hold of the consecutive villas is not set) (step S3104: Yes), any of the button random number counters is used as the 16R certain variable selection button production lottery table. Table B1 (step S3105) (see FIG. 48) for selecting “no effect” even if the value of “(No)” is selected (FIG. 4). Reference). In addition, the MPU 51 sets the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to ON (sets the expectation degree effect effect non-execution setting) (step S3101: Yes), and sets the positive change confirmation effect non-execution setting flag to ON (positive change). Even if the hold series flag is set off (step S3103: No), the table B1 is selected as the 16R certain variable selection button production lottery table (step S3102: Yes) (step S3102: Yes). Step S3105) (see FIG. 49). In addition, when the music selection button effect lottery in the table B1 is performed (step S3105), the MPU 51 sets the hold extended villa flag to off (step S3106), and ends the 16R certain variable selection button effect determination process.

  On the other hand, in step S3107, the MPU 51 sets the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to ON (sets the expectation effect suggestion effect non-execution setting) (step S3101: Yes), and turns the probability change confirmed effect non-execution setting flag ON. (Step S3102: Yes), the reserved extended-village flag is set to ON (Step S3103: Yes), and the reserved consecutive-village rendered effect non-execution setting flag is set to OFF. When there is (when the reservation continuous play non-execution effect non-execution setting has not been performed) (step S3104: No), as the 16R certain variable song selection button production lottery table, the 16R certain change confirmed production and the reserved continuous house final production “determination effect” Select the table B2 in which the value of the button lottery random number counter for selecting “4” exists (see FIG. 49). In addition, when the music selection button effect lottery in the table B2 is performed (step S3107), the MPU 51 sets the hold extended flag to off (step S3106), and ends the 16R certain variable selection button effect determination process.

<Steps S3108 to 3111>
Further, in step S3110, MPU 51 sets the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to ON (sets the expectation degree effect effect non-execution setting) (step S3101: Yes), and turns off the probable change confirmation effect non-execution setting flag. It is set (probable change confirmation effect non-execution setting has not been performed) (step S3102: No), the reservation extended villa flag is set to on (step S3108: Yes), and the reservation extended villa determination effect non-execution setting flag is set to on If it is set (holding of the extended casino fixed effect non-execution setting) (step S3109: Yes), “Fixed Effect 3”, which is a 16R certain variable confirmed effect, is set as a 16R certain variable selection button effect lottery table. The table B3 in which the value of the button random number counter to be selected exists is selected (see FIG. 49). Further, in step S3110, MPU 51 sets the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to ON (sets the expectation degree effect effect non-execution setting) (step S3101: Yes), and turns off the probable change confirmation effect non-execution setting flag. Even if the setting is made (probable change confirmation effect non-execution setting is not performed) (step S3102: No) and the hold extended villa flag is set to off (step S3108: No), the 16R certain variable song selection button effect lottery table Is selected as the table B3 (see FIG. 49). In addition, when the music selection button effect lottery in the table B3 is performed (step S3110), the MPU 51 sets the hold extended flag to off (step S3106), and ends the 16R certain variable selection button effect determination processing.

  On the other hand, in step S3111, the MPU 51 sets the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to ON (sets the expectation effect suggestion effect non-execution setting) (step S3101: Yes), and turns off the probability change confirmation effect non-execution setting flag. It is set (probable change confirmation effect non-execution setting has not been performed) (step S3102: No), the reservation extended villa flag is set to on (step S3108: Yes), and the reservation extended villa determination effect non-execution setting flag is set to off When the setting is made (when the setting of non-execution of the held consecutive villa finalization effect is not made) (step S3109: No), “determination effect 3” and “determination effect 4” are set as the 16R certain variable song selection button effect lottery table. The table B4 in which the value of the selected button random number counter exists is selected (see FIG. 49). Note that, when the music selection button effect lottery in the table B4 is performed (step S3111), the MPU 51 sets the hold extended villa flag to off (step S3106), and ends the 16R certain variable song selection button effect determination process.

<Steps S3112 to S3116>
In step S3115, the MPU 51 sets the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to OFF (the expectation effect suggestion effect non-execution setting is not performed) (step S3101: No), and sets the certainty change confirmed effect non-execution setting flag to ON. (Step S3112: Yes), the reserved extended-village flag is set to ON (Step S3113: Yes), and the reserved extended-village rendered effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON. (If the hold has not been set), (step S3114: Yes), "Suggested Effect 1" to "Suggested Effect 8" are selected as the 16R certain variable song selection button effect lottery table. The table B5 in which the value of the button random number counter exists is selected (see FIG. 49). Also, in step S3115, the MPU 51 sets the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to OFF (the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting is not performed) (step S3101: No), and sets the probability change confirmation effect non-execution setting flag. Is set to ON (probable change confirmation effect non-execution setting is performed) (step S3112: Yes), and even if the hold extended villa flag is set to OFF (step S3113: No), the 16R certain variable selection button effect lottery table Table B5 is selected (see FIG. 49). In addition, when the music selection button effect lottery in the table B5 is performed (step S3115), the MPU 51 sets the hold extended flag to off (step S3106), and ends the 16R certain variable selection button effect determination process.

  On the other hand, in step S3116, the MPU 51 sets the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to OFF (the expectation effect suggestion effect non-execution setting is not performed) (step S3101: No), and sets the probability change confirmation effect non-execution setting flag Is set to ON (a probable-change confirmed effect non-execution setting is performed) (step S3112: Yes), the reservation extended villa flag is set to ON (step S3113: Yes), and the reserved consecutive villa confirmed effect non-execution setting flag is set. When it is set to OFF (when the setting of non-execution of the held extended villa finalization effect has not been made) (step S3114: No), as the 16R sure variable selection button effect lottery table, "suggestive effect 1" to "suggestive effect 8" "And" Confirmation Effect 4 "are selected. The table B6 in which the value of the random number counter of the lottery exists is selected (see FIG. 49). In addition, when the music selection button effect lottery in the table B6 is performed (step S3116), the MPU 51 sets the hold extended villa flag to off (step S3106), and ends the 16R certain variable selection button effect determination process.

<Steps S3117 to S3120>
In step S3117, the MPU 51 sets the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to off (the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting is not performed) (step S3101: No), and turns off the probability change confirmed effect non-execution setting flag. (Step S3112: No), the reserved extended-village flag is set to ON (Step S3117: Yes), and the reserved extended-village finalized production non-execution setting flag is set to ON. Is set to (non-executive rendezvous confirmation effect non-execution setting is performed) (step S3118: Yes), as the 16R certain variable selection button effect lottery table, "suggested effect 1" to "suggested effect 8" and "confirmed effect." Select the table B7 in which the value of the button lottery random number counter for selecting "3" exists (see FIG. 49). In step S3117, the MPU 51 sets the expectation suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to off (the expectation effect suggestion effect non-execution setting is not performed) (step S3101: No), and sets the probability change confirmation effect non-execution setting flag. Is set to OFF (the probable change confirmation effect non-execution setting is not performed) (step S3112: No), and the 16R certain change song selection button is set even when the hold extended flag is set to off (step S3117: No). The table B7 is selected as an effect lottery table (see FIG. 49). In addition, when the music selection button effect lottery in the table B7 is performed (step S3119), the MPU 51 sets the hold extended villa flag to off (step S3106), and ends the 16R certain variable selection button effect determination process.

  On the other hand, in step S3120, the MPU 51 sets the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to OFF (the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting is not performed) (step S3101: No), and sets the probability change confirmation effect non-execution setting flag. Is set to OFF (the probable-change confirmed effect non-execution setting has not been performed) (step S3112: No), the reserved extended-village flag is set to ON (step S3117: Yes), and the reserved extended-village confirmed effect non-execution setting flag is set. Is set to OFF (in the case where the setting of non-execution of the held consecutive villa finalization effect has not been performed) (step S3118: No), as the 16R sure variable selection button effect lottery table, "suggestive effect 1" to "suggestive effect 1" 8 "," determined effect 3 ", and" determined effect 4 "are selected. A table B8 in which the value of the random number counter exists is selected (see FIG. 49). . In addition, when performing the music selection button effect lottery in the table B8 (step S3120), the MPU 51 sets the hold extended-flag flag to off (step S3106), and ends the 16R certain variable music selection button effect determination processing.

[Song selection counter data update processing]
Here, FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the music selection counter data update processing (step S2611 in the music selection processing of FIG. 39). In the music selection counter data update processing, the music selection image display processing (see FIG. 24) and the initial provisionally selected music determination processing (FIG. 35) are necessary in accordance with the selection status of the music by the player during the music selection effective period of the jackpot game. The music selection counter data table (see FIG. 29) is updated. As a result, it is possible to create a selected music list (see FIG. 30A) and a non-selected music list (see FIG. 30B) necessary to display the music selection image 83 (see FIG. 25). At the same time, it becomes possible to create initial array order data (see FIG. 31). As a result, by updating the music selection counter data in the music selection counter data update processing, the music selection image 83 displayed in the next big hit game reflects the selection status of the music by the player in the current big hit game, The music selection image 83 has high operability for music selection for the player.

<Step S3201>
In step S3201, the MPU 51 determines whether or not there is an initial tentatively selected song that can be temporarily stored in the RAM 512 in step S2304 in the song selection image display process of FIG. In step S3201: Yes, the process proceeds to step S3102, and if there is no storage of the initial provisionally selected song (step S3201: No), the process proceeds to step S3106.

<Step S3202>
In step S3202, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the music piece determined by the MPU as the initial tentatively selected music piece (step S2404 in FIG. 35) has been selected by the player as the selected music piece. Is satisfied (S3202: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3106, and if the initial provisionally selected song is not selected (step S3202: No), the process proceeds to step S3103.

<Steps S3203 and S3204>
In step S3203, the MPU 51 updates the data (see FIG. 29) regarding the non-selected music in the music selection counter data table stored in the RAM 512.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 51 (A1) and FIG. 51 (A2), in the state of the music selection counter data table shown in FIG. 29, the MPU selects the music F of the music number 6 as the tentatively selected music. If the music F is not selected by the user, the music F is stored in the first place in the non-selected music list ranking, and the unselected music list before the update is placed in the second and third places in the non-selected music list ranking, respectively. The song I of the song number 9 with the first place and the song B of the song number 2 with the second place are stored. Also, among the non-selected songs having the third-ranked non-selected song list prior to the update, the song C of song number 3 with the oldest non-selection date and time is ranked 0th, and is changed to an unselected song.

  In step S3203, the MPU 51 updates the non-selection flag. For example, when the non-selected music list ranking is updated from FIG. 51 (A1) to FIG. 51 (A2), the non-selected flag of the music C whose non-selected music list ranking is changed from third to zero is updated. This is performed by setting the selection flag to off and setting the non-selection flag of the music piece F in which the non-selected music list ranking is changed from 0th to 1st to on. When the data relating to the non-selected tune in the tune selection counter data table (see FIG. 29) is updated (step S3203), the storage of the initial provisionally selected tune stored in the RAM 512 is cleared (step S3204).

<Step S3205>
In step S3205, the MPU 51 determines whether or not there is a storage of the selected music that can be stored in the RAM 512 in step S2812 in the selected music output process of FIG. 41, and if there is the storage of the selected music (step S3205: Yes), The process shifts to step S3106, and if there is no storage of the selected music (step S3205: No), the music selection counter data updating process ends.

<Steps S3206 and S3207>
In step S3206, the MPU 51 updates the data (see FIG. 29) regarding the selected music in the music selection counter data table stored in the RAM 512.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 51 (B1) and FIG. 51 (B2), when the player selects the song E of the song number 5 as the selected song in the state of the song selection counter data table shown in FIG. Adds 1 to the selection counter of the music E. In addition, the song E is stored in the first place in the selected music list ranking, and the second and third places in the selected music list rank are each of the music number 1 having the first selected music list ranking before the update. The music A and the music D of the music number 4 which was the second place are stored. In addition, the song D of the song number 4 having the oldest selection date and time among the already-selected songs whose ranking of the already-selected song list was third before the update is ranked 0th, and is changed to an unselected song.

  In step S3205, the MPU 51 updates the already-selected flag. For example, when the non-selected music ranking is updated from FIG. 51 (B1) to FIG. 51 (B2), the selected flag is updated when the selected music list whose ranking is changed from third to zero is selected. This is performed by setting the flag to OFF and setting the selected flag of the music piece E whose selected music list ranking is changed from 0th to 1st to ON. When the MPU 51 updates the data (see FIG. 29) relating to the selected music in the music selection counter data table (step S3206), the MPU 51 clears the storage of the selected music stored in the RAM 512 (step S3207), and The data update processing ends.

  When a song is selected from the unselected songs, the song is changed from the unselected songs to the already-selected songs. For example, when the song B having the second non-selected song ranking in FIG. 51 (A1) is selected, the first place of the selected song ranking data is changed to the song B. On the other hand, in the non-selected music ranking data, the music B is deleted from the second place, the music C in the third place is moved up to the second place, and the third place is updated with no corresponding music. In addition, the non-selection flag of the music B is set to off, and the already selected flag of the music B is set to on. That is, by selecting a song from the non-selected songs, information on the non-selection of the song is cleared in the song selection counter data, while information indicating that the song is a selected song is included. The addition is performed.

  When the selected music list ranking is determined not by the order of the selection date and time but by the selection frequency, the data on the selected music is updated based on the selection frequency counter of the music E. For example, in the state of the music selection counter data table shown in FIG. 29, when the music E of the music number 5 is selected as the selected music by the player, the selection counter is updated from 0 to 1 for the music E, There is no change in the selected song list order. Therefore, the MPU 51 does not change the selected music list ranking and the selected flag. In addition, when the order of the selected music list is determined by the selection frequency, if the order of the already selected music list is changed, the data of the already selected music is updated in the same order as when updating the data on the selected music in the order of the newest selection date and time. The list order and the selected flag are updated.

[Game setting process]
Here, FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game setting process (step S1711 in FIG. 15). In the game setting process, during a period in which the game turn effect or the jackpot game effect is not executed, the jackpot is determined according to the operation of the selection determining unit 21 (the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211 to 214) and the determination button 21B) by the player. A game setting for the game effect is executed.

  By the way, as a conventional game, there is a game in which a player can perform game settings related to various effects performed using the symbol display unit 341 or the speaker 26, such as selection of a character appearing in a game round effect or a jackpot game effect. is there. In such a gaming machine, the player can customize the performance to suit his / her preference by performing game settings related to various performances by selecting a favorite character, etc. You can enjoy game performances even more.

  On the other hand, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment has a new feature as a jackpot game effect in comparison with the conventional gaming machine as described above. Specifically, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment displays an image including the selected music image 831 and the non-selected music image 834 as the music selection image 83 on the symbol display unit 341 in the jackpot game effect (see FIG. 25). ). Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the jackpot game, before the promotion effect that clearly indicates that the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the currently suggested gaming state, the initial provisionally selected music is performed. When the tentatively selected music or the selected music including “” is output from the speaker 26, the contradiction is generated in the melody pattern of the music to clearly indicate that the promotion effect is to be performed, and the determination operation for the determination button 21B when selecting the music is performed. A music selection button effect that indicates or clearly indicates the degree of expectation that the promotion effect is executed is executed in accordance with.

  Then, in the game setting process shown in FIG. 52, a process is performed in a case where a player performs a game setting for a jackpot game effect having a new feature with respect to a conventional gaming machine. Specifically, in the game setting process, a music list display setting relating to display or non-display of the music selection image 83 (see FIG. 25) on the music selection image display screen 82 in accordance with an operation on the selection determining unit 21 by the player. The melody pattern setting for the provisionally selected music and the selected music, and the music selection button effect setting for setting execution or non-execution of the music selection button effect are executed. That is, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, as a game setting of the jackpot game effect, the player can perform a music list display setting, a melody pattern setting, and a music selection button effect setting which were not the conventional game setting items.

  Here, in the music list display setting, each of the selected music (favorite music) image 831 and the non-selected music (dislike music) image 834 in the music selection image 83 as described later with reference to FIGS. It can be set to display or non-display. Thereby, the player can customize the music selection image 83 to a desired display mode. In addition, for example, the player performs temporary selection and selection of music without stress, for example, by setting information about past music selections that the player determines to be unnecessary as non-display setting and setting the display mode to a favorite display mode. be able to.

  In the melody pattern setting, a melody pattern of a tentatively selected music piece or a selected music piece (unselected music piece and already selected music piece) can be set as described later with reference to FIGS. As a result, the player can not only output the temporarily selected music or the selected music with the default setting, but also output from a portion other than the default setting. As a result, the range of selection of the tentatively selected tune or the output start portion of the selected tune is expanded, and the player can output the tentatively selected tune or the selected tune at his / her own discretion. You can enjoy music and selected music.

  Further, in the music selection button effect setting, it is possible to set whether or not to execute the music selection button effect as described later with reference to FIGS. 67 and 74. Accordingly, when the player has set to execute the music selection button effect, the act of executing the music selection button effect (the operation of the determination button 21B in music selection, the promotion effect may be performed) Act to know). On the other hand, if the player has set not to execute the music selection button effect, it is impossible to know in advance whether or not the promotion effect is to be executed. Is expected to be executed. For this reason, since it is possible to select whether or not to execute the music selection button effect setting, it is possible to have a way of enjoying whether or not the promotion effect is performed according to the taste of the player.

  The game setting processing having such technical significance will be specifically described below with reference to FIG. However, before describing the game setting process shown in FIG. 52, a transition example of the display screen in the game setting process will be described first with reference to FIGS. In the following description, for the sake of simplicity, the display does not shift to a later-described top menu screen 93 (see FIG. 53 (B)), a demonstration screen, or a power saving screen even if a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop display of the main symbol 921. The following description will be made on the assumption that a fluctuation stop screen 92 (see FIG. 53A) described later is maintained, and that a game can be set after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the fluctuation stop screen 92 was displayed. Of course, the game setting may be enabled immediately after the fluctuation stop screen 92 is displayed, and when a predetermined time has elapsed since the fluctuation stop screen 92 was displayed, the game setting may be automatically performed regardless of the operation of the player. Alternatively, the screen may shift to the top menu screen 93 (see FIG. 53B).

  As shown in FIG. 53 (A), when the variable display of the main symbol 921 is stopped, when the number of holdings N and the number of holdings M are “0” and the game does not shift to the jackpot game state, the main symbol 921 is displayed. The fluctuation stop screen 92 in a state where the fluctuation has stopped is maintained. When the operation button 20 is operated by the player after a lapse of a predetermined time after the fluctuation stop screen 92 is displayed, the display screen changes from the fluctuation stop screen 92 to the top menu screen 93 shown in FIG. Transition. The top menu screen 93 includes a plurality of selection images 931 to 935, a cursor image 936, and a selection determination unit image 937.

  The plurality of selection images 931 to 935 on the top menu screen 93 are images for indicating a plurality of selectable items and for allowing the player to select a desired item from the plurality of items. Further, the plurality of selection images 931 to 935 are also images for selecting the display screen of the transition destination. The plurality of selection images 931 to 935 are, for example, a selection image 933 of “game setting customization” for performing a game setting at the time of a jackpot game, and an “end” selection image 935 of shifting from the top menu screen 93 to the fluctuation stop screen 92. including.

  The cursor image 936 on the top menu screen 93 is an image indicating the currently provisionally selected item. In addition, the temporarily selected image 933 (the selected image 933 of “game setting customization” in FIG. 53 (B)) is different from the other selected images 931 and 932 in order to emphasize that it is temporarily selected. 934 and 935 are displayed in a distinguishable manner. This is the same as the temporary selection music image 832 (see FIG. 25) in the music selection image 83 described above.

  The selection deciding section image 937 of the top menu screen 93 is an image simulating the selection deciding section 21 (see FIG. 1), and indicates that a desired item can be selected from a plurality of items by operating the selection deciding section 21. It is an image. In the selection deciding unit image 937, images corresponding to the upper selection button 211 and the lower selection button 212 are marked with “selection”, and the images corresponding to the upper selection button 211 and the lower selection button 212 are highlighted. Is displayed. The images corresponding to the upper selection button 211 and the lower selection button 212 may be emphasized by blinking display or the like. In the selection determination section image 937, the character corresponding to the determination button 21B is marked with “decision” to indicate that an operation should be performed when selecting a provisionally selected item. The display example of the selection determining section image 937 is not limited to the mode shown in FIG. 53B, and can be changed as appropriate.

  On the top menu screen 93, when any one of the plurality of items (selected images 931 to 935) is selected by the player by operating the enter button 21B, the display screen corresponding to the selected item is displayed. Transition. For example, when the selection image 933 of “game setting customization” is selected by the player, the screen shifts to a game setting screen 94 shown in FIG. 53 (C). The game setting screen 94 includes a plurality of selection images 941 to 945, a cursor image 936, and a selection determination unit image 937. Note that the cursor image 936 and the selection determination unit image 937 are the same as those in the case of the top menu screen 93, and thus description thereof is omitted. In the following, when the same is applied to the cursor image 936 and the selection determining unit image 937 on the top menu screen 93, the same reference numerals are given and the description is omitted.

  The plurality of selection images 941 to 945 of the game setting screen 94 show a plurality of selectable items (display screens at the transition destination) and allow the player to select a desired item from the plurality of items. It is an image. The plurality of selection images 941 to 945 include a selection image 943 of “normal music selection setting”, a selection image 944 of “setting history music selection setting”, and a selection image 945 of “return to top menu”.

  Here, FIG. 54 (A) shows an example of the game setting screen 94 similarly to FIG. 53 (C), and FIGS. 54 (B), 54 (C) and 54 (D) show various examples. It is an example of a display screen which shifts from the game setting screen 94. Specifically, FIG. 54 (B) is an example of a setting item selection screen 95, FIG. 54 (C) is an example of a setting history selection screen 96, and FIG. 54 (D) is the same as FIG. 53 (B). 9 shows an example of the top menu screen 93. That is, when the selection image 943 of “normal music selection setting” is selected on the game setting screen shown in FIG. 54 (A), the display screen shifts from the game setting screen 94 to the setting item selection screen 95 and “setting” When the selection image 944 of “history music selection setting” is selected, the display screen shifts from the game setting screen 94 to the setting history selection screen 96 shown in FIG. 54C, and the selection image 965 of “return to the top menu” is displayed. When selected, the display screen shifts from the game setting screen 94 to the above-described top menu screen 93 shown in FIG. Hereinafter, the setting item selection screen 95 will be described with reference to FIG. 55, and the setting history selection screen 96 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The setting item selection screen 95 shown in FIG. 55 is a screen that allows individual selection of items related to song selection in the jackpot game. The setting item selection screen 95 includes a plurality of selection images 951 to 955. The “melody pattern” selection image 951 is an image selected when performing a melody pattern setting among the music selection setting items. When the selection image 951 is selected, the display screen shifts from the setting item selection screen 95 to the melody pattern setting screen 97. The selection image 952 of “display music list” is an image selected when performing a music list display setting among the music selection setting items. When the selection image 952 is selected, the display screen shifts from the setting item selection screen 95 to the music list display setting screen 98. The selection image 953 of “music selection button effect” is an image selected when performing a music selection button effect setting among the music selection setting items. When the selection image 953 is selected, the display screen shifts from the setting item selection screen 95 to the music selection button effect setting screen 99. The “return one” selection image 954 is an image selected when returning the display screen by one. When the selection image 954 is selected, the display screen shifts from the setting item selection screen 95 to a game setting screen 94 (see FIG. 54A) which is a display screen before shifting to the setting item selection screen 95. The selection image 955 of “Return to top menu” is an image selected when returning the display screen to the top menu screen 93. When the selection image 955 is selected, the display screen shifts from the setting item selection screen 95 to the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53 (B) and 54 (D)).

  The setting history selection screen 96 shown in FIG. 56 is a screen that displays the setting history of the items related to the song selection in the winning game, and allows the items related to the song selection in the big hit game to be individually selected. The setting history selection screen 96 includes a plurality of selection images 961 to 965. The selected image 961 of “melody pattern setting history” is an image selected when performing melody pattern setting based on the melody pattern setting history. When the selected image 961 is selected, the display screen shifts from the setting history selection screen 96 to the melody pattern setting history screen 87. The selection image 962 of the “music list display setting history” is an image selected when performing the music list display setting based on the music list display setting history. When the selected image 962 is selected, the display screen shifts from the setting history selection screen 96 to the music list display setting history screen 88. The selection image 963 of the “music selection button effect setting history” is an image selected when performing the music selection button effect setting based on the setting history of the music selection button effect. When the selection image 963 is selected, the display screen shifts from the setting history selection screen 96 to the music selection button effect setting history screen 89. The “return one” selection image 964 is an image selected when returning the display screen by one. When the selection image 964 is selected, the display screen shifts from the setting history selection screen 96 to the game setting screen 94 (FIG. 54 (A)) which is the display screen before shifting to the setting history selection screen 96. The selection image 965 of “return to top menu” is an image selected when returning the display screen to the top menu screen 93. When the selection image 965 is selected, the display screen shifts from the setting history selection screen 96 to the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53 (B) and 54 (D)).

<Step S3401>
Returning to the description of FIG. 52, in step S3401 in the game setting process, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the display screen is the fluctuation stop screen 92 (see FIG. 53 (A)). Specifically, the MPU 51 is set to ON when the value of the variable display counter updated in the counter update process (step S1707) of FIG. It is determined whether or not the display screen is the fluctuation stop screen 92 based on whether or not the fluctuation stop screen display flag set to ON in the screen transition processing is ON.

  When the display screen is the fluctuation stop screen 92 (Step S3401: Yes), the processing shifts to Step S3402. When the display screen is not the fluctuation stop screen 92 (Step S3401: No), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to Step S3403. I do.

<Step S3402>
In step S3402, the MPU 51 executes a game start standby process, and ends the game setting process. The details of the game start standby process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3403>
In step S3403, the MPU 51 determines whether the display screen is the top menu screen 93 (see FIG. 53 (B) and FIG. 54 (D)). Specifically, the MPU 51 sets a top menu screen display flag that is set to ON in a top menu screen transition process such as a step S3504 of a game start standby process of FIG. 57 described later and a step S3711 of a game setting screen process of FIG. 59 described later. It is determined whether or not the display screen is the top menu screen 93 based on whether or not the display is on. If the display screen is the top menu screen 93 (step S3403: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3404. If the display screen is not the top menu screen 93 (step S3403: NO), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3405.

<Step S3404>
In step S3404, the MPU 51 executes a top menu screen process, and ends the game setting process. The top menu screen processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3405>
In step S3405, the MPU 51 determines whether the display screen is the game setting screen 94 (see FIG. 54A). Specifically, the MPU 51 sets a game setting screen display flag that is set to ON in a game setting screen transition process such as a step S3609 of a top menu screen process of FIG. 58 described later and a step S3813 of a setting item selection process of FIG. It is determined whether or not the display screen is the game setting screen 94 based on whether or not the game setting screen is displayed. When the display screen is the game setting screen 94 (Step S3405: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to Step S3406, and when the display screen is not the game setting screen 94 (Step S3405: No), shifts the processing to Step S3407. I do.

<Step S3406>
In step S3406, the MPU 51 executes a game setting screen process, and ends the game setting process. The details of the game setting screen processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3407>
In step S3407, the MPU 51 determines whether the display screen is the setting item selection screen 95 (see FIGS. 54 (B) and 55). More specifically, the MPU 51 displays a setting item selection screen that is set to ON in a setting item selection screen transition process such as a step S3707 of a game setting process of FIG. 59 described later and a step S3907 of a melody pattern setting screen process of FIG. It is determined whether or not the display screen is the setting item selection screen 95 based on whether or not the flag is on. When the display screen is the setting item selection screen 95 (step S3407: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3408, and when the display screen is not the setting item selection screen 95 (step S3407: No), the processing proceeds to step S3409. Move to

<Step S3408>
In step S3408, the MPU 51 executes a setting item selection process and ends the game setting process. The details of the setting item selection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3409>
In step S3409, the MPU 51 determines whether the display screen is the melody pattern setting screen 97 (see FIG. 62). Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the melody pattern setting screen display flag set to on in the melody pattern setting screen transition processing in step S3807 in the setting item selection processing in FIG. It is determined whether or not the display screen is the melody pattern setting screen 97. If the display screen is the melody pattern setting screen 97 (step S3409: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3410. If the display screen is not the melody pattern setting screen 97 (step S3409: No), the processing proceeds to step S3411. Move to

<Step S3410>
In step S3410, the MPU 51 executes a melody pattern setting screen process, and ends the game setting process. The melody pattern setting screen processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3411>
In step S3411, the MPU 51 determines whether the display screen is the music list display setting screen 98 (see FIG. 64A). Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the music list display setting screen display flag set to on in the music list display setting screen transition processing in step S3809 in the setting item selection processing in FIG. 60 described later is on. Then, it is determined whether or not the display screen is the music list display setting screen 98. When the display screen is the music list display setting screen 98 (step S3411: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3412, and when the display screen is not the music list display setting screen 98 (step S3411: No), the MPU 51 executes the processing. It moves to step S3413.

<Step S3412>
In step S3412, the MPU 51 executes a music list display setting screen process, and ends the game setting process. Details of the music list display setting screen processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3413>
In step S3413, the MPU 51 determines whether the display screen is the music selection button effect setting screen 99 (see FIG. 67). More specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the music selection button effect setting screen display flag set to on in the music selection button effect setting screen transition process of step S3811 in the setting item selection process of FIG. Then, it is determined whether or not the display screen is the music selection button effect setting screen 99. When the display screen is the music selection button effect setting screen 99 (step S3413: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3414, and when the display screen is not the music selection button effect setting screen 99 (step S3413: No), the MPU 51 performs the processing. It moves to step S3415.

<Step S3414>
In step S3414, the MPU 51 executes a music selection button effect setting screen process, and ends the game setting process. The details of the music selection button effect setting screen processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3415>
In step S3415, the MPU 51 determines whether the display screen is the setting history selection screen 96 (see FIGS. 54 (C) and 56). More specifically, the MPU 51 performs step S4307 in the melody pattern setting history screen processing in FIG. 69 described below, step S4407 in the music list display setting history screen processing in FIG. 71 described later, and the music selection button effect setting history in FIG. 73 described later. It is determined whether the display screen is the setting history selection screen 96 based on whether the setting history selection screen display flag set to ON in the setting history selection screen transition processing of step S4507 in the screen processing is ON. to decide. When the display screen is the setting history selection screen 96 (step S3415: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3416, and when the display screen is not the setting history selection screen 96 (step S3415: No), the processing proceeds to step S3417. Move to

<Step S3416>
In step S3416, the MPU 51 executes a setting history selection process, and ends the game setting process. The details of the setting history selection processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3417>
In step S3417, the MPU 51 determines whether the display screen is the melody pattern setting history screen 87 (see FIG. 70). Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the melody pattern setting history screen display flag that is set to on in the melody pattern setting history screen transition processing of step S4207 in the setting history selection processing of FIG. 68 described later is on. Then, it is determined whether or not the display screen is the melody pattern setting history screen 87. If the display screen is the melody pattern setting history screen 87 (step S3417: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3418. If the display screen is not the melody pattern setting history screen 87 (step S3417: No), the MPU 51 executes the processing. It moves to step S3419.

<Step S3418>
In step S3418, the MPU 51 executes a melody pattern setting history screen process, and ends the game setting process. The details of the melody pattern setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3419>
In step S3419, the MPU 51 determines whether the display screen is the music list display setting history screen 88 (see FIG. 72). Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the music list display setting history screen display flag set to on in the music list display history screen transition processing in step S4209 in the setting history selection processing in FIG. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the display screen is the music list display setting history screen 88. When the display screen is the music list display setting history screen 88 (step S3419: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3420, and when the display screen is not the music list display setting history screen 88 (step S3419: No), The process moves to step S3421.

<Step S3420>
In step S3420, the MPU 51 executes the music list display setting history screen processing, and ends the game setting processing. Details of the music list display setting history screen processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3421>
In step S3421, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the display screen is the music selection button effect setting history screen 89 (see FIG. 74). Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the music selection button effect setting history screen display flag set to ON in the music selection button effect history screen transition process of step S4211 in the setting history selection process of FIG. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the display screen is the music selection button effect setting history screen 89. If the display screen is the music selection button effect setting history screen 89 (step S3421: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3422, and if the display screen is not the music selection button effect setting history screen 89 (step S3421: No), The process moves to step S3423.

<Step S3422>
In step S3422, the MPU 51 executes a music selection button effect history screen process, and ends the game setting process. The details of the music selection button effect history screen processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3423>
In step S3423, the MPU 51 changes the display screen to the fluctuation stop screen 92, the top menu screen 93, the game setting screen 94, the setting item selection screen 95, the setting history selection screen 96, the melody pattern setting screen 97, the music list display setting screen 98, and the music selection. If it is not any of the button effect setting screen 99, the melody pattern setting history screen 87, the music list display setting history screen 88, and the music selection button effect setting history screen 89, other processing corresponding to the current display screen is executed, and the game setting is performed. The process ends.

[Game start waiting process]
Here, FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game start standby process (step S3402 of the game setting process in FIG. 52). In the game start standby process, the display screen is changed from the fluctuation stop screen 92 (see FIG. 53 (A)) to the top menu screen 93 (see FIG. 53 (B) and FIG. 54 (D)) in response to the operation of the operation button 20 by the player. ) Is performed.

<Step S3501>
In step S3501, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has been started in the symbol display unit 341. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the fluctuation of the main symbol has started based on whether or not the value of the fluctuation display counter is 0. The MPU 51 determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has started when the value of the fluctuation display counter is not 0.

  When the MPU 51 determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has started (Step S3501: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the game start standby process and determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has not started (Step S3501: No). ) And the process moves to step S3502.

<Step S3502>
In step S3502, the MPU 51 determines whether the player has operated the operation button 20 based on the first to third operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18A). If the MPU 51 determines that the operation button 20 has been operated (step S3502: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3503, and if the MPU 51 determines that the operation button 20 has not been operated (step S3502: No), the game starts. The standby processing ends.

<Step S3503>
In step S3503, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the shift to the fluctuation stop screen 92. For example, when the fluctuation stop screen 92 is displayed (when the value of the fluctuation display counter becomes 0), the MPU 51 starts counting by the time counter, and refers to the value of the time counter to change the fluctuation stop screen 92. Can be grasped from when is displayed.

  When determining that the predetermined time has elapsed (step S3503: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3504, and when determining that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S3503: NO), the game start standby processing To end.

<Step S3504>
In step S3504, since the MPU 51 can determine that the operation button 20 has been operated after a predetermined time has elapsed since the shift to the fluctuation stop screen 92 (step S3502: Yes and step S3503: Yes), the player performs an operation on the operation button 20. The display screen is shifted from the fluctuation stop screen 92 to the top menu screen 93 in accordance with. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen display flag to ON.

[Top menu screen processing]
Here, FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the top menu screen process (step S3404 of the game setting process in FIG. 52). In the top menu screen processing, from the plurality of selection images 941 to 945 displayed on the top menu screen 93 (see FIG. 53 (B) and FIG. 54 (D)), the items selected by the player operating the selection determining unit 21 are displayed. Processing for shifting the display screen to the corresponding screen is executed.

<Step S3601>
In step S3601, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the main symbol 921 has started to change in the symbol display unit 341 based on whether or not the value of the variable display counter is 0. When the MPU 51 determines that the change of the main symbol 921 has started (Step S3601: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to Step S3602, and determines that the change of the main symbol 921 has not started (Step S3601: No). Then, the process shifts to step S3603.

<Step S3602>
When the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 is started (Step S3601: Yes), the top menu screen display flag is set to off (Step S3602), and the top menu screen processing ends.

<Step S3603>
In step S3603, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether the upper selection operation pattern flag (see FIG. 18B) and the first to third lower selection operation pattern flag (see FIG. 18C) are higher. It is determined whether the selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212 has been operated by the player.

  If the MPU 51 determines that an operation has been performed on the selection button 21A (step S3603: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3604, and determines that an operation has not been performed on the selection button 21A (step S3603: NO). Is shifted to step S3605.

<Step S3604>
If it is determined that an operation has been performed on the selection button 21A (step S3603: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the temporary selection display on the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53 (B) and 54 (D)). Is executed (step S3604). For example, when the upper selection button 211 is operated while the selection image 933 of “game setting customization” shown in FIGS. 53 (B) and 54 (D) is temporarily selected, the cursor image 936 is selected. The image is moved to the side of the selected image 932 which is one level higher than the selected image 933. At this time, the selection image indicating that the temporary selection is displayed is changed from the selection image 933 to the selection image 932. On the other hand, when the lower selection button 212 is operated in a state where the selection image 933 of “game setting customization” is provisionally selected, the MPU 51 moves the cursor image 936 to the side of the selection image 934 one level below the selection image 933. The selected image is moved from the selected image 933 to the selected image 934 to indicate that the image is tentatively selected and displayed. When the processing in step S3604 ends, the MPU 51 ends the top menu screen processing.

  Note that when the display screen is the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53 (B) and 54 (D)), the MPU 51 displays the cursor image 936 and the cursor image 936 even when the left selection button 213 or the right selection button 214 is operated. Processing such as moving the temporary selection display of the selected images 941 to 945 is not executed.

<Step S3605>
In step S3605, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the determination button 21B. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the decision button 21B has been operated by the player based on the first to third decision operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18F).

  If the MPU 51 determines that an operation has been performed on the determination button 21B (step S3605: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3606, and if the MPU 51 determines that an operation has not been performed on the selection button 21A (step S3605: No), The top menu screen processing ends.

<Step S3606>
In step S3606, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the “end” selection image 935 (see FIG. 53 (B) and FIG. 54 (D)) on the top menu screen 93 has been selected by the operation of the determination button 21B by the player. I do. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “end”. If the MPU 51 determines that the “finished” selected image 935 has been selected (step S3606: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3607, and determines that the “finished” selected image 935 has not been selected (step S3606). S3606: No), the process moves to step S3608.

<Step S3607>
If the MPU 51 determines that the “end” selected image 935 has been selected (step S3606: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53 (B) and 54 (D)) to the fluctuation stop screen 92 ( A change stop screen shift process for shifting to (FIG. 53A) is executed (step S3607). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen display flag to off, sets the variable stop screen display flag to on, and ends the top menu screen processing.

<Step S3608>
In step S3608, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 933 (see FIG. 53 (B) and FIG. 54 (D)) of “game setting customization” on the top menu screen 93 has been selected by the operation of the determination button 21B by the player. Judge. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “game setting customization”. When determining that the selection image 935 of “game setting customization” is selected (step S3608: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3609, and determines that the selection image 935 of “game setting customization” is not selected. If so (step S3608: No), the process moves to step S3610.

<Step S3609>
When determining that the selection image 935 of “game setting customization” has been selected (step S3608: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the top menu screen 93 (see FIG. 53 (B) and FIG. 54 (D)) to the game setting screen. A game setting screen shift process for shifting to 94 (see FIG. 53 (C) and FIG. 54 (A)) is executed (step S3609). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen display flag to off, sets the game setting screen display flag to on, and ends the top menu screen processing.

<Step S3610>
In step S3610, the MPU 51 shifts to a display screen corresponding to the item selected by the player when the item selected by the operation of the determination button 21B by the player is other than “end” and “game setting customization”. . At this time, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen display flag to off.

[Game setting screen processing]
Here, FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game setting screen process (step S3406 of the game setting process in FIG. 52). In the game setting screen processing, a setting item selection screen 95 (see FIG. 54 (B)), a setting item selection screen 95 (see FIG. 54 (B)), a setting item selection screen 95 (see FIG. 54 (B)), and a setting history Processing for shifting the display screen to the screen 96 (see FIG. 54 (C)) or the top menu screen (see FIG. 54 (D)) is executed.

<Step S3701>
In step S3701, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has started in the symbol display unit 341 based on whether or not the value of the fluctuation display counter is 0. When the MPU 51 determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has started (step S3701: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3702, and determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has not started (step S3701: No). The process moves to step S3703.

<Step S3702>
When the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 is started (Step S3701: Yes), the game setting screen display flag is set to off (Step S3702), and the game setting screen processing ends.

<Step S3703>
In step S3703, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether the upper selection operation pattern flag (see FIG. 18B) and the first to third lower selection operation pattern flag (see FIG. 18C) are higher. It is determined whether the selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212 has been operated by the player.

  If the MPU 51 determines that an operation has been performed on the selection button 21A (step S3703: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3704, and determines that an operation has not been performed on the selection button 21A (step S3703: NO). Is shifted to step S3705.

<Step S3704>
In step S3704, the MPU 51 determines whether the operated selection button 21A is one of the upper selection button 211 and the lower selection button 212, similarly to the temporary selection display change processing in step S3604 in the top menu screen processing of FIG. In response to this, a temporary selection display change process of moving the cursor image 936 and the temporary selection display upward or downward on the game setting screen 94 is executed. When the processing in step S3704 ends, the MPU 51 ends the game setting screen processing.

<Step S3705>
In step S3705, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has performed an operation on the determination button 21B based on the first to third determination operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18F). If the MPU 51 determines that the operation on the determination button 21B has been performed (step S3705: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3706, and determines that the operation on the determination button 21B has not been performed (step S3705: No). The game setting screen processing ends.

<Step S3706>
In step S3706, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 943 (see FIG. 54A) of the “normal music selection setting” on the game setting screen 94 has been selected by the operation of the determination button 21B by the player. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “normal music selection setting”. When the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 943 of “normal music selection setting” has been selected (step S3706: Yes), the processing proceeds to step S3707, and determines that the selection image 943 of “normal music selection setting” has not been selected. If so (step S3706: No), the process moves to step S3708.

<Step S3707>
If the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 943 of “normal music selection setting” has been selected (step S3706: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the game setting screen 94 (see FIGS. 53 (C) and 54 (A)) to the setting items. A setting item selection screen transition process for transitioning to the selection screen 95 (see FIGS. 54B and 55) is executed (step S3707). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the game setting screen display flag to off, sets the setting item selection screen display flag to on, and ends the game setting screen processing.

<Step S3708>
In step S3708, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 944 (see FIG. 54A) of the “setting history music selection setting” on the game setting screen 94 has been selected by the operation of the determination button 21B by the player. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “setting history music selection setting”. When the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 944 of “setting history music selection setting” has been selected (step S3708: Yes), the processing proceeds to step S3709, and the selection image 944 of “setting history music selection setting” has not been selected. If it is determined (No at Step S3708), the process proceeds to Step S3710.

<Step S3709>
If it is determined that the selection image 944 of “setting history song selection setting” has been selected (step S3708: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the display screen from the game setting screen 94 (see FIG. 53 (C) and FIG. 54 (A)). A setting history selection screen shift process for shifting to the history selection screen 96 (see FIG. 54C) is executed (step S3709). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the game setting screen display flag to off, sets the setting history selection screen display flag to on, and ends the game setting screen processing.

<Step S3710>
In step S3710, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 945 of “return to top menu” on the game setting screen 94 has been selected by the operation of the determination button 21B by the player. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “return to the top menu”. If the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 945 of “return to the top menu” has been selected (step S3710: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3711, and determines that the selection image 945 of “return to the top menu” has not been selected. If so (step S3710: No), the process moves to step S3712.

<Step S3711>
When it is determined that the selection image 945 of “Return to top menu” is selected (step S3710: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the game setting screen 94 (see FIG. 53 (C) and FIG. 54 (A)) to the top menu screen. 93 (see FIG. 53 (B) and FIG. 54 (D)) to execute a top menu screen transition process (step S3711). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen display flag to on while setting the game setting screen display flag to off, and ends the game setting screen processing.

<Step S3712>
In step S3712, the MPU 51 selects the item selected by the player when the item selected by the operation on the determination button 21B is other than "normal music selection setting", "setting history music selection setting", and "return to the top menu". Move to the display screen corresponding to the item. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the game setting screen display flag to off.

[Setting item selection process]
FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the setting item selection process (step S3408 of the game setting process in FIG. 52). As shown in FIG. 55, in the setting item selection process, from the music selection related items at the time of the jackpot game displayed on the setting item selection screen 95, etc., in accordance with the item selected by the player operating the selection determining unit 21, Processing for shifting the display screen from the setting item selection screen 95 to various setting screens 97 to 99 and the like is executed. In the following, as the setting item selection processing, a case where the music selection related items are a melody pattern, a music list display (music selection image 83), and a music selection button effect will be described as an example. However, the music selection related items are not limited to the melody pattern, the music list display (the music selection image 83), and the music selection button effect. For example, instead of part or all of the melody pattern, the music list display (the music selection image 83), and the music selection button effect, it is possible to allow the player to set other music selection related items. For example, as other music selection related items, an initial provisionally selected music piece or an initial provisionally selected music piece fixation for fixing the selected music piece by setting by a player can be considered.

<Step S3801>
In step S3801, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has started in the symbol display unit 341 based on whether or not the value of the fluctuation display counter is 0. When the MPU 51 determines that the change of the main symbol 921 has started (Step S3801: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to Step S3802, and determines that the change of the main symbol 921 has not started (Step S3801: No). The process moves to step S3803.

<Step S3802>
When the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 is started (Step S3801: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the setting item selection screen display flag to off (Step S3802), and ends the setting item selection processing.

<Step S3803>
In step S3803, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. More specifically, the MPU 51 performs an upper selection button based on the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags and the first to third lower selection operation pattern flags (see FIGS. 18B and 18C). It is determined whether the player has operated the 211 or the lower selection button 212.

  If the MPU 51 determines that an operation has been performed on the selection button 21A (step S3803: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3804, and determines that an operation has not been performed on the selection button 21A (step S3803: No). Is shifted to step S3805.

<Step S3804>
If it is determined that an operation has been performed on the selection button 21A (step S3603: YES), the MPU 51 determines that the operated selection button 21A is the upper selection button similarly to the temporary selection display change processing of step S3604 in the top menu screen processing of FIG. A temporary selection display change process of moving the cursor image 946 and the temporary selection display upward or downward in the setting item selection screen 95 is executed according to which of the button 211 and the lower selection button 212 (step). S3804). When the processing in step S3804 ends, the MPU 51 ends the game setting screen processing.

<Step S3805>
In step S3805, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has performed an operation on the determination button 21B based on the first to third determination operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18F). If the MPU 51 determines that the operation on the determination button 21B has been performed (step S3805: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3806, and determines that the operation on the determination button 21B has not been performed (step S3805: NO). The game setting screen processing ends.

<Step S3806>
In step S3806, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 951 (see FIG. 55) of “melody pattern setting” on the setting item selection screen 95 has been selected by the operation of the determination button 21B by the player. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “melody pattern setting”. When the MPU 51 determines that the selected image 951 of “melody pattern setting” has been selected (step S3806: Yes), the processing proceeds to step S3807, and determines that the selected image 951 of “melody pattern setting” has not been selected. If so (step S3806: No), the process moves to step S3808.

<Step S3807>
When determining that the selection image 951 of “melody pattern setting” is selected (step S3806: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the setting item selection screen 95 to the melody pattern setting screen 97 as shown in FIG. The melody pattern setting screen shift processing is executed (step S3807). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the setting item selection screen display flag to off, sets the melody pattern setting screen display flag to on, and ends the game setting screen processing.

<Step S3808>
In step S3808, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 952 (see FIG. 55) of “song list display setting” on the setting item selection screen 95 has been selected by the player operating the enter button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “song list display setting”. When the MPU 51 determines that the selected image 952 of “song list display setting” has been selected (step S3808: Yes), the processing moves to step S3809, and the selected image 952 of “song list display setting” has not been selected. If it is determined (No at Step S3808), the process proceeds to Step S3810.

<Step S3809>
If it is determined that the selected image 952 of “song list display setting” has been selected (step S3808: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the setting item selection screen 95 to the music list display setting screen 98 as shown in FIG. The music list display setting screen shift processing to be shifted is executed (step S3809). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the setting item selection screen display flag to off, sets the music list display setting screen display flag to on, and ends the setting item selection screen processing.

<Step S3810>
In step S3810, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 953 (see FIG. 55) of the “tune selection button effect setting” on the setting item selection screen 95 is selected by the operation of the determination button 21B by the player. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is "tune selection button effect setting". When the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 953 of “tune selection button effect setting” has been selected (step S3810: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3811, and the selection image 953 of “tune selection button effect setting” is not selected. If it is determined (No at Step S3810), the process proceeds to Step S3812.

<Step S3811>
If it is determined that the selection image 953 of “tune selection button effect setting” has been selected (step S3810: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the setting item selection screen 95 to the music selection button effect setting screen 99, as shown in FIG. A music selection button effect setting screen shift process to be shifted is executed (step S3811). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the setting item selection screen display flag to off, sets the music selection button effect setting screen display flag to on, and ends the setting item selection screen processing.

<Step S3812>
In step S3812, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 954 (see FIG. 55) of “return one” on the setting item selection screen 95 is selected by the operation of the determination button 21B by the player. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is an item of "return one." If the MPU 51 determines that the “return one” selection image 954 has been selected (step S3812: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3813 and determines that the “return one” selection image 954 has not been selected. If so (step S3812: No), the process moves to step S3814.

<Step S3813>
If it is determined that the selection image 954 of “return one” has been selected (step S3812: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the setting item selection screen 95 to the game setting screen 94 as shown in FIG. 55 (FIG. 55). Step S3813). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the game setting screen display flag to off while setting the game setting screen display flag to off, and ends the setting item selection process.

<Step S3814>
If the item selected by the player's operation on the determination button 21B is other than “melody pattern setting”, “song list display setting”, “song selection button effect setting”, and “return by one”, the MPU 51 Since it can be determined that "RETURN" has been selected, as shown in FIG. 55, a top menu screen shift process for shifting the display screen from the setting item selection screen 95 to the top menu screen 93 is executed (step S3814). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the setting item selection screen display flag to off, and sets the top menu screen display flag to on.

[Melody pattern setting screen processing]
Here, FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the melody pattern setting screen processing (step S3410 of the game setting processing in FIG. 52). In the melody pattern setting screen processing, a process for setting a melody pattern (start of music output) of the temporarily selected music and the selected music output from the speaker 26 in the big hit game is executed. FIG. 62 shows an example of the melody pattern setting screen 97. In the following, the melody pattern setting screen 97 will be described first with reference to FIG. 62, and then the melody pattern setting screen processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 62, the melody pattern setting screen 97 is a screen for setting the melody pattern (output start portion) of the tentatively selected tune in the jackpot game and the unselected tune and the already-selected tune as the selected tune. . The melody pattern setting screen 97 includes selection images 974 to 976 and a selection determination section image 977 in addition to the tentatively selected music setting image 971, the unselected music setting image 972, and the already-selected music setting image 973.

  The temporarily selected music setting image 971 is an image for setting the melody pattern of the temporarily selected music. That is, the temporarily selected music setting image 971 is an image for setting whether to start output from the singing start portion or to start from the chorus portion when the temporarily selected music is selected by the player, and sing the output start. There is a singing start selection image for setting to be performed from the start portion, and a rust selection image for setting to start output from the climax portion.

  The unselected song setting image 972 is an image for setting a melody pattern when the selected song is an unselected song. That is, the unselected song setting image 972 is an image for setting whether to start output from the singing portion or start from the chorus portion when an unselected song is selected by the player, and sing the output start. There is a singing start selection image for setting to be performed from the start portion, and a rust selection image for setting to start output from the climax portion.

  The selected music setting image 973 is an image for setting a melody pattern when the selected music is a selected music. That is, the already-selected music setting image 973 is an image for setting whether to start output from the singing out portion or to start from the chorus portion when the already-selected music is selected by the player. There is a singing start selection image for setting to start from the singing start portion, and a rust selection image for setting to start output from the climax portion.

  The plurality of selected images 974 to 976 are “return one” selection image 974 which is selected when the display screen is returned by one to shift to the setting item selection screen 95 (see FIGS. 54 (B) and 55). The selection image 975 of “Return to top menu” selected when shifting the display screen to the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53 (B) and 54 (D)), and the tentatively selected music, unselected music and already selected music And a selection image 976 of “Random” for causing the gaming machine 10 to set the output start of the game. In the present embodiment, when the automatic setting is performed by selecting the selected image 976 of “automatic”, the melody patterns of the tentatively selected music, the unselected music, and the already-selected music are all set to the default settings.

  The selection determining unit image 977 is an image imitating the selection determining unit 21 and is an image indicating that a desired item can be selected from a plurality of items by operating the selection determining unit 21. In the selection deciding unit image 977, images corresponding to the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, and the right selection button 214 are marked with “selection”, and the selection buttons 211 to 214 are displayed. The corresponding image is highlighted. The images corresponding to the selection buttons 211 to 214 may be highlighted by blinking display or the like. In addition, in the selection determining section image 977, the word “determined” is added to the image corresponding to the determination button 21B, indicating that the operation should be performed when selecting the provisionally selected item.

<Step S3901>
Returning to the description of FIG. 61, in step S3901, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has started in the symbol display unit 341 based on whether or not the value of the fluctuation display counter is 0. When the MPU 51 determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has been started (Step S3901: Yes), the process proceeds to Step S3902, and determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has not started (Step S3901: No). The process moves to step S3903.

<Step S3902>
When the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 is started (Step S3901: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern setting screen display flag to off (Step S3902), and ends the melody pattern setting screen processing.

<Step S3903>
In step S3903, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, the MPU 51 includes a first to third upper selection operation pattern flags, first to third lower selection operation pattern flags, first to third left selection operation pattern flags, and first to third right selection operations. Based on the pattern flag (see FIGS. 18B to 18E), whether or not any of the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, and the right selection button 214 has been operated by the player Judge.

  If the MPU 51 determines that an operation has been performed on the selection button 21A (step S3903: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3904, and determines that an operation has not been performed on the selection button 21A (step S3903: NO). Is shifted to step S3905.

<Step S3904>
In step S3904, the MPU 51 determines whether the operated selection button 21A is one of the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, and the right selection button 214 on the melody pattern setting screen 97 according to the provisional selection. A temporary selection display change process for moving the display in one of up, down, left, and right directions is performed. When the processing in step S3904 ends, the MPU 51 ends the melody pattern setting screen processing.

<Step S3905>
In step S3905, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has performed an operation on the determination button 21B based on the first to third determination operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18F). If the MPU 51 determines that the operation on the determination button 21B has been performed (step S3905: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3906, and determines that the operation on the determination button 21B has not been performed (step S3905: No). The melody pattern setting screen processing ends.

<Step S3906>
In step S3906, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 974 (see FIG. 62) of “return one” on the melody pattern setting screen 97 is selected by the operation of the determination button 21B by the player. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is "return by one". When the MPU 51 determines that the “return one” selection image 974 has been selected (step S3906: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3907 and determines that the “return one” selection image 974 has not been selected. If so (step S3906: No), the process moves to step S3908.

<Step S3907>
If the MPU 51 determines that the “return one” selection image 974 has been selected (step S3906: YES), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the melody pattern setting screen 97 (see FIG. 62) to the setting item selection screen 95 (FIG. 54 (B)). ) And FIG. 55) is executed (step S3907). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern setting screen display flag to off, sets the setting item selection screen display flag to on, and ends the melody pattern setting screen processing.

<Step S3908>
In step S3908, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 975 (see FIG. 62) of “Return to top menu” on the melody pattern setting screen 97 has been selected by the operation of the determination button 21B by the player. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “return to the top menu”. When the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 975 of “return to the top menu” has been selected (step S3908: Yes), the processing proceeds to step S3909, and determines that the selection image 975 of “return to the top menu” has not been selected. If so (step S3908: No), the process moves to step S3910.

<Step S3909>
If it is determined that the selection image 975 of “Return to top menu” is selected (step S3908: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the melody pattern setting screen 97 (see FIG. 62) to the top menu screen 93 (see FIG. 53 (B) and FIG. A top menu screen shift process for shifting to FIG. 54 (D) is executed (step S3909). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern setting screen display flag to off, sets the top menu screen display flag to on, and ends the melody pattern setting screen processing.

<Step S3910>
In step S3910, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 976 of “Random” on the melody pattern setting screen 97 (see FIG. 62) is selected by the operation of the determination button 21B by the player. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item that has been provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “automatic”. If the MPU 51 determines that the selected image 976 of “Random” has been selected (step S3910: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3911, and determines that the selected image 976 of “automatic” has not been selected (step S3911). (S3910: No), the process moves to step S3912.

<Step S3911>
If it is determined that the selected image 976 of “Random” has been selected (step S3910: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the melody patterns of the tentatively-selected tune, the unselected tune, and the already-selected tune as default (step S3911). Here, the default setting of the melody pattern is such that the melody pattern 2 starts output from the chorus portion for the temporarily selected song, and the melody pattern 2 starts output from the singing start portion (A melody portion) for the selected song as the selected song. A melody pattern 1 and a melody pattern 2 which is an unselected song as a selected song is an output start from a chorus portion (see FIG. 38).

<Step S3912>
When it is determined that the selection image 976 of “automatic selection” is not selected (step S3910: No), that is, the operation of the determination button 21B by the player is “return one”, “return to top menu”, or “automatic selection” If it does not correspond to the operation for the item No., the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern to the setting temporarily selected in the tentatively selected music setting image 971, the unselected music setting image 972, and the already selected music setting image 973 (step S3912). ). For example, when the deciding button 21B is determined in the tentatively selected state shown in FIG. 62, the melody pattern 2 for starting the output from the chorus portion for the tentatively selected tune, and the singing for the unselected tune as the selected tune. A melody pattern 1 that starts output from the output portion (A melody portion) and a melody pattern 2 that starts output from the chorus portion for a selected tune as a selected tune are set. At this time, the MPU 51 stores the setting content and the setting time of the melody pattern in the RAM 512. This allows the melody pattern setting history screen 87 (see FIG. 70) to be displayed in the melody pattern setting history screen processing of FIG. 69 described later.

  In this manner, in step S3912, the player selects and sets the melody pattern (output start portion) of the tentatively selected song and the melody pattern (output start portion) of the unselected song and the already-selected song as the selected song. Operation can be performed on the unit 21. Therefore, the player can select whether to listen to the tentatively selected music piece and the selected music piece from the beginning or to listen to the climax part having the highest climax according to his / her taste. This makes it easier to determine whether the tentatively selected tune is a favorite tune, and allows the user to enjoy the selected tune in accordance with his or her preference in both the case of the unselected tune and the already-selected tune.

<Step S3913>
In step S3913, the MPU 51 performs a melody pattern setting flag setting process according to the player setting. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets a melody pattern setting flag to ON for an item set to a melody pattern different from the default setting. Here, the melody pattern setting flag includes a temporarily selected song melody pattern setting flag for the temporarily selected song, an unselected song melody pattern setting flag for the unselected song, and a selected song melody pattern setting flag for the already selected song. For example, when the determination operation is performed on the determination button 21B in the tentative selection state shown in FIG. 62, the unselected music and the selected music set to the melody pattern different from the default setting are set to the unselected music melody pattern setting flag and The selected music melody pattern setting flag is set to ON.

<Step S3914>
In step S3914, the MPU 51 executes a top menu screen shift process for shifting the display screen from the melody pattern setting screen 97 (see FIG. 62) to the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53 (B) and 54 (D)). That is, when the melody pattern of the tentatively selected music piece, the unselected music piece, and the already selected music piece is set, the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the melody pattern setting screen to the top menu screen 93. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern setting screen display flag to off, sets the top menu screen display flag to on, and ends the melody pattern setting screen processing.

[Song list display setting screen processing]
Here, FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the music list display setting screen processing (step S3412 of the game setting processing in FIG. 52). In the music list display setting screen processing, the non-selected music image 834 for the dislike music (non-selected music) and the selected music image 831 (see FIG. 25) for the favorite music (selected music) of the music selection image 83 in the jackpot game are displayed. For performing display setting relating to the presence / absence (display mode) is performed. FIG. 64A shows an example of the music list display setting screen 98, and FIGS. 64B, 65A and 65B show examples of the display mode of the music selection image display screen 82. . Hereinafter, the display modes of the music list display setting screen 98 and the music selection image display screen 82 will be described first with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65, and then the music selection image display processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  The music list display setting screen 98 shown in FIG. 64 (A) is a screen for setting the display mode of the music selection image 83 (see FIG. 25) displayed on the music selection image display screen 82 in the jackpot game. . The music list display setting screen 98 includes, in addition to the dislike music selection image 981 and the favorite music selection image 982, the selection images 974 to 976 and the selection determination section image 977 as in the melody pattern setting screen 97. Note that the selection images 974 to 976 and the selection determination unit image 977 are the same as those in the case of the melody pattern setting screen 97, and thus description thereof will be omitted. In the following, when the selected images 974 to 976 and the selection determining unit image 977 on the melody pattern setting screen 97 are the same, the same reference numerals are given and the description is omitted.

  The dislike music selection image 981 is an image for setting whether to display the non-selected music image 834 (see FIG. 25) for the dislike selected music (non-selected music) on the music selection image display screen 82. This dislike music selection image 981 is a display selection image selected when setting to display the non-selected music image 834 and a non-display selection image selected when setting to hide the non-selected music image 834 are performed. Have. In the present embodiment, “to hide the non-selected music image 834” does not mean that the music selection image 83 for the non-selected music is not displayed, but the music selection image 83 for the non-selected music is not selected other than the non-selected music. This means that the music is displayed without distinction in the same manner as the unselected music image 833 for the music. For example, when the setting for hiding the non-selected music image 834 is performed, the music selection image display screen 82 has a display mode as shown in FIG.

  Note that, in a case where the setting for hiding the non-selected music image 834 is performed, it is considered as another embodiment that the music selection image 83 for the non-selected music is not displayed. According to such another embodiment, when the non-selected music image 834 is set to non-display, the non-selected music that has not been selected by the player despite having been previously selected as the initial temporarily selected music is incorrectly selected. Selection can be avoided.

  The favorite music selection image 982 is an image for setting whether to display the selected music image 831 (see FIG. 25) for the favorite music (selected music) on the music selection image display screen 82. The favorite music selection image 982 includes a display selection image selected when setting to display the selected music image 831 and a non-display selection image selected when setting to hide the selected music image 831 are performed. Have. In the present embodiment, “hiding the selected music image 831” does not mean that the music selection image 83 corresponding to the selected music is not displayed, but that the music selection image 83 corresponding to the selected music is not selected other than the non-selected music. This means that the music is displayed without distinction in the same manner as the unselected music image 833 for the music. For example, when the setting for hiding the selected music image 831 is performed, the music selection image display screen 82 has a display mode as shown in FIG.

  Note that, in a case where the setting for hiding the already-selected music image 831 is performed, it is conceivable as another embodiment that the music selection image 83 for the already-selected music is not displayed. According to such another embodiment, when the already-selected music image 831 is set to non-display, it is possible to prevent the player from repeatedly selecting the already-selected music previously selected.

  As shown in FIG. 65 (B), when both the non-selected music image 834 and the already-selected music image 831 are set to non-display, the music selection images 83 other than the temporarily selected music image 832 are displayed in the same manner. You.

<Step S4001>
Returning to the description of FIG. 63, in step S4001, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has started in the symbol display unit 341 based on whether or not the value of the fluctuation display counter is 0. When the MPU 51 determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has started (Step S4001: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to Step S4002, and determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has not started (Step S4001: No). The process moves to step S4003.

<Step S4002>
When the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 is started (Step S4001: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the music list display setting screen display flag to off (Step S4002), and ends the music list display setting screen processing.

<Step S4003>
In step S4003, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, the MPU 51 includes a first to third upper selection operation pattern flags, first to third lower selection operation pattern flags, first to third left selection operation pattern flags, and first to third right selection operations. Based on the pattern flag (see FIGS. 18B to 18E), whether or not any of the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, and the right selection button 214 has been operated by the player Judge.

  If MPU 51 determines that an operation has been performed on selection button 21A (step S4003: Yes), it moves the process to step S4004, and determines that an operation has not been performed on selection button 21A (step S4003: No). Shifts to step S4005.

<Step S4004>
In step S4004, the MPU 51 determines whether the operated selection button 21A is one of the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, and the right selection button 214 on the music list display setting screen 98 according to the temporary selection. A temporary selection display change process of moving the selection display in one of the up, down, left, and right directions is executed. When the processing in step S4004 ends, the MPU 51 ends the music list display setting screen processing.

<Step S4005>
In step S4005, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has performed an operation on the determination button 21B based on the first to third determination operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18F). If the MPU 51 determines that the operation on the determination button 21B has been performed (step S4005: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4006, and if the MPU 51 determines that the operation on the determination button 21B has not been performed (step S4005: No), The music list display setting screen processing ends.

<Step S4006>
In step S4006, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player operates the enter button 21B to select the “return one” selection image 974 (see FIG. 64A) on the music list display setting screen 98. . That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is "return by one". When the MPU 51 determines that the “return one” selection image 974 has been selected (step S4006: Yes), the processing moves to step S4007, and determines that the “return one” selection image 974 has not been selected. If so (step S4006: No), the process moves to step S4008.

<Step S4007>
When determining that the selected image 974 of “return one” has been selected (step S4006: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the music list display setting screen 98 (see FIG. 64A) to the setting item selection screen 95 (see FIG. 64A). The process moves to the setting item selection screen shown in FIG. 54 (B) and FIG. 55) (step S4007). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the music list display setting screen display flag to off, sets the setting item selection screen display flag to on, and ends the music list display setting screen processing.

<Step S4008>
In step S4008, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 975 (see FIG. 64A) of the “return to top menu” on the music list display setting screen 98 has been selected by the player operating the enter button 21B. . That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “return to the top menu”. If the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 975 of “return to the top menu” has been selected (step S4008: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4009, and determines that the selection image 975 of “return to the top menu” has not been selected. If so (step S4008: No), the process moves to step S4010.

<Step S4009>
If it is determined that the selection image 975 of “Return to top menu” is selected (step S4008: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the music list display setting screen 98 (see FIG. 64A) to the top menu screen 93 (FIG. 53). A top menu screen shift process for shifting to (B) and FIG. 54 (D)) is executed (step S4009). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the music list display setting screen display flag to off, sets the top menu screen display flag to on, and ends the music list display setting screen processing.

<Step S4010>
In step S4010, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 976 (see FIG. 64 (A)) of “Random” on the music list display setting screen 98 has been selected by the player operating the enter button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item that has been provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “automatic”. When the MPU 51 determines that the selected image 976 of “Random” has been selected (step S4010: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4011, and determines that the selected image 976 of “Random” has not been selected (step S4010). (S4010: No), the process moves to step S4012.

<Step S4011>
If the MPU 51 determines that the selected image 976 of “Random” has been selected (step S4010: Yes), the MPU 51 selects an unselected music image 834 for the disliked selected music (non-selected music) on the music selection image display screen 82 (see FIG. 25). The display setting of the selected music image 831 (see FIG. 25) for the favorite music (selected music) is set as default (step S4011). Here, the default setting of the display setting is a setting in which both the non-selected music image 834 and the already-selected music image 831 are displayed (see FIG. 25).

<Step S4012>
When it is determined that the selection image 976 of “Random” is not selected (step S4010: No), that is, the operation of the determination button 21B by the player is “return one”, “return to the top menu”, or “random” If the operation does not correspond to the operation of the item No., the MPU 51 sets the non-selected music image 834 and the selected music image to the settings temporarily selected for the dislike selected music (non-selected music) and the favorite selected music (selected music). 831 (see FIG. 25) is set (step S4012). For example, when the determination operation is performed on the determination button 21B in the temporary selection state illustrated in FIG. 64A, the non-selected music image 834 is displayed, and the selected music image 831 is set to non-display. At this time, the MPU 51 stores the setting content and the setting time of the music selection image 83 in the RAM 512. Thereby, in the music list display setting history screen processing of FIG. 71 described later, it is possible to display the music list display setting history screen 88 (see FIG. 72).

  As described above, in step S4012, the display or non-display of the selected music image 831 and the non-selected music (disliked music) image 834 included in the music selection image 83 can be set, so that the display mode is adjusted to the preference of the player. The music selection image 83 can be displayed on the symbol display section 341. Thereby, the player can select the music to be output from the speaker 26 based on the music selection image 83 in the display mode set by the player. In addition, the player makes the non-display setting of the already-selected music image 831 so that, for example, the already-selected music image 831 for the already-selected music selected by the previous player in the past is included in the music selection image 83. In some cases, the music selection image 83 that does not include the already-selected music image 831 can be displayed. Similarly, the player performs the non-display setting of the non-selected music image 834 so that, for example, the music selection image 83 includes the non-selected music image 834 for the non-selected music that the previous player did not select in the past. For example, the music selection image 83 that does not include the non-selected music image 834 can be displayed.

<Step S4013>
In step S4013, the MPU 51 performs a non-display setting flag setting process according to the player setting. Specifically, a non-display setting flag is set to ON for an item set to “non-display” different from the default setting. Here, the non-display setting flag includes a non-selected music image non-display setting flag for a disliked selected music (non-selected music) and a selected music image non-display setting flag for a favorite selected music (selected music). For example, when a determination operation is performed on the determination button 21B in the provisional selection state illustrated in FIG. 64A, for a favorite selection music (selected music) having a display setting different from the default setting, the selected music image non-selected is selected. The display setting flag is set to ON.

<Step S4014>
In step S4014, the MPU 51 performs a top menu screen shift process of shifting the display screen from the music list display setting screen 98 (see FIG. 64 (A)) to the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53 (B) and 54 (D)). Execute. That is, when the display setting of the non-selected music image 834 and the selected music image 831 is completed, the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the music list display setting screen 98 to the top menu screen 93. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the music list display setting screen display flag to off, sets the top menu screen display flag to on, and ends the music list display setting screen processing.

[Song selection button effect setting screen processing]
Here, FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the music selection button effect setting screen process (step S3414 of the game setting process in FIG. 52). In the music selection button effect setting screen process, a process for performing settings related to the music selection button effect executed when selecting a song in the jackpot game is executed. FIG. 67 shows an example of the music selection button effect setting screen 99. In the following, the music selection button effect setting screen 99 will be described first with reference to FIG. 67, and then the music selection image display processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  The music selection button effect setting screen 99 shown in FIG. 67 is a screen for performing settings related to the music selection button effect executed when selecting a music piece in the jackpot game. The music selection button effect setting screen 99 includes, in addition to the melody pattern setting screen 97, the selection images 974 to 976 and the selection images, in addition to the melody pattern setting screen 97, in addition to the expected degree suggestive effect setting image 991, the probability change confirmed effect setting image 992, and the held consecutive cottage confirmed effect setting image 993. A determination unit image 977 is included.

  The expectation suggestion effect setting image 991 is an image for setting whether to execute the expectation suggestion effect at the time of selecting a song in the jackpot game. The expected degree suggestion effect setting image 991 is an execution selection image (an image of “execute”) for setting execution of an expected degree suggestion effect, and a non-execution selection image (set of not executing an expectation degree suggestion effect) ( "Do not run" image). Note that the expected degree suggestion effect is an effect that indicates the degree of expectation that the promotion effect will be executed as described above. In the present embodiment, the suggestion effects 1 to 8 described with reference to FIG. 44 correspond thereto.

  The probability-change-determined effect setting image 992 is an image for setting whether to execute the probability-change-determined effect at the time of selecting a song in the jackpot game. The probable change confirmation effect setting image 992 is an execution selection image (image of “execute”) for setting execution of the probabilistic change effect, and a non-execution selection image (“not executed”) for setting not to execute the probabilistic change effect. Image). Note that the certainty-determined effect is an effect that clearly indicates that the promotion effect is executed as described above. In the present embodiment, the fixed effect 1 and the fixed effect 3 described with reference to FIG. 44 correspond thereto.

  The reserved extended-village-determined effect setting image 993 is an image for setting whether or not to execute the reserved extended-village-determined effect at the time of selecting a song in the jackpot game. The reserved extended-village-determined effect setting image 993 includes an execution selection image (image of “execute”) for setting to execute the reserved-residential-determined effect, and a non-execution to set not to execute the reserved extended-village confirmed effect. It has a selected image (an image of “do not execute”). Note that the reserved extended villa finalizing effect is an effect that clearly indicates that the extended consecutive villa is performed as described above. In the present embodiment, the finalized rendering 2 and the finalized rendering 4 described with reference to FIG. 44 correspond thereto.

<Step S4101>
Returning to the description of FIG. 66, in step S4101, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has started in the symbol display unit 341 based on whether or not the value of the fluctuation display counter is 0. When the MPU 51 determines that the change of the main symbol 921 has started (step S4101: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4102 and determines that the change of the main symbol 921 has not started (step S4101: No). The process moves to step S4103.

<Step S4102>
When the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 is started (Step S4101: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the music selection button effect setting screen display flag to off (Step S4102), and ends the music selection button effect setting screen process.

<Step S4103>
In step S4103, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, the MPU 51 includes a first to third upper selection operation pattern flags, first to third lower selection operation pattern flags, first to third left selection operation pattern flags, and first to third right selection operations. Based on the pattern flag (see FIGS. 18B to 18E), whether or not any of the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, and the right selection button 214 has been operated by the player Judge.

  If the MPU 51 determines that an operation has been performed on the selection button 21A (step S4103: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4104, and if the MPU 51 determines that an operation has not been performed on the selection button 21A (step S4103: No), the process proceeds. Shifts to step S4105.

<Step S4104>
In step S4104, the MPU 51 determines whether the operated selection button 21A is any of the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, and the right selection button 214 on the music selection button effect setting screen 99. A temporary selection display change process of moving the selection display in one of the up, down, left, and right directions is executed. When the processing in step S4104 ends, the MPU 51 ends the music selection button effect setting screen processing.

<Step S4105>
In step S4105, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has performed an operation on the determination button 21B based on the first to third determination operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18F). If the MPU 51 determines that the operation on the determination button 21B has been performed (step S4105: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4106, and if the MPU 51 determines that the operation on the determination button 21B has not been performed (step S4105: No), The music selection button effect setting screen processing ends.

<Step S4106>
In step S4106, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 974 (see FIG. 67) of “return one” on the music selection button effect setting screen 99 has been selected by the operation of the determination button 21B by the player. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is "return by one". When the MPU 51 determines that the “return one” selection image 974 has been selected (step S4106: Yes), the processing proceeds to step S4107, and determines that the “return one” selection image 974 has not been selected. If so (step S4106: No), the process moves to step S4108.

<Step S4107>
If the MPU 51 determines that the “return one” selection image 974 has been selected (step S4106: YES), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the music selection button effect setting screen 99 (see FIG. 67) to the setting item selection screen 95 (FIG. 54 (FIG. 54)). B) and a setting item selection screen shift process for shifting to (see FIG. 55) are executed (step S4107). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the music selection button effect setting screen display flag to off, sets the setting item selection screen display flag to on, and ends the music list display setting screen processing.

<Step S4108>
In step S4108, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 975 (see FIG. 67) of “Return to top menu” on the music selection button effect setting screen 99 is selected by the operation of the determination button 21B by the player. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “return to the top menu”. When the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 975 of “return to the top menu” has been selected (step S4108: Yes), the processing proceeds to step S4109, and determines that the selection image 975 of “return to the top menu” has not been selected. If so (step S4108: No), the process moves to step S4110.

<Step S4109>
If it is determined that the selection image 975 of “Return to top menu” is selected (step S4108: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the music selection button effect setting screen 99 (see FIG. 67) to the top menu screen 93 (FIG. 53 (B)). And a top menu screen shift process for shifting to (FIG. 54D) (step S4109). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen display flag to on while setting the music selection button effect setting screen display flag to off, and ends the music selection button effect setting screen processing.

<Step S4110>
In step S4110, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 976 (see FIG. 67) of “Random” on the music selection button effect setting screen 99 is selected by the operation of the determination button 21B by the player. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item that has been provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “automatic”. When the MPU 51 determines that the selected image 976 of “Random” has been selected (step S4110: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4111, and determines that the selected image 976 of “automatic” has not been selected (step S4110). S4110: No), the process moves to step S4112.

<Step S4111>
When it is determined that the selection image 976 of “Random” is selected (step S4110: Yes), the MPU 51 performs the effect regarding the presence / absence of the expected degree suggestion effect as the song selection button effect, the certainty change confirmation effect, and the execution of the hold consecutive guesthouse confirmation effect. The setting is set to default (step S4111). Here, the default setting of the music selection button effect is a setting in which any of the effect indicating the degree of expectation, the certainty-change effect, and the held extended-house effect are executed.

<Step S4112>
When it is determined that the selection image 976 of “Random” has not been selected (step S4110: No), that is, when the operation of the determination button 21B by the player is “return one”, “return to the top menu”, or “random” If it does not correspond to the operation for the item of, the MPU 51 sets the effect execution setting relating to the presence or absence of the execution of the expected effect suggestion effect, the probable change finalizing effect, and the hold consecutive guesthouse finalizing effect (step S4112). For example, when the determination operation for the determination button 21B is performed in the provisional selection state shown in FIG. 67, the expected degree suggestion effect is executed, the probable change confirmation effect is executed, and the reserved extended house confirmation effect is set to non-execution. At this time, the MPU 51 causes the RAM 512 to store the setting contents and the setting time of the music selection button effect. This makes it possible to display the music selection button effect setting history screen 89 (see FIG. 74) in the music selection button effect setting history screen processing of FIG. 73 described below.

  As described above, in step S4112, the setting or non-execution of the music selection button effect can be individually performed for the expectation degree suggestion effect, the probable change confirmation effect, and the hold consecutive residence confirmation effect, so that the music selection button effect is executed according to the player's preference. Can be done. Thereby, the player can enjoy the operation of selecting the music in the jackpot game in a manner that suits him / her.

  Specifically, the player sets the expectation degree suggestion effect to execution, for example, by performing a determination operation on the determination button 21B for selecting a song, by changing the expectation degree of the 5R probability change jackpot game state or the 16R probability change jackpot game state. You can enjoy it as an act to confirm. On the other hand, by setting the expectation suggestion effect to non-execution, since the expectation effect suggestion effect is not executed even when the decision operation is performed, the 5R probability change jackpot can be achieved without worrying about the expectation value suggested by the expectation effect suggestion effect. It is possible to enjoy the jackpot game while expecting the gaming state or the 16R sure-change jackpot game state.

  Further, by setting the probable change confirmation effect to execution, the player confirms whether or not the deciding operation on the decision button 21B for selecting a song is the 5R probable jackpot game state or the 16R probable jackpot game state, for example. You can enjoy it as an act. On the other hand, by setting the probable-change confirmed effect to non-execution, since the probable-change confirmed effect is not executed even when the decision operation is performed, the 5R probable-variable-hitting game state does not affect whether or not the probable-change confirmed effect is performed. Alternatively, it is possible to enjoy the jackpot game while expecting the 16R sure-change jackpot game state.

  Furthermore, the player enjoys the determination operation on the determination button 21B for selecting a song, for example, as an action for confirming whether or not the reservation extended villa occurs by setting the reserved extended villa finalization effect to execution. be able to. On the other hand, by setting the hold extended villa finalization effect to non-execution, even if the determination operation is performed, the hold extended villa finalization effect is not executed. In addition, it is possible to enjoy the reservation game while expecting the occurrence of the reservation series.

<Step S4113>
In step S4113, the MPU 51 performs an effect non-execution setting flag setting process according to the player setting. Specifically, the music selection button effect flag is set to ON for an item set to “do not execute” different from the default setting. Here, the effect non-execution setting flag includes an expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting flag, a probability change confirmed effect non-execution setting flag, and a holdable consecutive villa fixed effect non-execution setting flag. For example, when the determination operation for the determination button 21B is performed in the provisional selection state illustrated in FIG. 67, the reservation extended villa finalization effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON for the reservation extended villa finalization effect different from the default setting.

<Step S4114>
In step S4114, the MPU 51 executes a top menu screen shift process of shifting the display screen from the music selection button effect setting screen 99 (see FIG. 67) to the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53 (B) and 54 (D)). That is, when the setting as to whether or not to execute the music selection button effect is completed, the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the music selection button effect setting screen 99 to the top menu screen 93. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the music list selection button effect setting screen display flag to off, sets the top menu screen display flag to on, and ends the music list display setting screen processing.

[Setting history selection process]
Here, FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the setting history selection processing (step S3416 of the game setting processing in FIG. 52). As shown in FIG. 56, in the setting history selection process, the selection determination unit 21 by the player determines a song selection related item at the time of the jackpot game displayed on the setting history selection screen 96 (see FIGS. 54C and 56). According to the item selected by the operation for, the process of shifting the display screen from the setting history selection screen 96 to various setting screens 87 to 89 and the like is executed (see FIG. 56). In the following, as the setting history selection processing, similarly to the setting item selection processing described with reference to FIG. 60, three music selection related items are a melody pattern, a music list display (song selection image 83), and a music selection button effect. Although the case will be described as an example, the same change as in the setting item selection processing can be performed on the music selection related items.

<Step S4201>
In step S4201, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has started in the symbol display unit 341 based on whether or not the value of the fluctuation display counter is 0. When the MPU 51 determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has started (step S4201: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4202, and determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has not started (step S4201: No). The process moves to step S4203.

<Step S4202>
When the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 is started (Step S4201: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the setting history selection screen display flag to off (Step S4202), and ends the setting history selection processing.

<Step S4203>
In step S4203, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether the upper selection operation pattern flag (see FIG. 18B) and the first to third lower selection operation pattern flag (see FIG. 18C) are higher. It is determined whether the selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212 has been operated by the player.

  If the MPU 51 determines that an operation has been performed on the selection button 21A (step S4203: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4204, and if the MPU 51 determines that an operation has not been performed on the selection button 21A (step S4203: No), the process proceeds. Shifts to step S4205.

<Step S4204>
In step S4204, the MPU 51 determines whether the operated selection button 21A is one of the upper selection button 211 and the lower selection button 212, similarly to the temporary selection display change processing in step S3604 in the top menu screen processing of FIG. , A temporary selection display change process of moving the cursor image 946 and the temporary selection display upward or downward on the setting history selection screen 96 is executed. When the processing in step S4204 ends, the MPU 51 ends the setting history selection processing.

<Step S4205>
In step S4205, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has performed an operation on the determination button 21B based on the first to third determination operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18F). If the MPU 51 determines that the operation on the determination button 21B has been performed (step S4205: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4206, and determines that the operation on the determination button 21B has not been performed (step S4205: No). The setting history selection processing ends.

<Step S4206>
In step S4206, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 961 (see FIG. 56) of the “melody pattern setting history” on the setting history selection screen 96 has been selected by the operation of the determination button 21B by the player. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “melody pattern setting history”. If the MPU 51 determines that the selected image 961 of “melody pattern setting history” has been selected (step S4206: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4207, and the selected image 961 of “melody pattern setting history” has not been selected. If it is determined (step S4206: No), the process proceeds to step S4208.

<Step S4207>
If it is determined that the selected image 961 of “melody pattern setting history” has been selected (step S4206: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the setting history selection screen 96 (see FIG. 54 (C) and FIG. 56) to the melody pattern setting. A melody pattern setting history screen shift process for shifting to the history screen 87 (see FIG. 70) is executed (step S4207). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the setting history selection screen display flag to OFF, sets the melody pattern setting history screen display flag to ON, and ends the setting history selection process.

<Step S4208>
In step S4208, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 962 (see FIG. 56) of the “song list display setting history” on the setting history selection screen 96 has been selected by the player operating the enter button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is the “song list display setting history”. When the MPU 51 determines that the selected image 962 of “Song list display setting history” has been selected (Step S4208: Yes), the process proceeds to Step S4209, and the selected image 962 of “Song list display setting history” is selected. If it is determined that it has not been performed (step S4208: No), the process proceeds to step S4210.

<Step S4209>
When it is determined that the selected image 962 of “Song list display setting history” has been selected (step S4208: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the setting history selection screen 96 to the music list display setting history screen as shown in FIG. Then, a music list display setting history screen shift process to be shifted to 88 is executed (step S4209). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the setting history selection screen display flag to off, sets the music list display setting history screen display flag to on, and ends the setting history selection process.

<Step S4210>
In step S4210, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 963 (see FIG. 56) of the “song selection button effect setting history” on the setting history selection screen 96 has been selected by the player operating the enter button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is the “music selection button effect setting history”. When the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 963 of “Song selection button effect setting history” has been selected (step S4210: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4211, and the selection image 963 of “Song selection button effect setting history” is selected. If it is determined that it has not been performed (step S4210: No), the process proceeds to step S4212.

<Step S4211>
When it is determined that the selection image 963 of “Song selection button effect setting history” is selected (step S4210: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the setting history selection screen 96 to the music selection button effect setting history screen as shown in FIG. 89 (step S4211). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the setting item selection history screen display flag to off, sets the music selection button effect setting history screen display flag to on, and ends the setting history selection process.

<Step S4212>
In step S4212, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 964 (see FIG. 56) of “return one” on the setting history selection screen 96 has been selected by the operation of the determination button 21B by the player. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is "return by one". If the MPU 51 determines that the “return one” selected image 964 has been selected (step S4212: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4213 and determines that the “return one” selected image 964 has not been selected. If so (step S4212: No), the process moves to step S4214.

<Step S4213>
If it is determined that the “return one” selection image 964 has been selected (step S4212: Yes), as shown in FIG. 56, the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the setting history selection screen 96 to the game setting screen 94 ( Step S4213). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the setting history selection screen display flag to off while setting the game setting screen display flag to off, and ends the setting history selection process.

<Step S4214>
The MPU 51 determines that the item selected by the player's operation on the determination button 21B is other than “melody pattern setting history”, “song list display setting history”, “song selection button effect setting history”, and “return one”. Since it can be determined that “return to the top menu” has been selected, as shown in FIG. 56, a top menu screen shift process for shifting the display screen from the setting history selection screen 96 to the top menu screen 93 is executed (step S4214). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the setting history selection screen display flag to off, and sets the top menu screen display flag to on.

[Melody pattern setting history screen processing]
Here, FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the melody pattern setting history screen processing (step S3418 of the game setting processing in FIG. 52). In the melody pattern setting history screen process, a process of performing a setting regarding the melody pattern (start of music output) of the temporarily selected music and the selected music output from the speaker 26 in the jackpot game based on the setting history is executed. FIG. 70 shows an example of the melody pattern setting history screen 87. In the following, the melody pattern setting history screen 87 will be described first with reference to FIG. 70, and then the melody pattern setting screen history processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  The melody pattern setting history screen 87 shown in FIG. 70 is used to set the melody pattern (output start portion) of the tentatively selected tune in the jackpot game and the unselected tune and the already-selected tune as the selected tune based on the setting history. It is a screen of. The melody pattern setting history screen 87 includes a setting history display image 871 that displays the melody pattern settings of the tentatively selected tune, the unselected tune, and the already-selected tune a plurality of times, a history selection image 872, a selection image 974 to 976, and a selection determination unit. Image 977 is included.

  The setting history display image 871 shows histories 1 to 3 relating to three melody pattern settings including the current melody pattern setting. Each of the melody pattern setting histories 1 to 3 includes information on the set time and information on the past setting of the melody pattern (output start portion) of the tentatively selected tune, the unselected tune, and the already-selected tune.

  The history selection image 872 includes a history 1 selection image, a history 2 selection image, and a history 3 selection image. The history 1 selected image is for setting the melody pattern of the tentatively selected tune, the unselected tune, and the already-selected tune in the setting contents of the history 1. The history 2 selection image is for setting the melody patterns of the tentatively selected music piece, the unselected music piece, and the already selected music piece in the setting content of the history 2. The history 3 selection image is for setting the melody pattern of the tentatively selected music, the unselected music, and the already selected music in the setting contents of the history 3. The histories 1 to 3 temporarily selected in the history selection image 872 can be changed according to an operation on the left selection button 213 or the right selection button 214, and the history 1 temporarily selected in the history selection image 872 can be changed. The histories 1 to 3 provisionally selected in the setting history display image 871 change in conjunction with the changes of 3.

<Step S4301>
Returning to the description of FIG. 69, in step S4301, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has started in the symbol display unit 341 based on whether or not the value of the fluctuation display counter is 0. When the MPU 51 determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has started (Step S4301: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to Step S4302, and determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has not started (Step S4301: No). The process moves to step S4303.

<Step S4302>
When the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 is started (Step S4301: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern setting history screen display flag to off (Step S4302), and ends the melody pattern setting history screen processing.

<Step S4303>
In step S4303, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, the MPU 51 includes a first to third upper selection operation pattern flags, first to third lower selection operation pattern flags, first to third left selection operation pattern flags, and first to third right selection operations. Based on the pattern flag (see FIGS. 18B to 18E), whether or not any of the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, and the right selection button 214 has been operated by the player Judge.

  If the MPU 51 determines that an operation has been performed on the selection button 21A (step S4303: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4304, and determines that an operation has not been performed on the selection button 21A (step S4303: No). Shifts to step S4305.

<Step S4304>
In step S4304, the MPU 51 temporarily determines whether the operated selection button 21A is the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, or the right selection button 214 on the melody pattern setting history screen 87. A temporary selection display change process of moving the selection display in one of the up, down, left, and right directions is executed. When the processing in step S4304 ends, the MPU 51 ends the melody pattern setting history screen processing.

<Step S4305>
In step S4305, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the determination button 21B based on the first to third determination operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18F). If the MPU 51 determines that the operation on the determination button 21B has been performed (step S4305: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4306, and if the MPU 51 determines that the operation on the determination button 21B has not been performed (step S4305: No), The melody pattern setting history screen processing ends.

<Step S4306>
In step S4306, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 974 (see FIG. 70) of “return one” on the melody pattern setting history screen is selected by the operation of the determination button 21B by the player. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is "return by one". When the MPU 51 determines that the “return one” selected image 974 has been selected (step S4306: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4307 and determines that the “return one” selected image 974 has not been selected. If so (step S4306: No), the process moves to step S4308.

<Step S4307>
If the MPU 51 determines that the “return one” selection image 974 has been selected (step S4306: YES), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the melody pattern setting history screen 87 (see FIG. 70) to the setting history selection screen 96 (FIG. 54 (FIG. 54)). C) and a setting history selection screen shift process for shifting to (see FIG. 56) is executed (step S4307). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern setting history screen display flag to OFF, sets the setting history selection screen display flag to ON, and ends the melody pattern setting history screen processing.

<Step S4308>
In step S4308, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 975 (see FIG. 70) of “Return to top menu” on the melody pattern setting history screen has been selected by the operation of the determination button 21B by the player. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “return to the top menu”. When the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 975 of “return to the top menu” has been selected (step S4308: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4309, and determines that the selection image 975 of “return to the top menu” has not been selected. If so (step S4308: No), the process moves to step S4310.

<Step S4309>
If it is determined that the selection image 975 of “Return to top menu” is selected (step S4308: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the melody pattern setting history screen 87 (see FIG. 70) to the top menu screen 93 (FIG. 53 (B)). And a top menu screen shift process for shifting to (FIG. 54D) (step S4309). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern setting history screen display flag to off, sets the top menu screen display flag to on, and ends the melody pattern setting history screen processing.

<Step S4310>
In step S4310, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 976 (see FIG. 70) of “Random” on the melody pattern setting history screen is selected by the operation of the determination button 21B by the player. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item that has been provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “automatic”. If the MPU 51 determines that the selected image 976 of “Random” has been selected (step S4310: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4311, and determines that the selected image 976 of “Random” has not been selected (step S4310). (S4310: No), the process moves to step S4312.

<Step S4311>
If it is determined that the selected image 976 of “Random” has been selected (step S4310: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the melody patterns of the tentatively selected tune, the unselected tune, and the already-selected tune as default (step S4311). Here, the default settings of the melody pattern are melody pattern 1 for starting output from the chorus portion for the temporarily selected song, melody pattern 2 for starting output from the chorus portion for the unselected song, and singing for the selected song. This is a melody pattern 1 that starts output from the output portion (A melody portion) (see FIG. 38).

<Step S4312>
When it is determined that the selection image 976 of “Random” is not selected (step S4310: No), the operation of the determination button 21B by the player is any one of “return one”, “return to the top menu”, and “random”. If the operation does not correspond to the operation on the item, the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern to the same setting as the setting history temporarily selected in the history selection image 872 (step S4312). For example, when the determination operation is performed on the determination button 21B in the temporary selection state illustrated in FIG. 70, the melody pattern is set to the same setting as the history 2. That is, the melody pattern 1 that starts output from the singing start portion (A melody portion) for the tentatively selected song, the melody pattern 2 that starts output from the climax portion for an unselected song, and the melody pattern for the already selected song Is set to the melody pattern 2 at which the output of the melody starts.

  As described above, in step S4312, the setting of the melody pattern (output start portion) of the tentatively selected song and the setting of the melody pattern (output start portion) of the unselected song and the already-selected song as the selected song are performed on the melody pattern setting history screen. Since it can be performed by the player operating the selection deciding unit 21 based on the melody pattern 87, the same effect as in the case of setting the melody pattern according to the melody pattern setting screen 97 shifted from the setting item selection screen 95 can be enjoyed. In addition, since the setting of the melody pattern (output start portion) of the tentatively selected music piece and the selected music piece can be selected from the setting history, the melody pattern can be set to the same content as the past setting content by a simple operation on the selection determining section 21. Can be. Therefore, the player can set a desired melody pattern in accordance with the melody pattern setting history screen 87 with a small number of operations on the selection deciding section 21 when returning to the previous setting or the like.

<Step S4313>
In step S4313, the MPU 51 performs a melody pattern setting flag setting process according to the player setting. Specifically, a melody pattern setting flag is set to ON for an item set to a melody pattern different from the default setting. For example, when the determination operation is performed on the determination button 21B in the temporary selection state shown in FIG. 70, the temporary selection music melody pattern setting flag is set to ON for the temporary selection music set to a melody pattern different from the default setting. You.

<Step S4314>
In step S4314, the MPU 51 executes a top menu screen shift process for shifting the display screen from the melody pattern setting history screen 87 (see FIG. 70) to the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53 (B) and 54 (D)). That is, when the melody patterns of the selected music image 831, the temporarily selected music image 832, and the unselected music image 833 (see FIG. 25) are set, the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the melody pattern setting history screen to the top menu screen. Move to 93. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern setting history screen display flag to off, sets the top menu screen display flag to on, and ends the melody pattern setting history screen processing.

[Song list display setting history screen processing]
Here, FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the music list display setting history screen processing (step S3420 of the game setting processing in FIG. 52). In the music list display setting history screen processing, the non-selected music image 834 for the dislike music (non-selected music) and the selected music image 831 (see FIG. 25) for the favorite music (selected music) of the music selection image 83 in the jackpot game. A process for performing display setting regarding presence / absence of display (display mode) based on the setting history is executed. FIG. 72 shows an example of the music list display setting history screen 88. In the following, the music list display setting history screen 88 will be described first with reference to FIG. 72, and then the music list display setting history screen processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  A music list display setting history screen 88 shown in FIG. 72 is used to set the presence / absence (display mode) of the music selection image 83 displayed on the music selection image display screen 82 in the jackpot game based on the setting history. Screen. The music list display setting history screen 88 displays a setting history display image 881 and a history selection image 882 that display the setting of presence / absence of dislike music (non-selected music) and favorite music (selected music) for a plurality of times, as well as a selected image. 974 to 976 and a selection determination unit image 977.

  The setting history display image 881 shows histories 1 to 3 related to three settings including the setting of whether to display the current non-selected music and the selected music. Each of the setting histories 1 to 3 includes information on the set time and information on whether or not the non-selected music and the selected music are displayed.

  The history selection image 882 includes a history 1 selection image, a history 2 selection image, and a history 3 selection image. The history 1 selected image is for setting whether or not to display the non-selected music and the selected music in the setting contents of the history 1. The history 2 selection image is for setting whether to display the non-selected music and the already-selected music in the setting contents of the history 2. The history 3 selection image is for setting whether to display the non-selected music and the already-selected music in the setting contents of the history 3. The histories 1 to 3 temporarily selected in the history selection image 882 can be changed in accordance with an operation on the left selection button 213 or the right selection button 214, and the history 1 temporarily selected in the history selection image 882. The histories 1 to 3 tentatively selected in the setting history display image 881 change in conjunction with the changes of to １〜３3.

<Step S4401>
Returning to the description of FIG. 71, in step S4401, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has started in the symbol display unit 341 based on whether or not the value of the fluctuation display counter is 0. When the MPU 51 determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has started (step S4401: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4402, and determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has not started (step S4401: No). Then, the process shifts to step S4403.

<Step S4402>
When the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 is started (Step S4401: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the music list display setting screen display flag to off (Step S4402), and ends the music list display setting history screen processing.

<Step S4403>
In step S4403, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, the MPU 51 includes a first to third upper selection operation pattern flags, first to third lower selection operation pattern flags, first to third left selection operation pattern flags, and first to third right selection operations. Based on the pattern flag (see FIGS. 18B to 18E), whether or not any of the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, and the right selection button 214 has been operated by the player Judge.

  If the MPU 51 determines that an operation has been performed on the selection button 21A (step S4403: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4404, and determines that an operation has not been performed on the selection button 21A (step S4403: No). Is shifted to step S4405.

<Step S4404>
In step S4404, the MPU 51 determines whether the operated selection button 21A is one of the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, and the right selection button 214 in the music list display setting history screen. A temporary selection display change process of moving the selection display in one of the up, down, left, and right directions is executed. When the processing in step S4404 ends, the MPU 51 ends the music list display setting history screen processing.

<Step S4405>
In step S4405, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has performed an operation on the determination button 21B based on the first to third determination operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18F). If the MPU 51 determines that the operation on the determination button 21B has been performed (step S4405: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4406, and determines that the operation on the determination button 21B has not been performed (step S4405: No). The music list display setting history screen processing ends.

<Step S4406>
In step S4406, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player's operation on the enter button 21B selects the “return one” selection image 974 (see FIG. 72) of the music list display setting history screen 88. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is "return by one". When the MPU 51 determines that the “return one” selection image 974 has been selected (step S4406: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4407 and determines that the “return one” selection image 974 has not been selected. If so (step S4406: No), the process moves to step S4408.

<Step S4407>
If the MPU 51 determines that the “return one” selection image 974 has been selected (step S4406: YES), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the music list display setting history screen 88 (see FIG. 72) to the setting history selection screen 96 (FIG. 54). (C) and FIG. 56) is executed (step S4407). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the music list display setting history screen display flag to off, sets the setting history selection screen display flag to on, and ends the music list display setting history screen processing.

<Step S4408>
In step S4408, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 975 (see FIG. 72) of “Return to top menu” on the music list display setting history screen 88 has been selected by the operation of the determination button 21B by the player. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “return to the top menu”. When the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 975 of “return to the top menu” has been selected (step S4408: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4409, and determines that the selection image 975 of “return to the top menu” has not been selected. If so (step S4408: No), the process moves to step S4410.

<Step S4409>
When it is determined that the selection image 975 of “Return to top menu” is selected (step S4408: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the music list display setting history screen 88 (see FIG. 72) to the top menu screen 93 (see FIG. 53 (B ) And FIG. 54 (D)) is executed (step S4409). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the music list display setting history screen display flag to off, sets the top menu screen display flag to on, and ends the music list display setting history screen processing.

<Step S4410>
In step S4410, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 976 (see FIG. 72) of “Random” on the music list display setting history screen 88 has been selected by the player operating the enter button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item that has been provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “automatic”. If the MPU 51 determines that the selected image 976 of “Random” has been selected (step S4410: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4411, and determines that the selected image 976 of “Random” has not been selected (step S4411). (S4410: No), the process moves to step S4412.

<Step S4411>
If the MPU 51 determines that the selected image 976 of “Random” has been selected (step S4410: Yes), the non-selected music image 834 for the disliked selected music (non-selected music) on the music selection image display screen 82 (see FIG. 25). The display setting of the already-selected music image 831 (see FIG. 25) for the favorite and selected music (the already-selected music) is set to a default (step S4411). Here, the default setting of the display setting is a setting in which both the non-selected music image 834 and the already-selected music image 831 are displayed (see FIG. 25).

<Step S4412>
If it is determined that the selection image 976 of “Random” has not been selected (step S4410: No), that is, if the operation of the determination button 21B by the player is one of “return one”, “return to the top menu”, and “random” If the operation does not correspond to the operation of the item of, the MPU 51 performs the display setting of the non-selected music image 834 and the selected music image 831 (see FIG. 25) in the setting of the setting history temporarily selected in the history selection image 882 (see FIG. 25). Step S4412). For example, when a determination operation is performed on the determination button 21B in the temporary selection state illustrated in FIG. Specifically, both the non-selected music image 834 corresponding to the disliked music (non-selected music) and the selected music image 831 corresponding to the favorite music (non-selected music) are set to be displayed.

  As described above, in step S4412, the display setting of displaying or not displaying the selected music (favorite music) image 831 and the non-selected music (dislike music) image 834 included in the music selection image 83 is displayed on the music list display setting history screen 88. Since it can be performed by the operation of the selection deciding unit 21 by the player on the basis of this, the same effect as in the case of performing the display setting for performing the display setting according to the music list display setting screen 98 shifted from the setting item selection screen 95 can be enjoyed. In addition, the display setting of the selected music (favorite music) image 831 and the non-selected music (dislike music) image 834 can be selected from the setting history. Display settings can be made. Therefore, when the player wants to return to the previous setting, the player can make a desired display setting according to the music list display setting history screen 88 with a small number of operations on the selection determining unit 21.

<Step S4413>
In step S4413, the MPU 51 performs a music image non-display setting flag setting process according to the player setting. Specifically, a music image non-display setting flag is set to ON for an item set to “non-display” different from the default setting. For example, when the determination operation for the determination button 21B is performed in the tentative selection state shown in FIG. 72, the setting is the same as the default setting, so the non-selected music image non-display setting flag and the selected music image non-display setting flag are set. Are not set to on.

<Step S4414>
In step S4414, the MPU 51 executes a top menu screen shift process of shifting the display screen from the music list display setting history screen 88 (see FIG. 72) to the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53 (B) and 54 (D)). . That is, when the display setting of the non-selected music image 834 and the selected music image 831 is completed, the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the music list display setting history screen 88 to the top menu screen 93. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the music list display setting history screen display flag to off, sets the top menu screen display flag to on, and ends the music list display setting history screen processing.

[Song selection button effect setting history screen processing]
Here, FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the music selection button effect setting history screen processing (step S3422 of the game setting processing in FIG. 52). In the music selection button effect setting history screen processing, a process for performing an effect execution setting related to a music selection button effect executed at the time of music selection in the jackpot game is performed based on the setting history. FIG. 74 shows an example of the music selection button effect setting history screen 89. In the following, the music selection button effect setting history screen 89 will be described first with reference to FIG. 74, and then the music selection button effect setting history screen processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  The music selection button effect setting history screen 89 shown in FIG. 74 is a screen for performing settings related to the effect performed when selecting a song in the jackpot game based on the setting history. The music selection button effect setting history screen 89 is a setting history display image that individually displays a plurality of settings for the presence / absence of the music selection button effect including the expectation degree suggesting effect, the probable change determining effect, and the holding extended guesthouse determining effect for each effect. 891, a history selection image 892, and selection images 974 to 976 and a selection determination unit image 977.

  The setting history display image 891 shows the histories 1 to 3 regarding three settings including the setting as to whether or not the current music selection button effect is to be executed. The setting histories 1 to 3 include information on the set time and information on the setting on whether or not each music selection button effect has been executed.

  The history selection image 892 includes a history 1 selection image, a history 2 selection image, and a history 3 selection image. The history 1 selection image is for setting a music selection button effect in the setting content of the music selection button effect of the history 1. The history 2 selection image is for setting a music selection button effect in the setting content of the music selection button effect of the history 2. The history 3 selection image is for setting a music selection button effect in the setting content of the music selection button effect of the history 3. The histories 1 to 3 temporarily selected in the history selection image 892 can be changed in accordance with an operation on the left selection button 213 or the right selection button 214, and the history 1 temporarily selected in the history selection image 892. The histories 1 to 3 provisionally selected in the setting history display image 891 change in conjunction with the changes of 〜3.

<Step S4501>
Returning to the description of FIG. 73, in step S4501, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has started in the symbol display unit 341 based on whether or not the value of the fluctuation display counter is 0. When the MPU 51 determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has started (step S4501: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4502, and determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 has not started (step S4501: No). The process moves to step S4503.

<Step S4502>
When the fluctuation of the main symbol 921 is started (Step S4501: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the music selection button effect setting history screen display flag to off (Step S4502), and ends the music selection button effect setting history screen processing.

<Step S4503>
In step S4503, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, the MPU 51 includes a first to third upper selection operation pattern flags, first to third lower selection operation pattern flags, first to third left selection operation pattern flags, and first to third right selection operations. Based on the pattern flag (see FIGS. 18B to 18E), whether or not any of the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, and the right selection button 214 has been operated by the player Judge.

  If the MPU 51 determines that an operation has been performed on the selection button 21A (step S4503: Yes), the processing proceeds to step S4504, and if the MPU 51 determines that an operation has not been performed on the selection button 21A (step S4503: No), the processing proceeds. Shifts to step S4505.

<Step S4504>
In step S4504, the MPU 51 determines whether the operated selection button 21A is one of the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, and the right selection button 214 in the music selection button effect setting history screen 89. A temporary selection display change process for moving the temporary selection display in one of the up, down, left, and right directions is executed. When the process of step S4504 ends, the MPU 51 ends the music selection button effect setting history screen process.

<Step S4505>
In step S4505, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the determination button 21B based on the first to third determination operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18F). If the MPU 51 determines that the operation on the determination button 21B has been performed (step S4505: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4506, and determines that the operation on the determination button 21B has not been performed (step S4505: No). The music selection button effect setting history screen processing ends.

<Step S4506>
In step S4506, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 974 (see FIG. 74) of “return one” on the music selection button effect setting history screen is selected by the operation of the determination button 21B by the player. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is "return by one". If the MPU 51 determines that the “return one” selection image 974 has been selected (step S4506: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4507 and determines that the “return one” selection image 974 has not been selected. If so (step S4506: No), the process moves to step S4508.

<Step S4507>
If the MPU 51 determines that the “return one” selection image 974 has been selected (step S4506: YES), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the music selection button effect setting history screen 89 (see FIG. 74) to the setting history selection screen 96 (FIG. 54). (C) and a setting history selection screen transfer process (step S4507). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the music selection button effect setting history screen display flag to off, sets the setting history selection screen display flag to on, and ends the music list display setting history screen processing.

<Step S4508>
In step S4508, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 975 (see FIG. 74) of “Return to top menu” on the music selection button effect setting history screen is selected by the operation of the determination button 21B by the player. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “return to the top menu”. If the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 975 of “Return to Top Menu” has been selected (step S4508: Yes), the processing shifts to step S4509, and determines that the selection image 975 of “Return to Top Menu” has not been selected. If so (step S4508: No), the process moves to step S4510.

<Step S4509>
If it is determined that the selection image 975 of “Return to top menu” has been selected (step S4508: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the music selection button effect setting history screen 89 (see FIG. 74) to the top menu screen 93 (FIG. 53 (B ) And FIG. 54 (D)) is executed (step S4509). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the music selection button effect setting history screen display flag to off, sets the top menu screen display flag to on, and ends the music selection button effect setting screen process.

<Step S4510>
In step S4510, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 976 (see FIG. 74) of “Random” on the music selection button effect setting history screen is selected by the operation of the determination button 21B by the player. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item that has been provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “automatic”. If the MPU 51 determines that the selected image 976 of “Random” has been selected (step S4510: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4511, and determines that the selected image 976 of “automatic” has not been selected (step S4511). (S4510: No), the process moves to step S4512.

<Step S4511>
If it is determined that the selection image 976 of “Random” has been selected (step S4510: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the effect regarding whether or not the expected degree suggestion effect as the song selection button effect, the definite change confirmation effect, and the hold extended guesthouse confirmation effect are performed. The setting is set to default (step S4511). Here, the default setting of the music selection button effect is a setting in which any of the effect indicating the degree of expectation, the certainty-change effect, and the held extended-house effect are executed.

<Step S4512>
When it is determined that the selection image 976 of “Random” has not been selected (step S4110: No), that is, when the operation of the determination button 21B by the player is “return one”, “return to the top menu”, or “random” If it does not correspond to the operation for the item of, the MPU 51 sets the game setting relating to the execution of the expected degree suggestion effect, the certainty change determination effect, and the execution of the held consecutive cottage determination effect to the temporarily selected setting (step S4512). For example, when the determination operation is performed on the determination button 21B in the temporary selection state illustrated in FIG. More specifically, none of the expected degree suggestion effect, the probable change confirmation effect, and the hold extended residence confirmation effect are set to non-execution.

  In this manner, in step S4512, the execution or non-execution of the music selection button effect can be set by the player operating the selection determining unit 21 based on the music selection button effect setting history screen 89. The same effect as in the case where the effect execution setting is performed according to the music selection button effect setting screen 99 to be shifted can be enjoyed. In addition, since the effect execution setting of the music selection button effect can be selected from the setting history, the effect execution setting of the same content as the past setting content can be performed by a simple operation on the selection determining unit 21. Therefore, when the player wants to return to the previous setting, the player can make a desired effect execution setting based on the music selection button effect setting history screen 89 with a small number of operations on the selection determining unit 21.

<Step S4513>
In step S4513, the MPU 51 performs an effect non-execution setting flag setting process according to the player setting. Specifically, the effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON for an item set to “do not execute” different from the default setting. For example, when the determination operation for the determination button 21B is performed in the tentative selection state illustrated in FIG. 74, the effect execution suggestion effect that is different from the default setting, the expected change suggestion effect, the probable change confirmation effect, and the hold advantageous retreat confirmation effect, All of the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting flag, the probability change confirmed effect non-execution setting flag, and the holdable consecutive villa fixed effect non-execution setting flag are set to ON.

<Step S4514>
In step S4514, the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the music selection button effect setting history screen 89 (see FIG. 74) to the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53 (B) and 54 (D)). That is, when the effect execution setting for the music selection button effect is completed, the display screen is shifted to the top menu screen 93. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the music list selection button effect setting screen display flag to off, sets the top menu screen display flag to on, and ends the music list display setting screen processing.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 10 according to the embodiment of the present invention, the player operates the selection determining unit 21 to select the tentatively selected music image 832 that enables selection of the music included in the already-selected music. In this state, the user can perform a determination operation on the selection determination unit 21 to select a previously selected music piece selected previously. Therefore, the player can select the previously selected song that has been previously selected with a small number of operations on the selection determining unit 21 and output the selected song from the speaker 26. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can enhance the level of interest in the special game and the interest in the special game, thereby improving the player's willingness to play the game.

  Further, the player can display the unselected music image 833 as the tentatively selected music image 832 by operating the selection deciding unit 21. In this state, the player performs the deciding operation on the selection deciding unit 21 to select the previously selected music image. Unselected songs that have never been played can be output from the speaker 26. Therefore, the player can select an unselected song with a small number of operations on the selection determining unit 21 and output the unselected song from the speaker 26. Thereby, the player can not only select and select the already-selected music and the non-selected music, but also can select either the already-selected music or the non-selected music with a small number of operations on the selection determining unit 21. A desired music can be easily selected and output from the speaker 26.

  Furthermore, when the music selection image 83 is displayed, first, the temporarily selected music to be displayed as the temporarily selected music image 832 is selected from the unselected music, and the unselected music is output from the speaker 26. Therefore, even when the player finally selects a music piece from the already selected music piece, it is possible for the player to listen to the unselected music piece in the process up to that point, and the goodness of the unselected music piece to the player. Can give an opportunity to communicate.

[Other embodiments]
Hereinafter, another embodiment of the gaming machine 10 according to the present invention will be described. Further, in other embodiments described below, the description of the same configuration as the gaming machine 10 described in the first embodiment and the same steps as the various processing procedures will be omitted. In addition, it is also possible to select and arbitrarily combine each configuration and each processing function of the above-described first embodiment and the following other embodiments.

[Second embodiment]
In the above-described first embodiment, in the default setting, the output start of the tentatively selected tune is the chorus portion for both the selected tune and the unselected tune, and the output start of the selected tune is the A melody portion (the singing start portion) in the selected tune. ), The case where the unselected music piece is a chorus part has been described. That is, in the first embodiment, the case has been described in which, when the temporarily selected music piece is selected as the selected music piece, the output of the selected music piece is restarted from the A melody part (singing out part) or the chorus part.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the default setting, when the selected music (temporary selection music) is the already selected music, the selected music is selected from the continuation of the temporary selection music output from the speaker 26 at the time when the music is selected. The second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the tentatively selected tune is continuously output from the loudspeaker 26 in that the tune is output from the speaker 26, that is, when the already-selected tune is selected.

  By the way, in a conventional gaming machine, a tentatively selected song is output from a chorus portion in order to effectively convey the goodness of a song, and a selected song is generally output from a chorus portion to increase the degree of attention to a jackpot game. It is. In this case, when music selection is performed, the temporarily selected music output at the temporary selection stage is temporarily interrupted, and the chorus portion of the same music as the temporarily selected music is restarted at the stage where the music is selected. Therefore, the player hears the chorus portion of the same music in a short time.

  However, if the selected song is a player's favorite already-selected song, the previously-selected song is a previously selected song. It can also result in tiredness. In addition, there is a concern that the tension of the player who has risen by listening to the chorus portion of the favorite music may drop at a stretch because the temporarily selected music is cut off halfway. Furthermore, since the output of the selected music is the chorus portion, in a jackpot game in which a round game (opening / closing execution mode) is executed about five times, a music start portion (for example, an intro portion or A You may not be able to hear the melody (singing start).

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the tentatively selected music piece is the already-selected music piece, the already-selected music piece is output as the tentatively-selected music piece from the A melody portion (singing out portion), When the music is the already-selected music, the temporarily selected music is continuously output. In other words, when the selected music is selected, the music is output from the music start portion at the temporary selection stage, and even when the music is selected, the already selected music is continuously output from the temporary selection stage. Therefore, at least at the provisional selection stage, the music start portion of the already-selected music can be reliably heard, and the chorus portion of the same music is output redundantly in a short time from the provisional selection stage to the music selection stage. Therefore, even when the selected music piece is repeatedly selected, it is possible to prevent the already selected music piece from getting tired early. In addition, since the already-selected music is continuously output from the stage of the provisional selection, the player can increase the tension from the music start portion toward the chorus portion and maintain the tension at a high state, Interest in jackpot games is improved.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 77, focusing on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment. Here, FIG. 75 is a diagram showing an example of a melody pattern table used in the present embodiment, and FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a tentatively selected music output process executed in the present embodiment. 77 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a selected music piece output process executed in the present embodiment. That is, the present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the temporarily selected music is continuously output from the speaker 26 when the already-selected music is selected. 75 differs from the melody pattern table shown in FIG. 75, the temporarily selected music output process shown in FIG. 76, and the selected music output process shown in FIG. In the tentatively selected tune output process shown in FIG. 76 and the selected tune output process shown in FIG. 77, the melody pattern settings of the tentatively selected tune and the selected tune are different from the default settings depending on the player for simplicity of explanation. If you do not consider. For example, in the temporarily selected music piece output process shown in FIG. 76, a step corresponding to step S2703 in the temporarily selected music piece output processing shown in FIG. 40 in the first embodiment described above is omitted. In the selected music output processing shown in FIG. 77, steps corresponding to steps S2806, S2809, and S2810 in the temporarily selected music output processing shown in FIG. 41 in the first embodiment described above are omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 75, in the tentatively selected tune including the initial tentatively selected tune, the default setting of the melody pattern is such that when the already selected tune is tentatively selected, all of tunes A to T are melody pattern 1, ie, A The output is set to start from the melody (singing start portion), and when the unselected songs are temporarily selected, the output of all of the songs A to T is set to start from the melody pattern 2, that is, the chorus portion. On the other hand, in the case of the selected tune, the default setting of the melody pattern is such that when the already-selected tune is selected, all of the tunes A to T are set to the continuation of the tentatively-selected tune, that is, the output of the tentatively-selected tune is continued. When the selected music piece is selected, all of the music pieces A to T are set to start the output from the melody pattern 1, that is, the A melody (song start portion). Here, the continuation of the output of the tentatively selected music piece means that the tentatively selected music piece is output without any interruption. However, the moment that the set button 21B is operated, the operation sound is output, and so on. The case where the selected music is interrupted is also included. In addition, in the embodiments other than the present embodiment, the case where the output of the tentatively selected music piece is continued is interpreted synonymously with the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 76, in the present embodiment, the default setting of the tentatively selected tune is different from that of the above-described first embodiment, and thus the tentatively selected tune is temporarily selected in the tentatively selected tune output processing of the present embodiment. In this case (Step S2702: No), the melody pattern 1 which is the default setting is unconditionally selected (Step S4601), and the tentatively selected tune is output as the tentatively selected tune from the A melody portion (starting singing portion). (Step S2707).

  As shown in FIG. 77, in the present embodiment, the default setting of the selected music is different from that of the above-described first embodiment. (Step S2801: No), the continuation of the output of the tentatively selected tune, which is the default setting, is unconditionally selected (Step S4701), and the tentative selection output from the speaker 26 at the time when the selected tune is selected as the selected tune. The music is output from the speaker 26 continuously from the continuation of the music (step S2811).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the player selects the already-selected music, the already-selected music output from the music start portion as the temporarily-selected music can be heard from the continuation of the portion output at the time of the determination operation. it can. That is, when selecting the selected music, the player can continuously listen to the selected music continuously from the music start portion after the temporarily selected music is selected.

  In the present embodiment, the selected music is output from the speaker 26 from the continuation of the temporarily selected music (continuing the temporarily selected music) on condition that the selected music (temporarily selected music) is the already selected music. If the selected music (temporarily selected music) is an unselected music, the selected music may be output from the speaker 26 from the continuation of the temporarily selected music (continuation of the temporarily selected music). Further, in the present embodiment, the output start of the temporarily selected song is an A melody portion (singing out portion) for the already-selected song, and the chorus portion for the unselected song, but the output when the temporarily selected song is the already-selected song. The start may be a chorus part, and the output start in the case where the temporarily selected music piece is an unselected music piece may be an A melody part (singing start part). Further, in the present embodiment, the output start of the selected music is the A melody part (song start part) in the unselected music, but the output start in the case where the provisionally selected music is the unselected music is also the chorus part. Good. In the present embodiment, the melody pattern is not set by the player in the tentatively selected music output process and the selected music output process, which is different from the default setting. Similarly, the temporarily selected music output processing and the selected music output processing may be executed in consideration of the fact that the melody pattern is set differently from the default setting by the player.

[Third Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the melody pattern is determined for the provisionally selected music and the selected music depending on whether the music is a selected music or an unselected music. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a case will be described in which a melody pattern is determined for the provisionally selected music and the selected music in accordance with the jackpot type (more precisely, the number of rounds of the jackpot game).

  In the present embodiment, since the melody pattern is determined according to the jackpot type (more precisely, the number of rounds of the jackpot game) for the tentatively selected song and the selected song, the melody pattern table, the temporarily selected song output processing, and the selected song output The processing is different from that of the first embodiment.

  FIG. 78 is a diagram showing an example of the melody pattern table used in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 78, the default setting of the melody pattern of the initial provisionally selected song is such that in the 5R jackpot game (5R regular jackpot game and 5R certain-variable jackpot game), all of the songs A to T are melody pattern 2, that is, from the chorus portion. In the 16R jackpot game, all the songs A to T are set to start output from the melody pattern 1, that is, the A melody portion (singing out portion) in the 16R jackpot game. On the other hand, the default setting of the melody pattern of the selected music is such that in the 5R jackpot game, all of the songs A to T are set to the continuation of the tentatively selected song, that is, the continuation of the output of the tentatively selected song. All of T are set to start the output from the melody pattern 1, that is, the A melody portion (song start portion). That is, in the present embodiment, in the case of a 5R jackpot (5R regular jackpot and 5R probability variable jackpot), the tentatively selected music piece is output from the chorus portion, and when the music piece is selected, the temporarily selected music piece is continuously output. On the other hand, in the case of the 16R jackpot, the tentatively selected music piece is output from the A melody part (singing start part), and the selected music piece is output from the A melody part (singing start part).

  By the way, in a general gaming machine, a plurality of jackpot games having different advantages for a player are provided as a jackpot game. In the present embodiment, as described above, the 5R normal jackpot, the 5R certain jackpot, and the 16R certain jackpot having different advantages are provided. On the other hand, as described above, in the conventional gaming machine, the tentatively selected music is output from the chorus portion to effectively convey the goodness of the music, and the selected music is output from the chorus portion to increase the degree of attention to the jackpot game. It is common to use

  However, if the output start of both the tentatively selected song and the selected tune is set to the chorus portion, the tentatively selected song that was output at the stage of the tentative selection is temporarily interrupted, and the rust portion of the same song as this tentatively selected song is lost. It starts again when the music is selected. For this reason, there is a concern that the player may feel discomfort or disgust when listening to the chorus portion of the same music in a short time or when the music is interrupted. Despite such a concern, the output of the temporarily selected music is stopped and the same music is output again as the selected music from the rust portion until the jackpot game having a round number of about 16R and a relatively long game time is played. We cannot find the significance of that.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, in the case of the 5R jackpot game in which the game time is relatively short, if the music is selected, the temporarily selected music is continuously output. In this way, even if the game time is a 5R jackpot game in which the playing time is relatively short, the tentatively selected song can be sung as the tentatively selected song, and the tentatively selected song can be continuously listened to. The temporarily selected music piece that has been set is not interrupted once, and it is possible to avoid listening to the chorus portion of the same music piece in a short time. As a result, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player does not hear the chorus portion of the same music in a short period of time and does not feel discomfort or disgust when the music is interrupted.

  On the other hand, in the case of a 16R jackpot with a relatively long game time, the tentatively selected song is output from the chorus portion, and the selected song is output from the A melody portion (singing out portion). Therefore, at the 16R jackpot, the player can avoid listening to the chorus portion of the same music piece in a short time. In addition, after enjoying the chorus portion as the tentatively selected song, the user can listen to the newly selected song from the song singing portion. Thereby, in the 16R jackpot game in which the game time is relatively long, the player can enjoy the tune of the selected music once again. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable or disgust when the music is interrupted.

  Here, FIG. 79 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a tentatively selected music piece output process executed in the present embodiment, and FIG. 80 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a selected music piece output process executed in the present embodiment. is there. In the tentatively selected tune output process shown in FIG. 79 and the selected tune output process shown in FIG. 80, the melody pattern settings of the tentatively selected tune and the selected tune are different from the default settings depending on the player for the sake of simplicity. If you do not consider.

  As shown in FIG. 79, in the present embodiment, the melody pattern is determined according to the jackpot type (more precisely, the number of rounds of the jackpot game) for the temporarily selected music (see FIG. 78). In the selected music output process, it is determined in step S4801 whether or not a 16R jackpot has been reached. Further, the melody pattern of the tentatively selected music piece is determined according to the determination result in step S4801 (steps S4802 and S4804), and the tentatively selected music piece is output according to the determined melody pattern (steps S4803 and S4805).

  Specifically, when the promotion effect flag is set to ON (step S2701: Yes), it is determined whether or not a 16R jackpot has been reached (step S4801). If the jackpot is not the 16R jackpot (step S4801: NO), that is, if the jackpot is the 5R jackpot, the melody pattern 1 is selected according to the default setting of the 5R jackpot (step S4802), and the tentatively selected music piece is the A melody portion (song start portion). (Step S4803). On the other hand, if it is a 16R jackpot (step S4801: YES), the melody pattern 2 is selected according to the default setting of the 16R jackpot, and the tentatively selected music piece is output from the chorus portion (step S4904).

  If a predetermined condition is satisfied (Yes in steps S2701 and S2702), a melody pattern is randomly selected (step S4806), and a tentatively selected music piece is output in a melody pattern according to the selected melody pattern (step S4806). S4807, S4803 and S4805).

  Here, in order for the melody pattern to be selected at random, it is required that the promotion flag is set to ON (step S2701: Yes), but the promotion effect flag is not set to ON in the case of the 16R jackpot. . Therefore, it can be determined that the 5R jackpot is reached when the promotion effect flag is set to ON. By selecting a melody pattern randomly in step S4806, 5R satisfying a predetermined condition (Yes in steps S2701 and S2702). For the jackpot, inconsistencies may occur in the melody pattern (output start portion) of the temporarily selected music.

  If the melody pattern 2 is not selected in step S4806 (step S4807: No), that is, if the melody pattern 1 is selected, the temporarily selected music is set to A according to the default setting of 5R jackpot according to the default setting of 5R jackpot. The melody part (singing start part) is output (step S4803). On the other hand, when the melody pattern 2 is selected in step S4806 (step S4807: Yes), the tentatively selected music is output from a climax part different from the default setting of the 5R jackpot. As a result, a contradiction occurs in the melody pattern (output start portion) of the tentatively selected music piece, and the fact that the promotion effect is to be executed is clearly specified before execution of the promotion effect.

  As shown in FIG. 80, in the present embodiment, the melody pattern is determined according to the jackpot type (more precisely, the number of rounds of the jackpot game) for the selected song (see FIG. 78). In the output process, it is determined in step S4901 whether or not a 5R jackpot has been reached. Specifically, when the selected music is the already selected music (step S2801: No), when the second or subsequent music is determined (step S2802: No), or when the promotion effect flag is set to off ( (Step S2803: No) It is determined whether it is a 5R jackpot or not (step S4901). If it is a 5R jackpot (step S4901: Yes), the temporarily selected music is continuously output according to the default setting of the 5R jackpot (step S4902). On the other hand, if it is not the 5R jackpot (step S4901: No), that is, if it is the 16R jackpot, the melody pattern 1 is selected according to the default setting of the 16R jackpot, and the selected music is output from the A melody part (singing out part) ( Step S4903).

  If the conditions for receiving the contradictory output lottery are satisfied (Yes in all steps of steps S2801 to S2803), the contradictory output lottery is performed (step S2804), and the contradictory output lottery is not won (step S2805: No), the tentatively selected tune is continuously output (step S4902). That is, in order to receive the contradictory output lottery, it is required that the promotion effect flag is set to ON (step S2803: Yes), but at the time when the promotion effect flag is set to ON as described above. Since it can be determined that the 5R jackpot is determined, if the inconsistency output lottery is not won (step S2805: NO), the temporarily selected music is continuously output according to the default setting of the 5R jackpot (step S4902).

  On the other hand, when the contradictory output lottery is won (step S2805: YES), the selected music is output by the melody pattern 1 different from the default setting of the 5R jackpot. As a result, a contradiction occurs in the melody pattern (output start portion) of the selected music, and it is specified in advance that the promotion effect is to be executed before the execution of the promotion effect.

  In this embodiment, since the default setting of the selected music in the case of the 5R jackpot is to continue the output of the temporarily selected music, the same setting of the music is obtained both during the temporary selection of the music and after the selection of the music during a short game time. It is avoided that a part is output and that music is output again from a different part after selection of the music. Thereby, in the case of the 5R jackpot, the music can be continuously heard without interruption except in the case of winning the contradictory output lottery, so that the music can be enjoyed without stress even in a short game time. On the other hand, in the 16R jackpot game state in which the playing time is long, the player listens to the chorus portion of the tentatively selected song and then listens again to the selected tune, which is the same song as the tentatively selected song, from the A melody portion (singing out portion). be able to. Therefore, in the 16R jackpot gaming state, since there is enough time for the game, the selected music including the chorus part of the music can be sufficiently enjoyed from the A melody part (starting singing part).

  In addition, it can be determined whether or not a promotion effect that clearly indicates that the player is in a more advantageous game state is executed based on whether or not inconsistency occurs in the output of music at the time of provisional selection or selection. Therefore, the player can enjoy the jackpot game by paying attention to the temporarily selected music and the output start portion of the selected music. Thereby, the operation on the selection button 21A of the selection determination unit 21 for temporarily selecting a music and the determination button 21B of the selection determination unit 21 for selecting a music is not an act of merely temporarily selecting or selecting a music. It can be enjoyed as an act of confirming whether or not the game state is a more advantageous game state for the player.

  In the present embodiment, the selected music is output from the continuation of the tentatively selected music (continuation of the tentatively selected music) on condition that it is a 5R jackpot. It is also conceivable to output the selected tune from the continuation (continuing the tentatively selected tune). Of course, at both the 5R jackpot and the 16R jackpot, the selected music may be output from the continuation of the selected music (continuation of the tentatively selected music). In the present embodiment, the output start of the tentatively selected song is a rust portion at a 5R jackpot and a start portion at a 16R jackpot (a singing portion). ), And the start of the output of the tentatively selected music piece of the 16R jackpot may be used as the chorus portion. In the present embodiment, the melody pattern is not set by the player in the tentatively selected music output process and the selected music output process, which is different from the default setting. Similarly, the temporarily selected music output processing and the selected music output processing may be executed in consideration of the fact that the melody pattern is set differently from the default setting by the player.

[Fourth embodiment]
In the above-described first embodiment, as the music selection button effect processing, when the promotion effect flag is set to ON, the condition that the unselected music is selected in the first music determination is set, and the music selection button effect is performed. The description has been given of the case where the (expected degree suggestion effect, the probable change determination effect, and the reservation extended villa determination effect) are executed (see FIG. 42).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as the music selection button effect processing, in addition to the conditions of the above-described first embodiment, the music selection is performed on the condition that a continuous hit operation or a long press operation on the determination button 21B is performed in response to the music determination operation. A case where a button effect is executed will be described.

  By the way, in the first embodiment described above, whether or not a decision operation for selecting a song with respect to the decision button 21B (see FIG. 1) is performed by the player is determined by a second decision operation pattern flag (FIG. 18F). ) Is set to ON (see step S2606 in the music selection processing of FIG. 39). That is, in the first embodiment described above, by confirming that the operation on the determination button 21B (see FIG. 1) has been started, it is determined that the music has been determined by the player on the determination button 21B. . As described above, when it is determined that the player has operated the determination button 21B by operating the determination button 21B (see FIG. 1), the music selection button effect is executed at the moment when the determination button 21B is operated. Can be confirmed. Therefore, the user can enjoy the moment of operating the determination button 21B as to whether or not the music selection button effect is to be executed.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the music selection button effect is executed on condition that the continuous hitting operation or the long pressing operation on the determination button 21B is performed. Therefore, unlike the above-described first embodiment, it is possible to increase the expectation that the music selection button effect will be executed for a certain period of time after the operation of the enter button 21B is started, and to perform a continuous hit operation on the enter button 21B or the like. You can enjoy long press operation. In other words, in the present embodiment, the operation on the determination button 21B can be enjoyed in a different manner from the first embodiment as to whether or not the music selection button effect is executed.

  In addition, the symbol display button 341 may indicate or indicate to the player that a music selection button effect is to be performed by a continuous hit operation or a long press operation on the determination button 21B. By not providing (for example, by using a display mode as shown in FIG. 25), a continuous tapping operation and a long pressing operation on the enter button 21B can be enjoyed as a so-called back command for executing a music selection button effect.

  Here, FIG. 81 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the music selection button effect processing executed in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 81, in the music selection button effect processing of the present embodiment, a determination operation is performed between step S2902 and step S2903 (see FIG. 42) of the music selection button effect processing of the above-described first embodiment. Then, it is determined whether or not a continuous hitting operation or a long pressing operation is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 1 second to 20 seconds) that has been set in advance (step S5101). Whether or not a continuous hit operation or a long press operation is performed when the determination operation is performed is determined based on the determination button operation data (see FIG. 18F). For example, in step S2606 in the music selection process of FIG. 39, when it is determined that the operation on the determination button 21B has been started by confirming the ON setting of the second determination operation pattern flag (step S2606: Yes), the constant It is possible to determine whether or not the continuous hitting operation has been performed on the determination button 21B by checking whether the ON / OFF of the second determination operation pattern flag is performed a plurality of times (for example, 5 to 30 times) within the time. Also, whether the long-press operation is performed depending on whether or not the duration in which the first determination operation pattern flag is set to ON reaches a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds to 15 seconds) within the predetermined time. Can be determined.

  Then, if a continuous tapping operation or a long pressing operation is performed within a certain period after the determination operation (step S5101: Yes), and if the first promotion effect flag is on (step S2903: Yes), a 5R certain variable song selection button An effect determination process is executed (step S2904), and when the second promotion effect flag or the third promotion effect flag is ON (step S2905: Yes), a 16R certain variable song selection button effect determination process is executed (step S2906). .

  In the present embodiment, when an unselected music piece is selected, a continuous selection operation or a long press operation is performed on the determination button 21B by the player, so that a music selection button effect can be executed. Therefore, the act of selecting a music can be enjoyed as an act of confirming whether or not a music selection button effect is executed by performing a continuous tapping operation or a long press operation. As a result, the player can be actively selected for music.

  In the present embodiment, the music selection button effect is executed on the condition that the continuous hit operation or the long press operation on the determination button 21B is performed in response to the music determination operation. The music selection button effect may be executed when either one of the conditions in the mode (the operation on the determination button 21B is started) is satisfied. That is, when the operation on the determination button 21B is started, the music selection button effect may be executed at any timing when it is confirmed that the long press operation or the continuous hit operation is performed.

  In step S5101, it is determined whether one of the continuous hitting operation and the long pressing operation is performed. However, only the continuous pressing operation or the long pressing operation on the determination button 21B is determined in step S5101. It may be.

  In step S2901, it is determined whether or not an unselected song is selected. However, step S2901 may be omitted, and a song selection button effect may be executed even when an already-selected song is selected. Of course, the music selection button effect may be executed only when the already-selected music is selected.

[Fifth Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, when the promotion effect flag is set to ON as the music selection button effect process, the selection of the unselected music is performed by operating the determination button 21B (see FIG. 1) in the first music determination. The description has been given of the case where the music selection button effect (the effect indicating the degree of expectation, the effect of confirming the probability of change, and the effect of confirming the held villa) are executed on the condition that the effect is performed (see FIG. 42). In the above-described fourth embodiment, in addition to the conditions of the above-described first embodiment, the continuous selection operation or the long-press operation on the determination button 21B (see FIG. 1) in response to the music determination operation is performed as the music selection button effect processing. Has been described on the condition that the music selection button effect is executed (see FIG. 81). In the first embodiment and the fourth embodiment described above, it is possible to enjoy whether or not the music selection button effect is executed by operating the determination button 21B for selecting a music piece.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as the music selection button effect processing, in the first music determination, an unselected music is selected by an operation on the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1) different from the determination button 21B. A case where a music selection button effect is executed will be described. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that both the operation on the determination button 21B and the operation on the operation button 20 are effective as a determination operation for music selection. Specifically, in step S2606 in the music selection processing of FIG. 39, the second operation pattern flag of the operation button operation data shown in FIG. 18A and the second determination of the determination button operation data shown in FIG. When it is confirmed that any one of the operation pattern flags is set to ON, it is determined that the determination operation for the music selection has been performed.

  In the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, similarly to the above-described first embodiment and the fourth embodiment, a music piece can be selected by operating the enter button 21B. In addition, unlike the first embodiment and the fourth embodiment described above, a music piece can be selected by operating the operation button 20. Then, the music selection button effect is executed on condition that the operation button 20 is operated instead of the determination button 21B. That is, since the music selection button effect is executed by an operation different from the first embodiment and the fourth embodiment, it is determined whether the music selection button effect is executed. A different way of enjoying from the fourth embodiment can be achieved.

  In addition, the symbol display button 341 may be suggested or specified to the player on the symbol display unit 341 by performing an operation on the operation button 20, but by not performing such suggestion or specification (for example, With the display mode as shown in FIG. 25), the operation of deciding the music by the operation button 20 can be enjoyed as a back command for executing the music selection button effect.

  Here, FIG. 82 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the music selection button effect processing executed in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 82, in the music selection button effect processing of the present embodiment, the operation on the operation button 20 is performed between the step S2902 and the step S2903 (see FIG. 42) of the music selection button effect processing of the first embodiment. It is determined whether or not a music piece has been selected (step S5201). Whether or not the music is selected by the operation on the operation button 20 is determined, for example, based on whether or not the second operation pattern flag of the operation button operation data is set to ON. Then, in step S5201, when it is determined that the music is selected by the operation on the operation button 20 (step S5201: Yes), when the first promotion effect flag is ON (step S2903: Yes), the 5R certain variable song selection button effect The determination process is executed (step S2904), and when the second promotion effect flag or the third promotion effect flag is ON (step S2905: Yes), the 16R certain variable song selection button effect determination process is executed (step S2906).

  In the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 25, the player instructs to operate the determination button 21B in order to perform the determination operation, but the determination is made for the operation button 20 different from the instructed determination button 21B. By performing the operation, a music selection button effect can be executed. Therefore, interest in the act of selecting music is improved.

  In the present embodiment, the music selection button effect is executed on the condition that the music is determined by the determination operation on the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1). However, in this condition and the first embodiment described above. (The operation of the determination button 21B is started), the music selection button effect may be executed. That is, the music selection button effect may be executed at any of the timing when the operation on the determination button 21B is started and the timing when the operation on the operation button 20 is started.

  Further, when either one of the condition (decision operation for the operation button 20) in the present embodiment and the condition (continuous hit operation or long-press operation for the decision button 21B) in the fourth embodiment is satisfied. A music selection button effect may be executed. That is, the music selection button effect may be executed at any of the timing when the operation on the operation button 20 is started and the timing when it is confirmed that the long press operation or the continuous hit operation is performed. Of course, the music selection button effect can be executed at any timing when any of the conditions in the present embodiment, the conditions in the first embodiment described above, and the conditions in the fourth embodiment described above is satisfied. You may.

  Also, instead of the music being determined by the determination operation on the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1), the music selection button effect is performed when a long press operation or a continuous hit operation is performed on the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1). It may be performed.

  In the music selection button effect processing of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not an unselected music piece is selected in step S2901. However, step S2901 is omitted, and the music selection button effect is performed even when the already selected music piece is selected. May be executed. Of course, the music selection button effect may be executed only when the already-selected music is selected.

[Summary of the Invention]
Hereinafter, the outline of the invention extracted from each of the above embodiments will be additionally described. In addition, in order to facilitate understanding of the correspondence between each supplementary note and each embodiment, the description may be given with reference numerals for convenience, but the invention according to the supplementary note is limited to a specific configuration given the reference numerals. is not. Further, each configuration and each processing function described below can be selected and arbitrarily combined.

[Appendix A1]
Main control means (41) for determining whether or not to shift the game state to a special game state advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition;
Effecting means (26, 341 etc.) including image display means (341) for effecting an image, and sound output means (26) for effecting the output of music;
A music selection image (83) for allowing a player to select a music to be output by the audio output means (26) from a plurality of music is displayed on the image display means (341), and based on the music selection image (83). Effect execution means (51) for outputting the music selected by the player to the sound output means (26);
Operating means (21) operated by a player when selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26) based on the music selection image (83) displayed by the image display means (341);
With
The effect executing means (51) includes:
Temporarily indicating that the music selection image (83) is a tentatively selected music that can be selected by a player's determination operation on the operation means (21) for selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26). An image including a selected music image (832) and a selected music image (831) indicating that the music to be output by the audio output means (26) is already selected by the player. Is displayed on the image display means (341),
Changing the tentatively selected music image (832) in the music selection image (83) in response to an operation on the operation means (21) by the player;
When the provisionally selected music image (832) is displayed on the image display means (341), the audio output means (26) outputs the provisionally selected music piece. A gaming machine, wherein the music output is output from the audio output means (26) as a selected music.

According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A1, a selected music image indicating that the selected music has already been selected by the player as a music selection image for causing the player to select a music is displayed on the image display means. Is displayed. Therefore, the player can very easily find an image for selecting the already selected music from the music selection images when selecting the already selected music that has been selected before. Then, the player can tentatively select the selected tune and display it as the tentatively selected tune image by operating the operating means while checking the position of the selected tune image in the tune selection image. In addition, by performing a determination operation on the operation means in a state where the previously selected music piece previously selected is displayed as the tentatively selected music image, the selected music piece can be output from the audio output means. Therefore, the player can efficiently select the previously selected music piece with a small number of operations on the operation means, and output the selected music piece from the audio output means.
Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to supplementary note A1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the degree of interest in special games and the interest in special games, thereby improving the player's willingness to play.

[Appendix A2]
The effect executing means (51) displays a predetermined number (for example, "10") of music selection images (83) that is a predetermined number smaller than the number of the plurality of music pieces (for example, "20") to the image display means. (341) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A1, wherein the gaming machine is displayed.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A2, there are prepared so many songs that the image display means cannot display them all at once, and in a case where a song selection image for some of the plurality of songs is displayed. Even so, the already-selected music image for selecting the already-selected music is displayed, so that the already-selected music can be easily selected by a simple operation.

[Appendix A3]
The supplementary note A1 or the supplementary note, wherein the effect performing means (51) displays the provisionally selected music image (832) and the already selected music image (831) on the image display means (341) in a distinguishable manner. The gaming machine according to A2.

[Appendix A4]
The gaming machine according to attachment A3, wherein the effect performing means (51) displays the selected music image (831) in a display mode different from that of the provisionally selected music image (832).

[Appendix A5]
The effect executing means (51) displays the selected music image (832) by displaying an additional image indicating that the music is the selected music in at least a part of the periphery of the selected music image (831). The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A3 or A4, wherein the image is displayed on the image display means (341) so as to be distinguishable from the temporarily selected music image (832).

[Appendix A6]
The effect executing means (51) displays the selected music image (832) on the temporarily selected music image by displaying the selected music image (831) in a predetermined area of the image display means (341). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A3 to A5, wherein the gaming machine displays the image (832) so as to be distinguishable from the image (832).

  According to the gaming machines according to Supplementary Notes A3 to A6, the selected music image is displayed in a form that can be distinguished from the tentatively selected music image, so that it is easier to find the selected music image from the music selected images. Therefore, the convenience in temporarily selecting and selecting the already-selected music is further improved.

[Appendix A7]
The said effect execution means (51) displays on said image display means (341) the said predetermined | prescribed upper limit number of the said selected music image (831) selected from two or more numbers on the said image display means (341). To A6.

[Appendix A8]
A storage unit (512) for storing selected music information on the selected music;
The effect executing means (51) displays the upper limit number of the selected music images (831) on the image display means (341) based on the selected music information stored in the storage means (512). The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A7, wherein the gaming machine is operated.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A7 and Supplementary Note A8, the image display means displays less than or equal to the upper limit number of selected music images selected from two or more. That is, since a plurality of selected music images can be displayed, the convenience of provisional selection and selection of a plurality of selected music pieces that have been selected in the past is improved. On the other hand, by setting an upper limit on the number of the selected music images, the display of an excessive number of the selected music images is prevented. Therefore, the player can select the previously selected music piece based on an appropriate number of the already selected music images, thereby reducing the operation burden when selecting the already selected music piece.

[Appendix A9]
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A8, wherein, when a plurality of music selections are performed in the special game state, the storage unit (512) stores only the last selected music as a selected music. .

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A9, when a plurality of music selections are performed in the special gaming state, only the music selected last is regarded as the already selected music. Therefore, even if a plurality of music selections are performed during the execution of one special game state, the final selection music becomes clear and the already-selected music image is occupied by the already-selected music for one special game state. Can be prevented. In addition, for example, when the user does not like the music once selected and reselects another music, it is possible to prevent the unfavorable music from being displayed as the already-selected music image and to select the newly selected music from the already-selected music. Convenience when selecting based on a music image is improved.

[Appendix A10]
In the initial music selection image (83) to be displayed first on the image display means (341), the effect executing means (51) sorts the upper limit number of the selected music images (831) in descending order of selection date and time. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A7 to A9, wherein the gaming machine is arranged and displayed at a position close to the temporarily selected music image (832).

  According to the gaming machine related to Supplementary Note A10, in the music selection image displayed first, the already-selected music image corresponding to the newly-selected music with the new selection date and time is displayed at a position close to the temporarily-selected music image. Therefore, when the music selection image is displayed, the player can easily find the most recently selected music piece, and can again select the most recently selected music piece by the number of operations on the operation means. As a result, the player can reduce the operation burden when selecting the most recently selected music piece again, and can concentrate on the special game and enjoy the game.

[Appendix A11]
In the initial music selection image (83) to be displayed first on the image display means (341), the effect executing means (51) sorts the upper limit number of the selected music images (831) in descending order of selection frequency. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A7 to A9, wherein the gaming machine is arranged and displayed at a position near the temporarily selected music image.

  According to the gaming machine related to the supplementary note A11, the already-selected music image corresponding to the already-selected music having a high selection frequency (for example, the number of selections or the selection rate within a predetermined number of times) is displayed at a position near the temporarily-selected music image. That is, the already-selected music image is displayed as reflecting the recent tendency of the player to select music. Therefore, when the music selection image is displayed, the player can easily find the recently selected music that has been recently selected, and can again select the recently selected music with a small number of operations on the operation means. Thereby, the player can reduce the operation burden when selecting the recently selected music piece again, and can enjoy the game by focusing on the special game.

[Appendix A12]
The said effect execution means (51) displays on said image display means (341) all the said upper limit number of said selected music image (831) as a thing with respect to a different music, Additional notes A7 to Additional notes A11 characterized by the above-mentioned. A gaming machine according to any of the above.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A12, since the selected music images do not include a plurality of images corresponding to the same music, even when the display number of the selected music images has an upper limit, the music corresponding to the upper limit is set. The selected music images corresponding to the number of the selected music are displayed. Therefore, when the player repeatedly selects the same music and wants to select a selected music other than that music, the player can easily find the already-selected music to be selected. As a result, the operation burden when the player selects the previously selected music piece again is reduced, so that the player can concentrate on the special game and enjoy the game.

[Appendix A13]
When the display number of the selected music image (831) to be displayed on the image display means (341) is less than the upper limit number, the display number is insufficient for the upper limit number (for example, “1” to “3”). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes A7 to A12, wherein the non-selected song image (833) is displayed as the song selection image (83) according to (1).

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A13, even when the number of already-selected music images to be displayed on the image display means is less than the upper limit, an unselected music image is displayed instead of the already-selected music image. Thereby, the specified number of music selection images can be displayed on the image display means without excess or deficiency.

[Appendix A14]
The effect executing means (51) includes:
As the music selection image (83), an unselected music image (833) indicating that it is an unselected music other than the selected music among the plurality of music is further identifiably displayed on the image display means (341). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A1 to A13, wherein the gaming machine is displayed.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A14, the player can distinguish and recognize the already-selected music image that has been selected previously and the unselected music image that has not been previously selected. By operating the operation means while checking, it is possible to tentatively select an unselected song and display it as a tentatively selected song image. Therefore, even when selecting a non-selected song instead of the already-selected song, the player can select the non-selected song with a small number of operations on the operation unit and output the unselected song from the audio output unit.

[Appendix A15]
The rendering executing means (51), when displaying the music selection image (83) on the image display means (341), displays the temporarily selected music image (832) with the selected music image (831) and the unselected music image (831). The gaming machine according to attachment A14, wherein the gaming machine is displayed between the selected music image (833).

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A15, at least at the stage where the music selection image is first displayed on the image display means, both the selected image and the unselected image are adjacent to the provisionally selected music image. For this reason, the player changes the tentatively selected music image in the music selection image by operating the operation means, thereby selecting either the previously selected music that has been selected before or the unselected music that has not been previously selected. Even if the user selects a music piece, the target music piece can be provisionally selected with a small number of operations. Therefore, the target music can be selected with a small number of operations, and the target music can be output from the audio output unit.

[Appendix A16]
When displaying the music selection image (83) on the image display means (341), the effect executing means (51) sets the plurality of initial provisionally selected music pieces for the initial provisional selection music image (832) to be displayed first. The gaming machine according to supplementary note A14 or supplementary note A15, wherein a selection is made from the unselected songs among the songs.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A16, the initial provisionally selected music piece is selected from the unselected music pieces, and the initial provisionally selected music piece that is the unselected music piece is output from the audio output means. Therefore, even when the player finally selects a music piece from the already selected music piece, it is possible for the player to listen to the unselected music piece in the process up to that point, and the goodness of the unselected music piece to the player. Can give an opportunity to communicate.

[Appendix A17]
When the tentatively selected song or the selected song is the already-selected song and the unselected song, the tentatively-selected song or the selected song is played from the different portion of the tentatively-selected song or the selected song. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A14 to A16, wherein the gaming machine outputs the output means (26).

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A17, by performing a determination operation on the operation unit in a state where the unselected music piece is displayed as the temporarily selected music image, the unselected music piece that has not been previously selected is replaced with the already selected music piece. It is possible to output to the audio output means from a different part of the music than the case where it is selected. This allows the player to listen to the selected music from different parts when the selected music is selected and when the unselected music is selected, so that the player outputs the selected music and the unselected music. The user can enjoy the music in a different way than when the music is output.

[Appendix A18]
When the tentatively selected music piece is the selected music piece, the effect execution means (51) causes the audio output means (26) to output the music piece from the music start part of the already selected music piece, and outputs the temporarily selected music piece to the unselected music piece. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A17, wherein when the music piece is a selected music piece, the audio output means (26) outputs the unselected music piece from a chorus portion.

  According to the gaming machine related to Supplementary Note A18, the player can listen to the tentatively selected music piece from the music start portion when the tentatively selected music piece is the already-selected music piece, and can perform rusting when the tentatively selected music piece is an unselected music piece. You can listen from the part. Therefore, regarding the tentatively selected song, the previously selected song can be enjoyed from the start portion. On the other hand, since the player can listen to the music that has not been selected before from the climax part of the music that has the highest climax, the player determines whether or not the temporarily selected music is the music of his choice. It will be easier.

[Appendix A19]
When the selected music piece is the selected music piece, the effect executing means (51) causes the audio output means (26) to output the selected music piece from a music start portion, and the selected music piece is the unselected music piece. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A17 or A18, wherein the audio output unit (26) outputs the unselected music piece from a chorus portion.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A19, the player can listen to the selected music piece from the music start part when the selected music piece is the already selected music piece, and can start listening to the chorus part when the selected music piece is the unselected music piece. You can listen. Therefore, with respect to the selected music, the player can enjoy the music from the start part for the music selected before. On the other hand, the player can listen to music that has not been selected before from the climax part of the music that is the most exciting, so it is easy to determine whether the selected music this time is the music of his choice Become.

[Appendix A20]
The operation means (21) is operated by a player when setting related to effects in the special game state,
Display setting means (51) for performing display setting as to whether or not to display the selected music image (831) in response to a setting operation on the operation means (21) by a player;
The effect executing means (51) includes:
A display setting screen which enables a display screen of the image display means (341) to be set in accordance with an operation on the operation means (21) by a player, whether or not to display the selected music image (831). (88, 98)
The display setting unit (51) is configured to perform the setting operation by a player by operating the operation unit (21) when the display screen is the display setting screen (88, 98). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes A1 to A19, wherein the display setting is performed in accordance with setting contents set by a player.

  According to the gaming machine related to Supplementary Note A20, it is possible to set whether or not to display the already-selected music image included in the music selection image. Therefore, the music selection image is displayed on the image display means in a display mode according to the player's preference. be able to. Thereby, the player can select the music to be output from the audio output means based on the music selection image in the display mode set by the player. Further, the player can select whether or not to display the selected music image in the music selection image. Therefore, for example, when the music selection image includes the already-selected music image corresponding to the already-selected music selected by the previous player in the past, the player displays the music selection image that does not include the already-selected music image. be able to.

[Appendix A21]
A display setting storage unit (512) capable of storing setting history information on a setting history for the display setting;
The effect executing means (51) is provided as the display setting screen (88, 98) in the image display means (341) in response to an operation on the operation means (21) by a player. ) To a display setting history screen (88) displaying a setting history image (881) corresponding to the setting history information stored in
The display setting means (51) is configured to, when the display screen is the display setting history screen (88), perform a setting operation for performing the display setting based on the setting history image (881) by a player. The gaming machine according to attachment A20, wherein the display setting of contents set by a player is performed.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A21, the player performs the same display setting as the past setting content by performing the setting operation on the operation unit when the display screen on the image display unit is the display setting history screen. Can be. Therefore, when the player wants to return to the previous setting, the player can make a desired display setting based on the display setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix A22]
The gaming machine according to attachment A21, wherein the effect executing means (51) displays the setting history image (881) including an image indicating a set time on the display setting history screen (88).

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A22, the player can distinguish between the setting history of the player who has previously played the game and his / her own setting history by referring to the setting time, When there is a setting history to be selected in the setting history, it is easy to give a possibility of selecting a desired setting history. Therefore, the player can make desired display settings based on the display setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix A23]
An output for making an output start setting for starting the output of the provisionally selected music or the selected music from any of a plurality of output start parts predetermined according to a setting operation on the operation means (21) by the player. Further comprising start setting means (51);
The effect executing means (51) changes the display screen of the image display means (341) to an output start setting screen (87) enabling the output start setting in response to an operation on the operation means (21) by the player. , 97)
The output start setting means (51) performs the output start part setting by the player by operating the operation means (21) when the display screen is the output start setting screen (87, 97). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A1 to A22, wherein when the operation is performed, the output start setting for the provisionally selected music piece or the selected music piece is performed according to the setting content set by the player. .

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A23, the output start portion of the tentatively selected song or the selected song can be set, so that the tentatively selected song or the selected song can be output from the audio output means from a portion that matches the player's preference. it can.

[Appendix A24]
The gaming machine according to attachment A23, wherein the plurality of output start portions include a music start portion and a chorus portion.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A24, the player can cause the tentatively selected song or the selected song to start outputting from the song start portion or the chorus portion. Therefore, the player can start outputting the tentatively selected music piece or the selected music piece from a portion that suits his or her taste. Here, the music start part or the chorus part is characteristic compared to other parts such as the B melody part of the music. For this reason, the player selects whether the tentatively selected music or the selected music is the previously selected music by selecting the part for starting the output of the temporarily selected music or the selected music from the music start part and the chorus part. This makes it easy to determine whether a song has not been played or has not been heard before.

[Appendix A25]
Output start setting storage means (512) capable of storing setting history information on a setting history for the output start setting;
The effect execution means (51) is provided as the output start setting screen (87, 97) on the image display means (341) in response to an operation on the operation means (21) by a player. (512) The display shifts to an output start setting history screen (87) displaying a setting history image (871) corresponding to the setting history information stored in (512),
When the output screen is the output start setting history screen (87), the output start setting means (51) is operated by the player to perform the output start setting based on the setting history image (871). The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A23 or A24, wherein in the case, the output start setting having the content set by the player is performed.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A25, when the display screen on the image display unit is the output start setting history screen, the player performs a setting operation on the operation unit, thereby outputting the same content as the past output start setting. Can be a start setting. Therefore, when the player wants to return to the previous settings, the player can make a desired output start setting based on the output start setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix A26]
The gaming machine according to attachment A25, wherein the effect executing means (51) displays the setting history image (871) including an image indicating a set time on the output start setting history screen (87).

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A26, the player can refer to the set time, for example, to distinguish between the setting history of a player who has played a game before and his or her own setting history, and When there is a setting history to be selected in the setting history, it is easy to give a possibility of selecting a desired setting history. Therefore, the player can make a desired output start setting based on the output start setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix B1]
Main control means (41) for determining whether or not to shift the game state to a special game state advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition;
Effecting means (26, 341 etc.) including image display means (341) for effecting an image, and sound output means (26) for effecting the output of music;
Music selection information storage means (512) for storing music selection information relating to music selection by the player;
A music selection image (83) for allowing a player to select a music to be output by the audio output means (26) from a plurality of music is displayed on the image display means (341), and based on the music selection image (83). Effect execution means (51) for outputting the music selected by the player to the sound output means (26);
Operating means (21) operated by a player when selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26) based on the music selection image (83) displayed by the image display means (341);
With
The effect executing means (51) includes:
The tune selection image (83) indicates that the tune is a tentatively selected tune that can be selected by at least a determination operation on the operation means (21) by a player for selecting a tune to be output by the audio output means (26). The temporarily selected music image (832) is displayed on the image display means (341) so as to be identifiable,
Changing the tentatively selected music image (832) in the music selection image (83) in response to an operation on the operation means (21) by the player;
When the provisionally selected music image (832) is displayed on the image display means (341), the audio output means (26) outputs the provisionally selected music piece. Output the selected music as the selected music from the audio output means (26);
The music selection information storage means includes, as the music selection information, provisionally selected music information relating to the provisionally selected music, and a previously selected music which has already been selected by the player as the music to be output by the audio output means (26). Stored selected music information and unselected music information related to unselected music other than the selected music among the plurality of music,
The unselected tune information is the initial tentatively selected tune image among the initial tentatively selected tunes corresponding to the initially tentatively selected tune image initially displayed on the image display means (341) as the tentatively selected tune image (832). A non-selected music information relating to a non-selected music not selected by the player at the stage when the image is displayed on the image display means (341).

According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B1, the non-selected music information related to the non-selected music is stored in the music selection information storage unit. Therefore, based on the non-selected music information, it is possible for the player to recognize the information on the non-selected music via the presentation means such as the image display means. This allows the player to recognize which of the plurality of music pieces is the non-selected music piece, and thus, despite being displayed on the image display means (341) as the initial temporarily selected music piece image. This eliminates the hassle of tentatively selecting or selecting a non-selected song that was not selected by the player.
Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the level of interest in special games and the interest in special games, thereby improving the player's willingness to play.

[Appendix B2]
Information updating means (51) for updating the music selection information stored in the music selection information storage means (512);
The information updating means (51) executes an update for clearing information related to a song corresponding to the selected song from the non-selected song information when the selected song is the non-selected song. The gaming machine according to B1.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B2, since the non-selected music is treated as other music when the non-selected music is selected, the music selected by the player is displayed on the image display means as a non-selected music image. It is avoided that it is continued. This prevents the player from mistaking the previously selected song as a non-selected song and avoiding unintentionally avoiding the selection of the song.

[Appendix B3]
The information updating means (51) executes an update in which, when the selected music piece is the non-selected music piece, information on a music piece corresponding to the selected music piece is included in the already-selected music piece information. The gaming machine according to B2.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B3, in addition to preventing a previously selected song from being mistaken as a non-selected song, the selected song corresponding to the song because the song is treated as a selected song The image will be displayed on the image display means. This makes it possible to more reliably prevent the user from unintentionally avoiding the selection of the music.

[Appendix B4]
The effect executing means (51) includes:
As the music selection image (83), at least the provisionally selected music image (832), the selected music image (831) indicating the selected music, and the unselected music indicating the unselected music Displaying the image (833) on the image display means (341);
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B1 to B3, wherein the unselected song image (833) includes an identifiable non-selected song image (834) indicating the non-selected song.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B4, since an image including a non-selected music image is displayed as an unselected music image, the player does not select it even though it was initially displayed as a temporarily selected music image in the past. Since the non-selected music piece can be distinguished from other music pieces, the player can more reliably avoid unintended temporary selection of the non-selected music piece. In addition, since the non-selected music image is displayed, the user can search for a new favorite music while avoiding the non-selected music, so that even when the music selection is restricted to a relatively short time, the time limit can be reduced. It can be used effectively to find new favorite songs.

  In the gaming machine according to Appendix B4, since the selected music image and the unselected music are displayed as the music selection images, the player can not only distinguish and recognize the selected music and the unselected music but also select the selected music. Regardless of whether a tune or an unselected tune is selected, the target tune can be easily and efficiently selected with a small number of operations on the operation means and output from the audio output means.

[Appendix B5]
The effect executing means (51) is based on the non-selected music information stored in the music selection information storage means, and has a predetermined upper limit number of previously unselected music images (831) selected from two or more numbers. ) Is displayed on the image display means (341).

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B5, since the upper limit is set on the number of the non-selected music images, an excessive number of the non-selected music images is prevented from being displayed, and the non-selected music is unnecessarily selected. Risk can be further reduced.

[Appendix B6]
The effect executing means (51) arranges and displays the non-selected music images (834) for the upper limit number of the non-selected music pieces in a position farthest from the temporarily selected music image (832) in the order of the latest non-selection date and time. The gaming machine according to supplementary note B5, wherein:

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B6, since the non-selected music image corresponding to the new non-selected music at the non-selected date and time is displayed at a position far from the temporarily selected music image, the non-selected music that has not been selected most recently is selected. Risk can be reduced.

[Appendix B7]
The effect executing means (51) includes:
A predetermined number (for example, “10”) of music selection images (83) that is smaller than the number of the plurality of music (for example, “20”) is displayed on the image display means (341);
In the initial music selection image (83) displayed first on the image display means (341), the non-selected music image (834) is not displayed on the image display means (341), and the player operates the operation means. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes B4 to B6, wherein the non-selected music image (834) is displayed on the image display means (341) according to the following.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B7, the non-selected music image is not displayed in the initial music selection image initially displayed on the image display means. On the other hand, non-selected songs are less likely to be selected by the player. Therefore, since the non-selected music image is not displayed in the initial music selection image, the unselected music (excluding the non-selected music) that is more likely to be selected by the player than the non-selected music in the initial music selection image. Many can be displayed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the time required for selecting a song from unselected songs excluding the non-selected song, and to reduce the stress applied to the player in song selection. On the other hand, since the player can display the non-selected music image by operating the operation means, it is also possible to select a music from the non-selected music.

[Appendix B8]
An initial music arrangement determining means (51) for determining an initial arrangement of the plurality of music pieces for displaying the music selection image (83) on the image display means (341);
The effect executing means (51) causes the image display means (341) to display the music selection image (83) in accordance with the initial arrangement determined by the initial music arrangement determining means (51),
The initial music arrangement determining means (51) is configured to set the non-selected music piece to a position where the minimum number of times of operation on the operation means (21) necessary for making the non-selected music piece the temporarily selected music piece is the largest in the initial arrangement. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B4 to B7, wherein music pieces are arranged.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B8, the minimum number of times of operation on the operation means necessary for a non-selected music piece that is unlikely to be selected by the player (highly likely to avoid the selection by the player) to be a temporarily selected music piece Are arranged at the position where the number is largest. Therefore, similarly to the gaming machine according to supplementary note B7, in the initial music selection image, more unselected music (excluding non-selected music) that is more likely to be selected by the player than non-selected music can be displayed. it can. As a result, it is possible to reduce the time required for selecting a song from unselected songs excluding the non-selected song, and to reduce the stress applied to the player in song selection.

[Appendix B9]
The operation means (21) is operated by a player when setting related to effects in the special game state,
Display setting means (51) for performing display setting as to whether or not to display the unselected music image (834) in response to a setting operation on the operation means (21) by a player;
The effect executing means (51) includes:
A display setting screen that enables a display screen of the image display means (341) to be set in accordance with a player's operation on the operation means (21), whether or not to display the unselected music image (831). (88, 98)
The display setting unit (51) is configured to perform the setting operation by a player by operating the operation unit (21) when the display screen is the display setting screen (88, 98). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes B4 to B8, wherein the display setting is performed in accordance with setting contents set by a player.

  According to the gaming machine according to attachment B9, the player can select whether or not to display the non-selected music image in the music selection image. For this reason, the player selects a music selection image that does not include the non-selected music image, for example, when the music selection image includes a non-selected music image for a non-selected music that the previous player did not previously select. Can be displayed.

[Appendix B10]
A display setting storage unit (512) capable of storing setting history information on a setting history for the display setting;
The effect executing means (51) is provided as the display setting screen (88, 98) in the image display means (341) in response to an operation on the operation means (21) by a player. ) To a display setting history screen (88) displaying a setting history image (881) corresponding to the setting history information stored in
The display setting unit (51) is configured to perform a setting operation for performing the display setting based on the setting history image (881) by the player when the display screen is the display setting history screen (88). The gaming machine according to attachment B9, wherein the display setting of the content set by the player is performed.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B10, the player performs the same display setting as the past setting content by performing the setting operation on the operation unit when the display screen on the image display unit is the display setting history screen. Can be. Therefore, when the player wants to return to the previous setting, the player can make a desired display setting based on the display setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix B11]
The gaming machine according to attachment B10, wherein the effect executing means (51) displays the setting history image (881) including an image indicating a set time on the display setting history screen (88).

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B11, the player can distinguish between the setting history of the player who previously played the game and his / her own setting history by referring to the setting time, When there is a setting history to be selected in the setting history, it is easy to give a possibility of selecting a desired setting history. Therefore, the player can make desired display settings based on the display setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix B12]
The effect executing means (51) is configured to first display the music selection image (83) on the image display means (341) as the temporary selection music image (832). 832) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B1 to B11, wherein an initial tentatively selected tune for the non-selected tune is selected from the unselected tunes, and the initial tentatively selected tune is output from the audio output means (26). .

  According to the gaming machine related to Supplementary Note B12, when the music selection image is displayed, the initial temporarily selected music to be displayed as the temporarily selected music image is first selected from the unselected music, and the unselected music is output from the audio output unit. You. Therefore, even when the player finally selects a music piece from the already selected music piece, it is possible for the player to listen to the unselected music piece as the initial provisionally selected music piece in the process up to that point. An opportunity to convey the goodness of unselected songs can be secured.

[Appendix B13]
The gaming machine according to attachment B12, wherein the effect executing means (51) selects the initial tentatively selected music piece from music pieces other than the non-selected music piece among the unselected music pieces.

  According to the gaming machine related to Supplementary Note B13, when displaying the music selection image, the initial provisionally selected music is selected from non-selected music other than the non-selected music. For this reason, the player selects the non-selected music that has not been selected by the player despite having been previously selected as the tentatively selected music by the effect execution means, and is again selected by the effect execution means and displayed as the initial temporarily selected music image. You are free from the hassle of doing things.

[Appendix C1]
Main control means (41) for determining whether or not to shift the game state to a special game state advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition;
Effecting means (26, 341 etc.) including image display means (341) for effecting an image, and sound output means (26) for effecting the output of music;
A music selection image (83) for allowing a player to select a music to be output by the audio output means (26) from a plurality of music is displayed on the image display means (341), and based on the music selection image (83). Effect execution means (51) for outputting the music selected by the player to the sound output means (26);
Operating means (21) operated by a player when selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26) based on the music selection image (83) displayed by the image display means (341);
With
The effect executing means (51) includes:
The tune selection image (83) indicates that the tune is a tentatively selected tune that can be selected by at least a determination operation on the operation means (21) by a player for selecting a tune to be output by the audio output means (26). Displaying the temporarily selected music image (832) on the image display means (341);
Changing the tentatively selected music image (832) in the music selection image (83) in response to an operation on the operation means (21) by the player;
When the provisionally selected music image (832) is displayed on the image display means (341), the audio output means (26) outputs the provisionally selected music piece. Output the selected music as the selected music from the audio output means (26);
The tentatively selected song or the selected song, depending on whether the tentatively selected song or the selected song is a previously selected song that has already been selected by a player or a non-selected song other than the already selected song. A game machine that outputs the tentatively selected music piece or the selected music piece to the audio output means (26) from different portions of the game machine.

[Appendix C2]
The effect executing means (51) causes the audio output means (26) to output the provisionally selected music or the selected music from a music start portion when the provisionally selected music or the selected music is the already selected music. The gaming machine according to supplementary note C1, characterized in that:

[Appendix C3]
The effect executing means (51) outputs the provisionally selected music or the selected music from the chorus portion to the audio output means (26) when the provisionally selected music or the selected music is the unselected music. A gaming machine according to supplementary note C1 or supplementary note C2.

  According to the gaming machines according to Supplementary Notes C1 to C3, the selected music pieces are output from different parts of the music pieces depending on whether the already-selected music pieces are temporarily selected or selected and the unselected music pieces are temporarily selected or selected. Therefore, the player can enjoy the tentatively selected tune or the selected tune from different parts depending on whether the tentatively selected or unselected tune is selected or the tentatively selected or unselected tune is selected. For example, if the tentatively selected song or the selected song is a previously selected song, the already selected song can be heard from the song start portion, and if the temporarily selected song or the selected song is an unselected song, the unselected song is played. You can listen from the part. Therefore, for the already-selected tune having previously heard the chorus portion, it can be enjoyed from the tune start portion. On the other hand, for a song that has not been selected before, it is possible to listen to the climax portion of the song that has the highest climax, so that it is easy to determine whether the song is one that you like.

[Appendix C4]
The effect executing means (51), when displaying the music selection image (83) on the image display means (341), displays an initial temporary selection music image (832) to be displayed first as the temporary selection music image (832). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes C1 to C3, wherein an initial tentatively selected music piece for the plurality of music pieces is selected from the unselected music pieces among the plurality of music pieces.

[Appendix C5]
The gaming machine according to attachment C4, wherein the effect executing means (51) outputs the initial tentatively selected music piece from the chorus portion to the audio output means (26).

  According to the gaming machines according to Supplementary Notes C4 and C5, when displaying the music selection image, the tentatively selected music to be displayed as the temporarily selected music image is first selected from the unselected music, and the unselected music is, for example, a rust portion. From the voice output means. Therefore, even when the player finally selects a music piece from the selected music pieces, the player can be made to listen to the unselected music pieces in the process up to that point. In particular, when the initially provisionally selected music is output from the chorus portion, the chorus portion of the unselected music that has the highest climax can always be heard, and an opportunity to convey the goodness of the unselected music to the player can be secured.

[Appendix C6]
An output for making an output start setting for starting the output of the provisionally selected music or the selected music from any of a plurality of output start parts predetermined according to a setting operation on the operation means (21) by the player. Further comprising start setting means (51);
The effect executing means (51) changes the display screen of the image display means (341) to an output start setting screen (87) enabling the output start setting in response to an operation on the operation means (21) by the player. , 97)
The output start setting means (51) performs the output start part setting by the player by operating the operation means (21) when the display screen is the output start setting screen (87, 97). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes C1 to C5, wherein, when an operation is performed, the output start setting for the provisionally selected music piece or the selected music piece is performed according to the setting content set by the player. .

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C6, since the output start portion of the tentatively selected music piece or the selected music piece can be set, the temporarily selected music piece or the selected music piece can be output from the audio output means from a portion that matches the player's preference. it can.

[Appendix C7]
The gaming machine according to attachment C6, wherein the plurality of output start portions include a music start portion and a chorus portion.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C7, the player can cause the tentatively selected music piece or the selected music piece to start outputting from the music start portion or the chorus portion. Therefore, the player can start outputting the tentatively selected music piece or the selected music piece from a portion that suits his or her taste. Here, the music start part or the chorus part is characteristic compared to other parts such as the B melody part of the music. For this reason, the player selects whether the tentatively selected music or the selected music is the previously selected music by selecting the part for starting the output of the temporarily selected music or the selected music from the music start part and the chorus part. This makes it easy to determine whether a song has not been played or has not been heard before.

[Appendix C8]
Output start setting storage means (512) capable of storing setting history information on an output start setting history for the output start setting;
The effect execution means (51) is provided as the output start setting screen (87, 97) on the image display means (341) in response to an operation on the operation means (21) by a player. (512) The screen is shifted to an output start setting history screen (87) displaying an output start setting history image (871) corresponding to the setting history information stored in (512),
The output start setting means (51) is configured to perform, when the display screen is the output start setting history screen (87), an operation for performing the output start setting based on the output start setting history image (871) by a player. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C6 or C7, wherein, when performed, the output start setting having the content set by the player is performed.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C8, the player performs a setting operation on the operation unit when the display screen on the image display unit is the output start setting history screen, thereby outputting the same content as the past output start setting. Can be a start setting. Therefore, when the player wants to return to the previous settings, the player can make a desired output start setting based on the output start setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix C9]
The gaming machine according to claim C8, wherein the effect execution means (51) displays the output start setting history image (871) including an image indicating a set time on the output start setting history screen (87). .

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C9, the player can distinguish between the output start setting history of the player who previously played the game and his / her own output start setting history by referring to the set time. In addition, when there is an output start setting history to be selected in its own output start setting history, it is easy to obtain a prospect of selecting a desired output start setting history. Therefore, the player can make a desired output start setting based on the output start setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix D1]
Main control means (41) for determining whether or not to shift the game state to a special game state advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition;
Effecting means (26, 341 etc.) including image display means (341) for effecting an image, and sound output means (26) for effecting the output of music;
A music selection image (83) for allowing a player to select a music to be output by the audio output means (26) from a plurality of music is displayed on the image display means (341), and based on the music selection image (83). Effect execution means (51) for outputting the music selected by the player to the sound output means (26);
Operating means (21) operated by a player when selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26) based on the music selection image (83) displayed by the image display means (341);
With
The effect executing means (51) includes:
The tune selection image (83) indicates that the tune is a tentatively selected tune that can be selected by at least a determination operation on the operation means (21) by a player for selecting a tune to be output by the audio output means (26). Displaying the temporarily selected music image (832) on the image display means (341);
Changing the tentatively selected music image (832) in the music selection image (83) in response to an operation on the operation means (21) by the player;
When the provisionally selected music image (832) is displayed on the image display means (341), the audio output means (26) outputs the provisionally selected music piece. Output the selected music as the selected music from the audio output means (26);
A gaming machine, wherein, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the temporarily selected music piece output from the audio output means (26) is continuously output at a timing when the determination operation is performed.

According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D1, the temporarily selected music piece is continuously output when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the selected music is output continuously without interruption from the provisional selection stage, so that the same portion of the music is output in a short time from the provisional selection stage to the music selection stage. Is prevented. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from listening to the chorus portion of the same music in a short time and to feel a sense of discomfort and disgust when the music is interrupted.
Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the degree of interest in special games and the interest in special games, thereby improving the player's willingness to play.

[Appendix D2]
The gaming machine according to supplementary note D1, wherein the predetermined condition is that the selected music piece is the already selected music piece.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D2, when the temporarily selected music piece is the already selected music piece, the already selected music piece is continuously and continuously output from the stage of the temporary selection. This prevents the chorus portion of the same song from being output redundantly in a short time from the stage of the tentative selection to the stage of selecting the song. Can be suppressed.

[Appendix D3]
When the tentatively selected music piece is the selected music piece, the effect execution means (51) causes the audio output means (26) to output a music start part (for example, a singing start part (A melody part) of the selected music piece, The gaming machine according to supplementary note D2, wherein the game machine outputs the information from an intro part (prelude part).

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D3, when the tentatively selected song is the already-selected song, the already-selected song is output from the song start portion, and when the selected song is the already-selected song, the tentatively-selected song continues. Output. In other words, when the selected music is selected, the music is output from the music start portion at the temporary selection stage, and even when the music is selected, the already selected music is continuously output from the temporary selection stage. This not only prevents the chorus portion of the same song from being output in duplicate in a short time from the selection stage to the song selection stage, but also at least temporarily starts the song start portion of the already-selected song at the temporary selection stage. I can hear it reliably. In addition, since the already-selected music is continuously output from the temporary selection stage, the player can increase the tension from the music start portion toward the chorus portion, and maintain the tension at a high level.

[Appendix D4]
The special game state includes a first special game state (a 5R normal jackpot game state and a 5R sure-change jackpot game state), and a second special game state (16R sure-change jackpot game state) in which the game time is longer than the first special game state. Including
The gaming machine according to attachment D1, wherein the predetermined condition is that the gaming state is the first special gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D4, in the first special gaming state in which the game time is short, the player performs the tentative selection music output from the sound output means at the timing when the deciding operation is performed, and performs the deciding operation. You can continue to listen to the part that was output when it was played. That is, in the first special game state, the same portion of the music is output both during the temporary selection of the music and after the selection of the music during a short game time, or the music is output from a different portion again after the selection of the music. That has been avoided. As a result, the music can be continuously listened to within the short game time, so that the music can be enjoyed without stress even during the short game time.

[Appendix D5]
The gaming machine according to attachment D4, wherein the effect executing means (51) causes the audio output means (26) to output the tentatively selected music piece from a chorus portion in the first special gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D5, in the first special gaming state, the climax part of the tentatively selected song that has the highest climax can be heard by the player. An opportunity to convey the goodness of the selected song can be secured. On the other hand, since the player can listen to the climax portion of the temporarily selected music that has a high degree of excitement, it is easy to determine whether the temporarily selected music is a favorite music or a music previously selected and liked. In addition, when the game state is the first special game state, by outputting the tentatively selected music piece from the chorus portion, the player can surely listen to the chorus portion after the selection of the music piece after the tentative selection, and You can listen to music continuously from the part without stress.

[Appendix D6]
In the second special game state, when the deciding operation is performed, the effect executing means (51) causes the audio output means (26) to send the selected music to a music start portion (for example, a singing start portion (A melody portion). ), The game machine according to Supplementary Note D4 or Supplementary Note D5, wherein the game machine outputs the information from an intro part (prelude part).

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D6, when the gaming state is the second special gaming state, the temporarily selected music is output from the music start portion. Therefore, in the second special game state in which the game time is long, the player can listen to the music output from the audio output means when the determination operation is performed again from the music start portion. That is, in the second special game state, since the game time has enough time, the music including the chorus portion of the music can be sufficiently enjoyed from the music start portion.

[Appendix D7]
The said effect execution means (51) makes said audio | voice output means (26) output said temporary selection music from a music start part in said 2nd special game state, It is any one of addition D4 to addition D6 characterized by the above-mentioned. The gaming machine described.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D7, when the gaming state is the second special gaming state, the temporarily selected music is output from the music start portion. Therefore, in the second special game state in which the game time is long, the player can listen to the music output from the audio output means when the determination operation is performed again from the music start portion. That is, in the second special game state, since the game time has enough time, the music including the chorus portion of the music can be sufficiently enjoyed from the music start portion. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the first special gaming state, the temporarily selected music is output from the music start portion as described above. Therefore, the player can determine whether the gaming state is the first special gaming state or the second special gaming state depending on whether the provisionally selected music is output from the chorus part or the music starting part. is there. Further, the game time is different between the first special game state and the second special game state, and generally the expected game value tends to be higher as the game time is longer. Therefore, the player can enjoy by paying attention to the output start portion of the temporarily selected music piece in order to determine whether or not the second special game state is more generally advantageous for the player.

[Appendix D8]
The effect executing means (51) is a selected music piece that has already been selected by the player as the music piece to be output by the audio output means (26) as the music piece selected image (83). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes D1 to D7, wherein the music image (831) is further displayed on the image display means (341) so as to be identifiable.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D8, the player tentatively selects the selected tune and displays the tentatively selected tune image by operating the operation unit while checking the position of the selected tune image in the selected tune image. Can be done. In addition, by performing a determination operation on the operation means in a state where the previously selected music piece previously selected is displayed as the tentatively selected music image, the selected music piece can be output from the audio output means. Therefore, the player can efficiently select the previously selected music piece with a small number of operations on the operation means, and output the selected music piece from the audio output means.

[Appendix D9]
The effect executing means (51) includes:
As the music selection image (83), an unselected music image (833) indicating that it is an unselected music other than the selected music among the plurality of music is further identifiably displayed on the image display means (341). Display,
When displaying the music selection image (83) on the image display means (341), the plurality of initial provisionally selected music pieces for the initial provisional selection music image (832) to be displayed first as the provisional selection music image (832) are displayed. The gaming machine according to supplementary note D8, wherein a selection is made from the unselected songs among the songs.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D9, when the music selection image is displayed, the temporarily selected music to be displayed as the temporarily selected music image is first selected from the unselected music, and the unselected music is output from the audio output unit. . Therefore, even when the player finally selects a music piece from the already selected music piece, it is possible for the player to listen to the unselected music piece in the process up to that point, and the goodness of the unselected music piece to the player. Can give an opportunity to communicate.

[Appendix D10]
The operation means (21) is operated by a player when setting related to effects in the special game state,
An output start setting means for performing an output start setting of starting from the music start portion or the chorus portion according to a setting operation on the operation means (21) by the player to start output of the tentatively selected music piece or the selected music piece. 51) is further provided,
The effect executing means (51) changes the display screen of the image display means (341) to an output start setting screen (87) enabling the output start setting in response to an operation on the operation means (21) by the player. , 97)
The output start setting means (51) performs the output start part setting by the player by operating the operation means (21) when the display screen is the output start setting screen (87, 97). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes D1 to D9, wherein when an operation is performed, the output start setting is performed in accordance with the setting content set by the player.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D10, the player can perform setting of the output start of the temporarily selected music or the selected music. Therefore, by setting the output start portion, the player can output the tentatively selected music piece or the selected music piece from a favorite part of the player.

[Appendix D11]
Output start setting storage means (512) capable of storing output start setting history information on an output start setting history for the output start setting;
The effect execution means (51) is provided as the output start setting screen (87, 97) on the image display means (341) in response to an operation on the operation means (21) by a player. (512) The screen is shifted to an output start setting history screen (87) displaying an output start setting history image (871B) corresponding to the output start setting history information stored in (512),
When the output screen is the output start setting history screen (87), the output start setting means (51) performs an operation for performing the output start setting by the player based on the output start setting history image (871B). The game machine according to Supplementary Note D10, wherein when the game is performed, the output start setting of the content set by the player is performed.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D11, when the display screen on the image display unit is the output start setting history screen, the player performs a setting operation on the operation unit to output the same content as the past output start setting. Can be a start setting. Therefore, when the player wants to return to the previous output start setting, the player can make a desired output start setting based on the output start setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix D12]
The gaming machine according to attachment D11, wherein the effect executing means (51) displays the output start setting history image (871B) including an image indicating a set time on the output start setting history screen (87). .

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D12, the player can distinguish between the output start setting history of the player who has played a game before and his / her own output start setting history by referring to the set time. In addition, when there is an output start setting history to be selected in its own output start setting history, it is easy to obtain a prospect of selecting a desired output start setting history. Therefore, the player can make a desired output start setting based on the output start setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix E1]
Main control means (41) for determining whether or not to shift the game state to a special game state advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition;
Effecting means (26, 341 etc.) including image display means (341) for effecting an image, and sound output means (26) for effecting the output of music;
A music selection image (83) for allowing a player to select a music to be output by the audio output means (26) from a plurality of music is displayed on the image display means (341), and based on the music selection image (83). Effect execution means (51) for outputting the music selected by the player to the sound output means (26);
Operating means (21) operated by a player when selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26) based on the music selection image (83) displayed by the image display means (341);
With
The effect executing means (51) includes:
The tune selection image (83) indicates that the tune is a tentatively selected tune that can be selected by at least a determination operation on the operation means (21) by a player for selecting a tune to be output by the audio output means (26). Displaying the temporarily selected music image (832) on the image display means (341);
Changing the tentatively selected music image (832) in the music selection image (83) in response to an operation on the operation means (21) by the player;
When the provisionally selected music image (832) is displayed on the image display means (341), the audio output means (26) outputs the provisionally selected music piece. Output the selected music as the selected music from the audio output means (26);
When displaying the tentatively selected music image (832) on the image display means (341), the tentatively selected music piece has already been selected by the player as music to be output by the audio output means (26). If it is an unselected song other than the selected song, the audio output means (26) outputs the unselected song from the chorus portion,
A gaming machine, wherein when the selected music piece is the unselected music piece, the audio output means (26) outputs the unselected music piece from a music start portion.

According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E1, the temporarily selected music is output from the chorus portion, and the selected music is output from the music start portion. Therefore, when an unselected song that has not been selected before is selected, the music start portion and rust portion of the unselected song can be heard by the player, so that the player can fully enjoy the unselected song. Can be told. On the other hand, the player does not listen to the rust portion already output at the stage of the provisional selection in a short time, and even if the time required for the special game is short, the unselected music that is the selected music is After selecting a song, the user can listen to the song from the start of the song, and can check again whether the unselected song matches his / her taste.
Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can increase the degree of interest in special games and the interest in special games, thereby improving the player's willingness to play.

[Appendix E2]
The effect executing means (51) displays a predetermined number (for example, "10") of music selection images (83) that is a predetermined number smaller than the number of the plurality of music pieces (for example, "20") to the image display means. (341) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E1, wherein the gaming machine is displayed.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E2, there are prepared so many songs that the image display means cannot display them all at once, and in the case where a song selection image for some of the plurality of songs is displayed. Even so, the already-selected music image for selecting the already-selected music is displayed, so that the already-selected music can be easily selected by a simple operation.

[Appendix E3]
The effect executing means (51) causes the image display means (341) to distinguishably display the temporarily selected music image (832) and the already-selected music image (831) indicating the temporarily selected music image. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E1 or E2, characterized in that:

[Appendix E4]
The gaming machine according to attachment E3, wherein the effect executing means (51) displays the selected music image (831) in a display mode different from that of the provisionally selected music image (832).

[Appendix E5]
The attraction execution means (51) displays an additional image indicating the selected music on at least a part of the periphery of the selected music image (831), wherein the additional image is displayed. Gaming machine.

[Appendix E6]
The said effect execution means (51) displays the said selected music image (831) in the predetermined area | region in the said image display means (341), Either of the supplementary notes E3 to E5 characterized by the above-mentioned. Gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machines according to Supplementary Notes E3 to E6, the already-selected music image is displayed in a form that can be distinguished from the temporarily-selected music image, so that it is easier to find the already-selected music image from the selected music images. Therefore, the convenience in temporarily selecting and selecting the already-selected music is further improved.

[Appendix E7]
The effect producing means (51) displays on the image display means (341) a predetermined upper limit number of the selected music images (831) selected from two or more numbers on the image display means (341). To E6.

[Appendix E8]
A storage unit (512) for storing selected music information on the selected music;
The effect executing means (51) displays the upper limit number of the selected music images (831) on the image display means (341) based on the selected music information stored in the storage means (512). The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E7, wherein the gaming machine is operated.

  According to the gaming machines of Supplementary Note E7 and Supplementary Note E8, in the special gaming state, a music selection image including the selected music images of not more than the upper limit number selected from two or more is displayed on the image display means. That is, a plurality of selected music images can be displayed. Further, by setting an upper limit on the number of the selected music images, the display of an excessive number of the selected music images is prevented. Therefore, the player can select the previously selected music piece based on an appropriate number of the already selected music images, thereby reducing the operation burden when selecting the already selected music piece.

[Appendix E9]
The gaming machine according to attachment E8, wherein, when a plurality of music selections are performed in the special gaming state, the storage unit (512) sets only the last selected music as a selected music.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E9, when music selection is performed a plurality of times in the special game state, only the music selected last is regarded as the selected music. Therefore, even if a plurality of music selections are performed during the execution of one special game state, the final selection music becomes clear and the already-selected music image is occupied by the already-selected music for one special game state. Can be prevented. In addition, for example, when the user does not like the music once selected and reselects another music, it is possible to prevent the unfavorable music from being displayed as the already-selected music image and to select the newly selected music from the already-selected music. Convenience when selecting based on a music image is improved.

[Appendix E10]
In the initial music selection image (83) to be displayed first on the image display means (341), the effect executing means (51) temporarily selects the upper limit number of the selected music images (831) in descending order of selection date and time. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes E7 to E9, wherein the gaming machine is arranged and displayed at a position close to the selected music image (832).

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E10, in the music selection image displayed first, the already-selected music image corresponding to the newly-selected music with the new selection date and time is displayed at a position near the tentatively-selected music image. Therefore, when the music selection image is displayed, the player can easily find the most recently selected music piece, and can again select the most recently selected music piece by the number of operations on the operation means. As a result, the player can reduce the operation burden when selecting the most recently selected music piece again, and can concentrate on the special game and enjoy the game.

[Appendix E11]
In the initial music selection image (83) to be displayed first on the image display means (341), the effect execution means (51) temporarily selects the upper limit number of the selected music images (831) in descending order of selection frequency. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes E7 to E9, wherein the gaming machine is arranged and displayed at a position close to the selected music image.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E11, the already-selected music image corresponding to the already-selected music having a high selection frequency (for example, the number of selections or the selection rate within a predetermined number of times) is displayed at a position near the temporarily-selected music image. That is, the already-selected music image is displayed as reflecting the recent tendency of the player to select music. Therefore, when the music selection image is displayed, the player can easily find the recently selected music that has been recently selected, and can again select the recently selected music with a small number of operations on the operation means. Thereby, the player can reduce the operation burden when selecting the recently selected music piece again, and can enjoy the game by focusing on the special game.

[Appendix E12]
The said effect execution means (51) makes the said image display means (341) display all of the said upper limit number of the said selected music image (831) as a thing with respect to a different music, Additional note E7-Additional note E11 characterized by the above-mentioned. A gaming machine according to any of the above.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E12, since the selected music images do not include a plurality of images corresponding to the same music, even when the display number of the selected music images has an upper limit, the music corresponding to the upper limit is set. The selected music images corresponding to the number of the selected music are displayed. Therefore, when the player repeatedly selects the same music and wants to select a selected music other than that music, the player can easily find the already-selected music to be selected. As a result, the operation burden when the player selects the previously selected music piece again is reduced, so that the player can concentrate on the special game and enjoy the game.

[Appendix E13]
When the display number of the selected music image (831) to be displayed on the image display means (341) is less than the upper limit number, the display number is insufficient for the upper limit number (for example, “1” to “3”). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary notes E7 to E12, wherein the unselected song image (833) is displayed as the song selected image (83) indicating that the song is the unselected song. .

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E13, even when the number of already-selected music images to be displayed on the image display means is less than the upper limit, an unselected music image is displayed instead of the already-selected music image. Thereby, the specified number of music selection images can be displayed on the image display means without excess or deficiency.

[Appendix E14]
The effect executing means (51) includes:
As the music selection image (83), an unselected music image (833) indicating the non-selected music among the plurality of music is further displayed on the image display means (341) so as to be identifiable. A gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes E1 to E13.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E14, the player can distinguish and recognize the previously-selected music image that has been selected previously and the unselected music image that has not been previously selected. By operating the operation means while checking, it is possible to tentatively select an unselected song and display it as a tentatively selected song image. Therefore, even when selecting a non-selected song instead of the already-selected song, the player can select the non-selected song with a small number of operations on the operation unit and output the unselected song from the audio output unit.

[Appendix E15]
The rendering executing means (51), when displaying the music selection image (83) on the image display means (341), displays the temporarily selected music image (832) with the selected music image (831) and the unselected music image (831). The gaming machine according to attachment E14, wherein the gaming machine is displayed between the selected music image (833).

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E15, at least at the stage where the music selection image is first displayed on the image display means, both the selected image and the unselected image are adjacent to the provisionally selected music image. For this reason, the player changes the tentatively selected music image in the music selection image by operating the operation means, thereby selecting either the previously selected music that has been selected before or the unselected music that has not been previously selected. Even if the user selects a music piece, the target music piece can be provisionally selected with a small number of operations. Therefore, the target music can be selected with a small number of operations, and the target music can be output from the audio output unit.

[Appendix E16]
When displaying the music selection image (83) on the image display means (341), the effect executing means (51) sets the plurality of initial provisionally selected music pieces for the initial provisional selection music image (832) to be displayed first. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes E1 to E15, wherein a selection is made from the unselected songs among the songs.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E16, the initial provisionally selected music piece is selected from the unselected music pieces, and the initial provisionally selected music piece that is the unselected music piece is output from the audio output means. Therefore, even when the player finally selects a music piece from the already selected music piece, it is possible for the player to listen to the unselected music piece in the process up to that point, and the goodness of the unselected music piece to the player. Can give an opportunity to communicate.

[Appendix E17]
When the tentatively selected song or the selected song is the already-selected song and the unselected song, the tentatively-selected song or the selected song is played from the different portion of the tentatively-selected song or the selected song. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes E1 to E16, wherein the gaming machine outputs the output means (26).

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E17, by performing a determination operation on the operation means in a state where the unselected music pieces are displayed as the temporarily selected music images, the unselected music pieces that have not been selected before can be replaced with the already selected music pieces. It is possible to output to the audio output means from a different part of the music than the case where it is selected. This allows the player to listen to the selected music from different parts when the selected music is selected and when the unselected music is selected, so that the player outputs the selected music and the unselected music. The user can enjoy the music in a different way than when the music is output.

[Appendix E18]
In the supplementary note E17, the effect executing means (51) causes the audio output means (26) to output the music from the music start portion of the selected music when the provisionally selected music is the selected music. The gaming machine described.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E18, the player can listen to the tentatively selected music piece from the music start portion when the tentatively selected music piece is the already-selected music piece, and can perform rusting when the temporarily selected music piece is an unselected music piece. You can listen from the part. Therefore, regarding the tentatively selected song, the previously selected song can be enjoyed from the start portion. On the other hand, since the player can listen to the music that has not been selected before from the climax part of the music that has the highest climax, the player determines whether or not the temporarily selected music is the music of his choice. It will be easier.

[Appendix E19]
The effect executing means (51), when the selected music piece is the selected music piece, causes the audio output means (26) to output the selected music piece from a music start portion, and the selected music piece is the unselected music piece. The gaming machine according to Supplementary note E17 or E18, wherein in some cases, the unselected music is output from the chorus portion to the audio output means (26).

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E19, the player can listen to the selected music piece from the music start part when the selected music piece is the already selected music piece, and can start listening to the chorus part when the selected music piece is the unselected music piece. You can listen. Therefore, with respect to the selected music, the player can enjoy the music from the start part for the music selected before. On the other hand, the player can listen to music that has not been selected before from the climax part of the music that is the most exciting, so it is easy to determine whether the selected music this time is the music of his choice Become.

[Appendix E20]
The operation means (21) is operated by a player when setting related to effects in the special game state,
Display setting means (51) for performing display setting as to whether or not to display the selected music image (831) in response to a setting operation on the operation means (21) by a player;
The effect executing means (51) includes:
A display setting screen which enables a display screen of the image display means (341) to be set in accordance with an operation on the operation means (21) by a player, whether or not to display the selected music image (831). (88, 98)
The display setting means (51) is configured to execute the setting operation by the player by operating the operation means (21) when the display screen is shifted to the display setting screen (88, 98). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes E3 to E13, wherein the display setting is performed in accordance with setting contents set by a player.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E20, since it is possible to set whether to display the specific image included in the music selection image, the music selection image can be displayed on the image display means in a display mode according to the player's preference. it can. Thereby, the player can select the music to be output from the audio output means based on the music selection image in the display mode set by the player. Further, the player can select whether or not to display the selected music image in the music selection image. Therefore, for example, when the music selection image includes the already-selected music image corresponding to the already-selected music selected by the previous player in the past, the player displays the music selection image that does not include the already-selected music image. be able to.

[Appendix E21]
A display setting storage unit (512) capable of storing display setting history information on a display setting history for the display setting;
The effect executing means (51) is provided as the display setting screen (88, 98) in the image display means (341) in response to an operation on the operation means (21) by a player. ) To a display setting history screen (88) displaying a setting history image (881) corresponding to the display setting history information stored in
The display setting unit (51) is configured to perform a setting operation for performing the display setting based on the display setting history image (881) by the player when the display screen is the display setting history screen (88). The gaming machine according to attachment E20, wherein the display setting of the content set by the player is performed.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E21, when the display screen of the image display unit is the display setting history screen, the player performs the setting operation on the operation unit, thereby performing the same display setting as the past setting contents. Can be. Therefore, when the player wants to return to the previous setting, the player can make a desired display setting based on the display setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix E22]
The gaming machine according to attachment E21, wherein the effect executing means (51) displays the display setting history image (881) including an image indicating a set time on the display setting history screen (88).

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E22, by referring to the set time, for example, it is possible to distinguish between the display setting history of the player who has been playing before and the display setting history of the player itself, When there is a display setting history to be selected in its own display setting history, it is easy to give a prospect of selecting a desired display setting history. Therefore, the player can make desired display settings based on the display setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix E23]
An output for making an output start setting for starting the output of the provisionally selected music or the selected music from any of a plurality of output start parts predetermined according to a setting operation on the operation means (21) by the player. Further comprising start setting means (51);
The effect executing means (51) changes the display screen of the image display means (341) to an output start setting screen (87) enabling the output start setting in response to an operation on the operation means (21) by the player. , 97)
The output start setting means (51) performs the output start part setting by the player by operating the operation means (21) when the display screen is the output start setting screen (87, 97). The game according to any one of Supplementary notes E1 to E22, wherein, when an operation is performed, the output start setting for the provisionally selected music piece or the selected music piece is performed according to the setting content set by the player. Machine.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E23, the output start portion of the tentatively selected song or the selected song can be set, so that the tentatively selected song or the selected song can be output from the audio output means from a portion that matches the player's preference. it can.

[Appendix E24]
The gaming machine according to attachment E23, wherein the plurality of output start portions include a music start portion and a chorus portion.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E24, the player can cause the tentatively selected music piece or the selected music piece to be output from the music start portion or the chorus portion. Therefore, the player can start outputting the tentatively selected music piece or the selected music piece from a portion that suits his or her taste. Here, the music start part or the chorus part is characteristic compared to other parts such as the B melody part of the music. For this reason, the player selects whether the tentatively selected music or the selected music is the previously selected music by selecting the part for starting the output of the temporarily selected music or the selected music from the music start part and the chorus part. This makes it easy to determine whether a song has not been played or has not been heard before.

[Appendix E25]
Output start setting storage means (512) capable of storing output start setting history information on an output start setting history for the output start setting;
The effect executing means (51) is provided as the output start setting screen (87, 97) on the image display means (341) in response to an operation by the player on the operation means (21). (512) The screen is shifted to an output start setting history screen (87) displaying an output start setting history image (871) corresponding to the output start setting history information stored in (512),
The output start setting means (51) is configured to perform, when the display screen is the output start setting history screen (87), an operation for performing the output start setting based on the output start setting history image (871) by a player. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E23 or E24, wherein, when performed, the output start setting having the content set by the player is performed.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E25, when the display screen on the image display unit is the output start setting history screen, the player performs a setting operation on the operation unit, thereby outputting the same content as the past output start setting. Can be a start setting. Therefore, when the player wants to return to the previous settings, the player can make a desired output start setting based on the output start setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix E26]
The gaming machine according to attachment E25, wherein the effect executing means (51) displays the output start setting history image (871) including an image indicating a set time on the output start setting history screen (87). .

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E26, by referring to the set time, for example, the output start setting history of the player who previously played the game and the output start setting history of the player itself can be distinguished. In addition, when there is an output start setting history to be selected in its own output start setting history, it is easy to obtain a prospect of selecting a desired output start setting history. Therefore, the player can make a desired output start setting based on the output start setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix F1]
Main control means (41) for determining whether or not to shift the game state to a special game state advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition;
Effecting means (26, 341 etc.) including image display means (341) for effecting an image, and sound output means (26) for effecting the output of music;
A music selection image (83) for allowing a player to select a music to be output by the audio output means (26) from a plurality of music is displayed on the image display means (341), and based on the music selection image (83). Effect execution means (51) for outputting the music selected by the player to the sound output means (26);
Operating means (21) operated by a player when selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26) based on the music selection image (83) displayed by the image display means (341);
With
The effect executing means (51) includes:
The tune selection image (83) indicates that the tune is a tentatively selected tune that can be selected by at least a determination operation on the operation means (21) by a player for selecting a tune to be output by the audio output means (26). Displaying the temporarily selected music image (832) on the image display means (341);
Changing the tentatively selected music image (832) in the music selection image (83) in response to an operation on the operation means (21) by the player;
When the provisionally selected music image (832) is displayed on the image display means (341), the audio output means (26) outputs the provisionally selected music piece. The selected music is output to the audio output means (26) as a selected music,
Causing the audio output means (26) to start outputting the provisionally selected music piece or the selected music piece from a first part of a plurality of predetermined output start parts;
When satisfying a predetermined condition on condition that the actual game situation is more advantageous to the player than the game situation suggested by the staging means, the voice output means (26) outputs Wherein the output of the tentatively selected song or the selected song is started from a second portion of the output start portion different from the first portion.

According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F1, the tentatively selected music piece or the selected music piece is output from the first portion, but in a gaming situation where the actual gaming situation is more advantageous to the player than the gaming situation suggested by the directing means. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the tentatively selected music piece or the selected music piece is output from a second part different from the first part. In other words, the player can output a tentatively selected song or a selected song from a second portion different from the first portion, so that the current game situation is more advantageous to the player than the game situation suggested by the production means. You can get to know the situation. Therefore, the operation for provisionally selecting or selecting a music is not merely an act of temporarily selecting or selecting a music, but an actual game situation in a game situation more advantageous to the player than the game situation suggested by the production means. It can be enjoyed as an act to confirm whether or not there is. Thereby, a motivation to temporarily select or select a music piece can be provided to the player, and the player can actively participate in the special game.
Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the degree of interest in special games and the interest in special games, thereby improving the player's willingness to play.

[Appendix F2]
The gaming state includes a first gaming state, a second gaming state in which a probability that the main control means (41) determines to shift the gaming state to the special gaming state is higher than the first gaming state, Including the special game state,
The special game state is a first special game state in which the game state is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game state, and the game state is changed to the second game state after the end of the special game state A second special game state to be shifted,
The effect executing means (51) is configured to determine that the game state suggested by the effect means is a first special game state and that the actual game state is the second special game state. Alternatively, the gaming machine according to supplementary note F1, wherein the selected music is output from the second portion to the audio output means (26).

  According to the gaming machine related to the supplementary note F2, when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the second special gaming state, the selected music piece is output from the second part. That is, when the player selects a song, the selected song is output from the second portion, so that the current special game state is the second special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game state. You can get to know that. Therefore, the deciding operation for selecting a song is not merely an act of selecting a song, but an act of confirming whether the second special game state is more advantageous to the player than the first special game state. Can be. Thereby, the player can be motivated to positively select a music piece, and the player can actively participate in the special game.

[Appendix F3]
The effect executing means (51) is configured to select the tentatively selected music piece or the selected music piece from the plurality of music pieces as a music piece to be output by the audio output means (26), which has already been selected by a player. The gaming machine according to Supplementary note F1 or F2, wherein the audio output unit (26) outputs the tentatively selected tune or the selected tune from the second portion on condition that the tune is an unselected tune other than a tune. .

  According to the gaming machine related to Supplementary Note F3, the selected music piece is output from the second part on the condition that the temporarily selected music piece or the selected music piece is an unselected music piece in the second special game state. That is, when the tentatively selected or selected unselected music is output from the second part, the actual game situation is more than the game situation suggested by the production means. It can be easily known that the game situation is advantageous for the player. Therefore, the operation of temporarily selecting or selecting a music piece can be enjoyed not as an act of simply temporarily selecting or selecting a music piece, but as an act of confirming whether or not a game situation is advantageous for the player. Thereby, the player can be motivated to actively select or select an unselected music piece and listen to the unselected music piece, thereby securing an opportunity to convey the goodness of the unselected music piece to the player.

[Appendix F4]
When the tentatively selected song or the selected song is the unselected song, the first portion of the tentatively selected song or the selected song is a chorus portion, and the second portion of the tentatively selected song or the selected song is The gaming machine according to supplementary note F3, wherein the gaming machine is a music start portion.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F4, while the first part is a rust part, the second part is a music start part that is clearly different from the first part, so that the temporarily selected music or the selected music is the second part. When output from the portion, a clear sense of incongruity can be given to the player. Thus, the player can easily know that the actual game situation is a more advantageous game situation for the player than the game situation suggested by the rendering means. As a result, the player can enjoy the tentative selection or selection of music by paying attention to whether the temporarily selected music or the selected music is output from the first part or the second part.

[Appendix F5]
When the tentatively selected song or the selected song is the unselected song, the first portion of the tentatively selected song or the selected song is a song start portion and the second portion of the tentatively selected song or the selected song. The gaming machine according to claim F3, wherein R is a rust portion.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F5, while the first part is a music start part, the second part is a chorus part that is clearly different from the first part, so that the temporarily selected music or the selected music is the second part. When output from the portion, a clear sense of incongruity can be given to the player. Thus, the player can easily know that the actual game situation is a more advantageous game situation for the player than the game situation suggested by the rendering means. As a result, the player can enjoy the tentative selection or selection of music by paying attention to whether the temporarily selected music or the selected music is output from the first part or the second part.

[Appendix F6]
The effect executing means (51) is provided on condition that the tentatively selected music piece or the selected music piece is a selected music piece that has already been selected by a player as a music piece to be output by the audio output means (26). The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F1 or F2, wherein an audio output unit (26) outputs the provisionally selected music piece or the selected music piece from the second part.

  According to the gaming machine related to Supplementary Note F6, even when the already-selected song is provisionally selected or selected, the temporarily-selected song or the selected song is output from the second portion. That is, when the player selects or selects the already-selected music, the temporarily selected music or the selected music is output from the second part, so that the actual gaming situation is more than the gaming situation suggested by the production means. It can be easily known that the game situation is advantageous for the player. Therefore, the operation of temporarily selecting or selecting an unselected music piece can be enjoyed not as an act of simply selecting a music piece, but as an act of confirming whether or not a game situation is advantageous to the player.

[Appendix F7]
When the tentatively selected song is the already-selected song, the tentatively selected song or the first portion of the selected song is a song start portion, and the tentatively selected song or the second portion of the selected song is a chorus portion. The gaming machine according to supplementary note F6, wherein:

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F7, while the first part is the music start part, the second part is a chorus part that is clearly different from the first part, so that the temporarily selected music or the selected music is the second music. When output from the portion, a clear sense of incongruity can be given to the player. Thus, the player can easily know that the actual game situation is a more advantageous game situation for the player than the game situation suggested by the rendering means. As a result, the player can enjoy the tentative selection or selection of music by paying attention to whether the temporarily selected music or the selected music is output from the first part or the second part.

[Appendix F8]
When the selected music piece is the already selected music piece, the first part of the selected music piece is a continuation part of the temporarily selected music piece that has been output from the audio output means (26) at the timing when the determination operation is performed. The gaming machine according to attachment F6, wherein the second part of the selected music piece is a chorus part or a music start part.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F8, while the first part is a continuation part of the selected music piece, the second music piece is a chorus part or a music start part that is clearly different from the first music piece. When output from the second portion, a clear sense of incongruity can be given to the player. Thus, the player can easily know that the actual game situation is a more advantageous game situation for the player than the game situation suggested by the rendering means. As a result, the player can enjoy the tentative selection or selection of music by paying attention to whether the temporarily selected music or the selected music is output from the first part or the second part.

[Appendix F9]
The effect execution means (51) is configured to display the music selection image (83) on the image display means (341) as the temporary selection music, and to initially display the temporary selection music image (832) as the temporary selection music image (832). Any of the supplementary notes F1 to F8, wherein the audio output means (26) outputs the temporarily selected music piece from the second part, provided that the music piece image (832) is an initial provisionally selected music piece. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F9, even when the player does not perform any operation on the operation unit, the initial temporarily selected music is output from the second portion when the music selection image is displayed on the image display means. Can be done. Therefore, even a player who does not temporarily select or select a music piece can be informed that the actual game situation is a more advantageous game situation for the player than the game situation suggested by the rendering means.

[Appendix F10]
The special game state is a third special game state (5R normal jackpot game state and 5R certain jackpot game state) and a fourth special game state (16R certain jackpot game state) in which the game time is longer than the third special game state. Including
The effect executing means (51) includes:
In the third special game state, the tentatively selected music or the selected music is output from the first portion to the audio output means (26),
In the fourth special game state, the provisionally selected music piece is provided on condition that a suggestion effect indicating the third special game state is being executed as an effect to be executed by the effect means (26, 341, etc.). Alternatively, the gaming machine according to supplementary note F1, wherein the selected music is output from the second portion to the audio output means (26).

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F10, the provisionally selected song or the selected song is in the second special game condition on the condition that the suggestion effect indicating the third special game state is being performed in the fourth special game state. Output from That is, the player selects the tentatively selected song or the selected song from the second portion, so that the current special game state is the fourth special game state having a longer game time than the third special game state, It is possible to know that the expected value of the game value that can be obtained is high. Therefore, the player can enjoy the act of tentatively selecting or selecting a song as an act of confirming whether or not the fourth special game state in which the expected value of the game value that can be acquired from the third special game state is higher. it can.

[Appendix F11]
When the gaming state is the fourth special gaming state, the tentatively selected music or the first part of the selected music is a music start part, and the tentatively selected music or the second part of the selected music is a chorus part. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F10, wherein:

[Appendix F12]
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F10 or F11, wherein when the gaming state is the third special gaming state, the first part of the tentatively selected music piece is a chorus part.

[Appendix F13]
When the gaming state is the third special gaming state, the first part of the selected music piece is a continuation of the part output from the audio output means (26) at the timing when the determination operation is performed. The gaming machine according to supplementary note F10 or supplementary note F11, characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machines according to Supplementary Notes F11 to Supplementary Note 13, in the fourth special gaming state, the temporarily selected music piece or the first part of the selected music piece is the music start part, while the second part of the temporarily selected music piece or the selected music piece is not changed. Since the chorus portion is clearly different from the first portion, it is possible to give a clear sense of incongruity to the player when the temporarily selected music or the selected music is output from the second portion. Thus, the player can easily know that the actual game situation is a more advantageous game situation for the player than the game situation suggested by the rendering means. As a result, the player can enjoy the tentative selection or selection of music by paying attention to whether the temporarily selected music or the selected music is output from the first part or the second part.

[Appendix F14]
The said performance performing means (51) determines whether or not to output the selected music from the second part by a lottery performed in response to the determination operation of the operating means by the player as a trigger. To gaming machine according to any of supplementary notes F13.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F14, a gaming state in which the actual gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the gaming state (for example, the normal jackpot (non-probable variable jackpot) gaming state) suggested by the rendering means (for example, the probable variable jackpot gaming state) In the case of (1), the inconsistency of the output start portion of the selected music can be generated by the simple operation of the lottery by the determination operation for selecting the music.

[Appendix F15]
The gaming machine according to supplementary note F14, wherein a predetermined upper limit is provided for the number of times of the lottery per execution of the special game.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F15, it is possible to prevent the player from unnecessarily repeatedly selecting a music piece in one special game.

[Appendix F16]
The effect executing means (51) includes:
Enabling selection of music to be output by the audio output means (26) within a predetermined selection validity period in the special game state;
The promotion effect that clearly indicates that the actual game condition is a game condition more advantageous to the player than the game condition suggested by the effect means is scheduled to be executed after the selection validity period. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes F1 to F15, wherein the audio output means (26) outputs the tentatively selected music piece or the selected music piece from the second portion under a condition.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F16, when the music is provisionally selected or selected within the selection validity period, the provisionally selected music or the selected music is output from the second portion, which is suggested by the production means. It is possible to know in advance that a promotion effect that clearly indicates that the actual game situation is more advantageous to the player than the game situation is executed. Therefore, the player can enjoy the tentative selection or selection of the music by paying attention to whether the temporarily selected music or the selected music is output from the first part or the second part.

[Appendix G1]
Main control means (41) for determining whether or not to shift the game state to a special game state advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition;
Effecting means (26, 341 etc.) including image display means (341) for effecting an image, and sound output means (26) for effecting the output of music;
A music selection image (83) for allowing a player to select a music to be output by the audio output means (26) from a plurality of music is displayed on the image display means (341), and based on the music selection image (83). Effect execution means (51) for outputting the music selected by the player to the sound output means (26);
Operating means (21) operated by a player when selecting a music to be output by the audio output means (26) based on the music selection image (83) displayed by the image display means (341);
With
The effect execution means (51) is a music selection operation that indicates or indicates the gaming state on condition that a determination operation on the operation means (21) is performed by a player when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized by causing the effect means (26, 341 and the like) to execute effects (suggested effects 1 to 8, and fixed effects 1 to 4).

According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G1, a music selection operation effect indicating or indicating a gaming state is performed by a player's operation for selecting a piece of music to determine an operation means. Therefore, the player can enjoy the decision operation for selecting the music as an act for confirming the game state based on the music selection operation effect, instead of the act of simply selecting the music. Thereby, the player can be motivated to actively select a music piece, and can actively participate in the special game.
Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the degree of interest in special games and the interest in special games, thereby improving the player's willingness to play.

[Appendix G2]
The special game state includes a first special game state (5R normal jackpot game state), and a second special game state (5R certain variable jackpot game state, 16R certain variable jackpot game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the first special game state. ),
In the music selection operation effect, an expectation degree suggesting effect (suggesting effect 1 to suggesting effect 8) indicating the expectation degree that the gaming state is the second gaming state, or the gaming state is the second gaming state. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G1, wherein the gaming machine is a defined performance (determined performances 1 to 4) that clearly indicates the fact.

According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G2, an expectation degree suggestion effect that indicates the degree of expectation that the gaming state is the second special gaming state, or a confirmed effect that clearly indicates that the gaming state is the second special gaming state. By performing the setting to be executed, an expectation degree suggestion effect or a fixed effect is executed by the player's deciding operation on the operation means for selecting the music. Therefore, the deciding operation for selecting the music is not merely an act of selecting the music, but an act of confirming the degree of expectation of being in the second special game state based on the expected degree suggestive effect or the determined effect. You can enjoy as.
On the other hand, by performing the setting not to execute the expected degree suggestive effect or the confirmed effect, the expected degree suggestive effect or the determined effect is not executed even if the determination operation is performed. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the special game while expecting that the game state is the second special game state without being disappointed with the content of the music selection operation effect.

[Appendix G3]
The effect executing means (51) is provided on condition that the selected music piece is an unselected music piece other than the already selected music piece that has already been selected by the player as the music piece to be output by the audio output means (26). The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G1 or G2, wherein the gaming machine (26, 341 or the like) executes a song selection operation effect (suggested effect 1 to suggestive effect 8, fixed effect 1 to 4).

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G3, since the music selection operation effect is executed on condition that the unselected music is selected, the player who desires to execute the music selection operation effect is not actively given to the player. The selected music can be selected. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to widely listen to various songs prepared in advance for output in the special game state.

[Appendix G4]
The effect executing means (51) is configured to perform the continuous hit operation or the long press operation on the operation means (21) when selecting a music from the music selection image, on condition that the effect means (26) is selected. , 341 etc.) to execute the music selection operation effect, the gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes G1 to G3.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G4, the expectation that the gaming state is the second special gaming state by performing a continuous hit operation or a long press operation on the operation means by the player when selecting a music piece A music selection operation effect such as an effect indicating a degree of expectation is suggested. Therefore, the act of selecting music is not limited to music selection, and the continuous playing operation or long-pressing operation is performed to determine the degree of expectation of the second special game state based on a music selection operation effect such as an effect degree suggestive effect effect. It can also be enjoyed as an act to confirm. As a result, the player can be actively selected for music.

[Appendix G5]
The operating means (21) includes a first operating means (21) and a second operating means (20),
The effect executing means (51) includes:
An instruction image (84) for instructing the first operation means (21) as the operation means (20, 21) operated by a player to select a music from the music selection image (83) is displayed on the music selection image. (83) and displayed on the image display means (341),
On the condition that the operation means (20, 21) on which the determination operation has been performed is the second operation means (20) different from the instruction image (84), the music selection operation effect is executed by the effect device. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes G1 to G3, wherein the gaming machine is operated.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G5, it is expected that the gaming state is the second special gaming state by performing the deciding operation on the operating unit different from the operating unit instructed to select the music. A music selection operation effect such as an expectation effect effect that suggests a degree is executed. Therefore, the act of selecting a song is not limited to song selection, and the second special game state is established based on a song selection operation effect such as an effect indicating a degree of expectation by performing an operation on an operation device different from the instructed operation device. It can also be enjoyed as an act to confirm the degree of expectation of things. As a result, the player can be actively selected for music.

[Appendix G6]
The effect execution means (51) is configured to perform the music selection operation effect (the suggestion effects 1 to 2) when the determination operation is performed on the operation means (21) during a predetermined selection validity period in the special game state. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes G1 to G5, wherein the suggesting effect 8, the fixed effects 1 to 4) are executed by the effect means (26, 341 or the like).

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G6, a music selection operation effect such as an effect indicating a degree of expectation is performed by performing a determination operation for music selection in a predetermined period, so that the music selection operation is performed without sufficiently listening to the selected music. Unnecessary repetition of music selection for confirming whether or not an operation effect is executed can be suppressed.

[Appendix G7]
The effect execution means (51) is configured to perform the music selection operation effect (the suggestion effect 1 to the suggestion effect 8) when the number of times the determination operation is performed on the operation means (21) is equal to or less than a predetermined number of times. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes G1 to G6, wherein the effect means (26, 341 or the like) executes fixed effects 1 to 4).

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G7, since the number of times the determination operation for selecting the music is performed is equal to or less than the predetermined number, the music selection operation effect is performed, and therefore, without sufficiently listening to the selected music, Unnecessary repetition of music selection for checking whether or not the selection operation effect is executed can be suppressed.

[Appendix G8]
The operation means (21) is operated by a player when setting related to effects in the special game state,
Further comprising an effect execution setting means (51) for setting an effect execution setting as to whether the effect means (341 or the like) executes the music selection operation effect,
The effect execution means (51) changes the display screen of the image display means (341) to an effect execution setting screen (89) that enables the effect execution setting in response to an operation performed by the player on the operation means (21). , 99)
The effect execution setting means (51) performs an operation for performing the effect execution setting by a player by operating the operation means (21) when the display screen is the effect execution setting screen (89, 99). The game machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes G1 to G7, wherein when the game is performed, the effect execution setting for the music selection operation effect is performed in accordance with the setting content set by the player.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G8, it is possible to set whether or not to execute the music selection operation effect, so that the music selection operation effect can be executed according to the preference of the player. This allows the player to enjoy the music selection operation in the special game in a manner that suits him.

[Appendix G9]
Further comprising effect execution setting storage means (512) capable of storing setting history information relating to effect execution setting history for the effect execution setting,
The effect execution means (51) is used as the effect execution setting screen (89, 99) on the image display means (341) in response to an operation on the operation means (21) by a player. (512) The display is shifted to an effect execution setting history screen (89) displaying a setting history image (891) corresponding to the effect execution setting history information stored in (512),
The effect execution setting means (51) performs a setting operation for performing the effect execution setting based on the effect execution setting history image (891) by a player when the display screen is the effect execution setting history screen (89). The game machine described in Supplementary Note G8, wherein when the game is performed, the effect execution setting having the content set by the player is performed.

  According to the gaming machine related to Supplementary Note G9, when the player performs a setting operation on the operation unit when the display screen on the image display unit is the effect execution setting history screen, an effect having the same content as the past effect execution setting is performed. Execution settings can be made. Therefore, when the player wants to return to the previous setting, the player can make a desired effect execution setting based on the effect execution setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix G10]
The gaming machine according to attachment G9, wherein the effect execution means (51) displays the effect execution setting history image (891) including an image indicating a set time on the effect execution setting history screen (89). .

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G10, the player can distinguish between the effect execution setting history of the player who previously played the game and his or her own effect execution setting history by referring to the set time. Also, when there is an effect execution setting history to be selected in the own effect execution setting history, it is easy to give a possibility of selecting a desired effect execution setting history. Therefore, the player can make a desired effect execution setting based on the effect execution setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix H1]
Main control means (41) for determining whether or not to shift the game state to a special game state advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition;
A game execution means (37) for executing a game in accordance with the result of the determination by the main control means (41);
Holding means (41) for holding the right to execute a game by the game execution means (37) up to a predetermined upper limit number;
Holding storage means (412) for storing the determination result for the held game held by the holding means (41);
Effecting means (26, 341 etc.) including image display means (341) for effecting an image, and sound output means (26) for effecting the output of music;
A music selection image (83) for allowing a player to select a music to be output by the audio output means (26) from a plurality of music is displayed on the image display means (341), and based on the music selection image (83). Effect execution means (51) for outputting the music selected by the player to the sound output means (26);
Operating means (21) operated by a player when selecting a music from the music selection image (83) displayed by the image display means (341);
With
The effect executing means (51) includes, among the determination results for the reserved game stored in the reserved storage means (412), those for shifting the gaming state to the special gaming state after execution of the reserved game. In this case, after the execution of the reserved game, the determination result for the reserved game stored in the reserved storage means (412) is provided on condition that a decision operation is performed on the operation means (21) by the player. A special effect (determined effect 2 and finalized effect 4) indicating or explicitly indicating that the game state is shifted to the special game state is executed by the effect means (26, 341 etc.). Gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H1, by performing a determination operation on the operating means by the player for selecting a music, a so-called hold series of shifting the game state to the special game state after execution of the hold game is performed. The special effects shown can be performed. Therefore, the determination operation for selecting a music piece can be enjoyed not as an act of simply selecting a music piece but as an action for confirming whether or not a held extended cottage is to be executed based on a special effect. As a result, the player can be actively selected for music.
Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the degree of interest in special games and the interest in special games, thereby improving the player's willingness to play.

[Appendix H2]
The effect executing means (51) is configured to perform the continuous hit operation or the long press operation on the operation means (21) when selecting a music from the music selection image, on condition that the effect means (26) is selected. 341), the special effects (fixed effect 2 and fixed effect 4) are executed.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H2, when a song is selected, a continuous hit operation or a long press operation is performed on the operation unit by the player, so that the gaming state is changed to the special gaming state after the execution of the reserved game. , That is, a special effect indicating that a so-called reservation series is performed. Therefore, the act of selecting music can be enjoyed not only as a music selection but also as an act for confirming whether or not a held extended villa is executed based on a special effect. As a result, the player can be actively selected for music.

[Appendix H3]
The operating means (21) includes a first operating means (21) and a second operating means (20),
The effect executing means (51) includes:
An instruction image (84) for instructing the first operation means (21) as the operation means (20, 21) operated by a player to select a music from the music selection image (83) is displayed on the music selection image. (83) and displayed on the image display means (341),
On the condition that the operation means (20, 21) on which the determination operation has been performed is the second operation means (20) different from the instruction image (84), the music selection operation effect is executed by the effect device. The gaming machine according to attachment H1 or H2, wherein

  According to the gaming machine related to Supplementary Note H3, when the deciding operation is performed on an operation unit different from the operation unit instructed to select a music, the gaming state is changed to the special state after the execution of the reserved game. A special effect indicating that a so-called reservation extended villa to be shifted to a game state is performed may be executed. Therefore, the act of selecting music can be enjoyed not only as a music selection but also as an act for confirming whether or not a held extended villa is executed based on a special effect. As a result, the player can be actively selected for music. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can increase the degree of interest in special games and the interest in special games, thereby improving the player's willingness to play.

[Appendix H4]
The effect execution means (51) causes the effect means (26, 341 etc.) to execute the special effects (fixed effect 2 and fixed effect 4) on condition that the selected music piece is the unselected music piece. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes H1 to H3, characterized by features.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H4, the special effect is executed on condition that the unselected song is selected. Therefore, the player who wants to execute the special effect is actively given the unselected song. Can be selected. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to widely listen to various songs prepared in advance for output in the special game state.

[Appendix H5]
The effect executing means (51) performs the special effect on the condition that the determination operation is performed on the operation means (21) during a predetermined period in the special game state. 26, 341). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes H1 to H4.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H5, the special effect is performed on condition that the determination operation for the selection of the music is performed in the predetermined period, so that the special effect is performed without sufficiently listening to the selected music. Unnecessary repetition of music selection for confirming whether or not the music can be suppressed can be suppressed.

[Appendix H6]
The effect executing means (51) performs the special effect on the condition that the number of times the determination operation is performed on the operation means (21) is equal to or less than a predetermined number of times. 341), the gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes H1 to H5.

  According to the gaming machine related to Supplementary Note H6, the special effect is performed on the condition that the number of times the determination operation for selecting the music is performed is equal to or less than the predetermined number, so that the selected music is not sufficiently listened to. In addition, it is possible to suppress unnecessary selection of music pieces for checking whether or not a special effect is performed.

[Appendix H7]
The operation means (21) is operated by a player when setting related to effects in the special game state,
Further comprising an effect execution setting means (51) for setting an effect execution setting for causing the effect means (341 or the like) to execute the special effect;
The effect execution means (51) changes the display screen of the image display means (341) to an effect execution setting screen (89) that enables the effect execution setting in response to an operation performed by the player on the operation means (21). , 99)
The effect execution setting means (51) performs an operation for performing the effect execution setting by a player by operating the operation means (21) when the display screen is the effect execution setting screen (89, 99). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes H1 to H6, wherein when the game is performed, the effect execution setting for the special effect is performed according to the setting content set by the player.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H7, it is possible to set whether or not to execute the special effect, so that the special effect can be executed according to the preference of the player. This allows the player to enjoy the music selection operation in the special game in a manner that suits him.

[Appendix H8]
Further comprising effect execution setting storage means (512) capable of storing setting history information relating to a setting history for the effect execution setting,
The effect execution means (51) is used as the effect execution setting screen (89, 99) on the image display means (341) in response to an operation on the operation means (21) by a player. A transition is made to an effect execution setting history screen (89) displaying a setting history image (891) corresponding to the setting history information stored in (512),
The effect execution setting means (51) performs a setting operation for performing the effect execution setting based on the setting history image (891) by the player when the display screen shifts to the effect execution setting history screen (89). The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H7, wherein, when performed, the effect execution setting with the content set by the player is performed.

  According to the gaming machine related to Supplementary Note H8, the player performs the setting operation on the operation unit when the display screen on the image display unit is the effect execution setting history screen, thereby producing the same effect as the past effect execution setting. Execution settings can be made. Therefore, when the player wants to return to the previous setting, the player can make a desired effect execution setting based on the effect execution setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix H9]
The gaming machine according to attachment H8, wherein the effect execution means (51) displays the effect execution setting history image (891) including an image indicating a set time on the effect execution setting history screen (89). .

  According to the gaming machine according to the supplementary note H9, by referring to the set time, for example, it is possible to distinguish between the effect execution setting history of the player who previously played and the effect execution setting history of the player himself. Also, when there is an effect execution setting history to be selected in the own effect execution setting history, it is easy to give a possibility of selecting a desired effect execution setting history. Therefore, the player can make a desired effect execution setting based on the effect execution setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

10: gaming machine 20: operation button 20a: operation switch 21: selection determination section 21A: selection button 211: upper selection button 212: lower selection button 213: left selection button 214: right selection buttons 211a to 211d: selection operation switch 21B: Set button 21Ba: Set operation switch 26: Speaker 331: Main control unit 332: Sub control unit 341: Symbol display unit 4: Main control device 41: MPU
411: ROM
412: RAM
5: Voice lamp controller 51: MPU
511: ROM
512: RAM
6: Display control device 61: MPU
611: ROM
612: RAM
83: music selection image 831: selected music image 832: provisionally selected music image 833: unselected music image 834: non-selected music image

Claims (1)

Main control means for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state to a special gaming state advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition;
Image display means in which an effect by an image is executed, and effect means including sound output means in which an effect for outputting music is executed,
A predetermined music selection image for allowing a player to select a music to be output by the audio output means from a plurality of music is displayed on the image display means, and when a predetermined music is selected by the player, the predetermined music is selected. Effect execution means for outputting to the audio output means,
Operation means operated by a player when selecting a music to be output by the audio output means,
With
The effect executing means,
In a predetermined game state, as the predetermined music selection image, a provisionally selected music image indicating that the music is a provisionally selected music that can be selected by a determination operation on the operation means for selecting a music to be output by the audio output means. A temporarily selected music image display means to be displayed,
When the predetermined music is selected by a determination operation on the operation means, a storage unit that stores the selection of the predetermined music in an identifiable manner,
Changing means for changing the tentatively selected music image in the predetermined music selection image in accordance with a predetermined operation on the operation means by a player;
Initial setting means for setting, as the initial setting, a first unselected song not yet selected by the player as the temporarily selected song in the predetermined game state;
When a first operation is performed on the operation means in a state where the initial setting means sets the first unselected music piece as the tentatively selected music piece , a player who has already selected the music piece has already been selected by the player. Means for setting a selected song as the temporarily selected song,
In a state where the initial setting means sets the first unselected music piece as the tentatively selected music piece, when a second operation different from the first operation is performed on the operation means, the player Means for setting a second unselected song that is different from the first unselected song that has not been selected as the tentatively selected song;
With
The gaming machine further includes, when the first operation is performed on the operation unit, the first unselected song and the second unselected song that have not yet been selected by a player in a situation where the selected song does not exist. Means for setting a third unselected tune different from the unselected tune as a tentatively selected tune,
The presentation execution means, said in temporary selection plurality of the previously selected music selectable predetermined game state from already selected music as music, a first of the plurality of already selected music as before Symbol provisionally selected music image When the first operation is performed on the operation means in a state where the first selected music image corresponding to the selected music piece is displayed on the image display means, the plurality of pieces of the temporarily selected music image A game apparatus for displaying, on the image display means, a second selected music image corresponding to a second selected music piece different from the first selected music piece among the selected music pieces.